Seat Leon Sportstourer 2019 User Manual

Owner’s manual

SEAT Leon

5F0012720BN

Inglés

5F0012720BN (11.19)

SEAT Leon Inglés (11.19)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,

that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no

right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or

omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

Vehicle identiﬁcation data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification

number:

Date of vehicle registration

or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Conﬁrmation of receipt of documentation

and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered

with the vehicle:

YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was

checked

Location:

Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction

Thank you f

or your trust choosing a SEAT v

hicl

With your ne

w SEAT, you will be able to enjoy

a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology

and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-

ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle

so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily

driving.

Information about handling is complemented

with instructions regarding the operation and

maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure

its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we

want to give you valuable advice and tips to

drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting

the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety infor-

mation concerning the passenger's

front airbag

›››

page 30, Fitting and us-

ing child seats.

About this manual

This manual describes the f

eat

of the v

hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of

the features described below will be intro-

duced in the future or will only be available in

certain markets.

Some of the features described here are

not included in all the types or variations

of the model and they can be varied or

modified based on technical or marketing

requirements without it being considered

misleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary from

its vehicle and must be interpreted as a

standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,

backwards) in this manual refer to the travel

direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-

ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant to

help the users better understand some fea-

tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the

instruction manual. Access the instruction

manual to see the complete information and

warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk

are included by default only in certain

versions of the model, supplied as op-

tional only for certain versions or only of-

fered in certain countries.



Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-

sence of this symbol does not guarantee

that the term is not a trademark.

It indicates that the section continues on

the next page.

You can access the information in this manual

using:

●

Thematic table of contents that follows the

manual’s general chapter structure.

●

Visual table of contents that uses graphics

to indicate the pages containing “essential”

information, which is detailed in the corre-

sponding chapters.

●

Alphabetical index with many terms and

synonyms to help you find information.

WARNING

Texts after this symbol contain informa-

tion about safety and warn you about

possible accident or injury risks.

CAUTION

Texts after this symbol indicate possible

damage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts after this symbol contain informa-

tion about the protection of the environ-

ment.



Note

Texts after this symbol contain addition-

al information.

Printed and digital instruction man-

ual

The print

ed instruction manual cont

ains r

ant information about the use of the vehicle

and the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals contains

more in-depth information. It is available on

SEAT's official website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

Fig. 1 SEAT website

●

scan the QR code

›

Fig. 1

●

ent

er the following address in the navi-

gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-

seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicl

Related video Keyless Access

Fig. 98 Technology

103

Operation

Unlock and lock the vehicle with

eyl

ess Access*

Fig. 99

Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 100 Door handle: sensor surfaces

›››

Fig. 100

Unl

ocking sensor surf

ace on the inside of

the door handl

ocking sensor surface on the outside of

the door handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle

may hav

e the K

eyl

ess Access syst

em.

eyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-

tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle

without actively using its key. To do this, all

that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in

the detection area where you are attempting

to access the vehicle

›››

Fig. 99 and to touch

one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-

dles

›››

Fig. 100

›››

The v

ehicl

e can be unl

ock

ed and l

ocked via

the front doors only. When doing so, the re-

mote control key must be no further than ap-

prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key,

e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-

not be opened again immediately. This will

enable you to check that the doors are prop-

erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre-

sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec-

essary adjustments can be made in vehicles

with a driver information system

›››

page 92

›››

page 74.

General information

If a valid key is in the proximity of the car

›››

Fig. 99, the Keyless Access locking and

starting system gives the key entry as soon as

one of the sensor surfaces on the front door

handles is touched.

The following features are then available

without having to use the vehicle key actively:

●

Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using

the handles of the front doors or the soft-

touch/handle on the rear lid.

●

Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the

sensor of the driver or passenger door han-

dle.

●

Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine

with the starter button

›››

page 246.

The central locking and locking systems op-

erate in the same way as a normal locking

and unlocking system. Only the controls

change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a

double flash of the indicator lights; locking by

a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and

the rear lid are closed leaving the last key

used inside the vehicle and none outside, the

vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-

hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.

The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if

you do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-

onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open

any door or boot hatch.

104

Opening and closing

Unlocking and opening the doors

eyl

ess-Entry)

●

Grip one of the fr

ont door handl

es. When

you do this, you t

ouch the sensor surface

›››

Fig. 100

(arrow) of the handle and the

ehicl

e unl

ocks.

●

Open the door

On v

ehicles with selective opening or info-

tainment system configuration, pulling the

door handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-

tem: closing and locking the doors

(Keyless-Exit)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface

›››

Fig. 100

(arrow) on one of the front

door handl

es. The door that is used must be

osed.

In v

ehicl

es with the “Saf

e” security sys-

tem: closing and locking the doors

(Keyless-Exit)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch (once) the sensor surface

›››

Fig. 100

(arrow) on one of the front door handles.

The v

ehicl

e l

ocks with the “Saf

e” securit

y sys-

tem

›››

page 106. The door that is used must

be closed.

●

Touch (twice) the sensor surface

›››

Fig. 100

(arrow) of one of the front door

handl

es t

o l

ock the v

ehicl

e without activating

the “Safelock” security system

›››

page 106.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch

When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-

matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-

id vehicle key in the proximity

›››

Fig. 99.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If

the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid

will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehicle

with a second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and

it is locked from the outside with a second ve-

hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked

for engine ignition

›››

page 246. In order to

enable engine ignition, press the  button on

the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a

long period of time, the proximity sensors on

the passenger doors are automatically disa-

bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-

dles is often activated in an unusual manner

with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches

of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity

sensors are disabled for a certain period of

time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

●

After a time.

●

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-

ton  on the key.

●

OR: if the boot is opened.

●

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with

the key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection

function*

You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless

Access unlocking for one locking and unlock-

ing cycle.

●

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-

hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-

wise the vehicle cannot be locked.

●

Close the door.

●

Push the central locking button  on the re-

mote control and touch the locking sensor

surface of the driver door handle

›››

Fig. 100

within the following 5 seconds.

Do not gr

asp the door handl

e; otherwise the

ehicl

e will not unl

ock. Deactivation is also

possible if the vehicle is locked through the

driver’s door lock.

●

To check that the function has been deacti-

vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull

105

Operation

on the door handle. The door should not

open.

The ne

xt time the door can only be unl

ock

via the r

emot

e control or the lock cylinder.

The next time the door is locked/unlocked,

Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions

To close all the electric windows and the sun-

roof using the comfort function, keep a fin-

ger for a few seconds on the locking sensor

surface

›››

Fig. 100

(arrow) of the door

handl

e until the windo

ws and r

oof hav

osed.

How the doors open when touching the sen-

sor surface on the door handle will depend

on the settings that have been activated in

the infotainment system, using the button

   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Open-

ing and closing.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handles

could engage if hit with a water jet or high

pressur

e steam if there is a valid vehicle

key in the proximity. If at least one of the

electric windows is open and the sensor

surface

›››

Fig. 100

(arrow) on one of the

handles is activated continuously, all win-

dows will cl

ose.

Note

●

If the vehicle battery has little or no

char

ge, or the vehicle key battery is almost

or entirely out of charge, you will probably

not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle

with the Keyless Access system. The vehi-

cle can be unlocked or locked manually

›››

page 110.

●

To control the proper locking of the vehi-

cle, the release function is disabled for ap-

prox. 2 seconds.

●

If the message Keyless access system

faulty is displayed on the screen of the

dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the

operation of the Keyless Access system.

Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-

ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this.

●

Depending on the function set on the in-

fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-

rior mirrors will unfold and the surround

lighting will come on when unlocking the

vehicle using the sensor surface on the

driver and passenger door handles

›››

page 130.

●

If there is no valid key inside the vehicle

or the system fails to detect one, a warning

will display on the dash panel screen. This

could happen if any other radio frequency

signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.

from a mobile device accessory) or if the

key is covered by another object (e.g. an

aluminium case).

●

If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a

layer of salt, the correct functioning of the

sensors on the door handles may be affec-

ed. In this case, clean the vehicle.

●

If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the

gear stick is in position P.

●

To improve the safety of your vehicle, the

remote control of the system is equipped

with a position sensor. If this remote control

does not detect movement for a certain

length of time, the system will conclude

that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on

a night table) so it will be disabled.

Locking system “Safe”

When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi-

y syst

em puts the door handl

es out of oper

tion and mak

es it difficult for unauthorized

people to enter. The doors cannot be opened

from inside

›››

Depending on the v

ehicl

, when s

wit

ching the

ignition off, a warning may be displayed on

the control panel screen stating that the

“Safe” security system is activated.

Available depending on market and version.

106

Opening and closing

Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”

securit

y syst

em.

●

ess the l

ocking butt

on  once on the ve-

hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the

“Safe” system.

●

Press the locking  button on the vehicle

key twice.

●

On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking

and ignition system: touch the sensor surface

on the outside part of the door handle twice.

When the “Safe” security system is disa-

bled, the following needs to be taken into

account:

●

The vehicle can be opened and unlocked

from the inside using an inside door handle.

●

The anti-theft alarm is activated.

●

The vehicle interior monitoring system and

the anti-tow system are disabled.

“Safe” status

The flashing frequency of the diode in the

door sill immediately confirms the process.

Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence

for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-

mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues

flashing slowly.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children)

in the vehicle if it is locked fr

om the outside

and the “Safe” security system* is activa-

ted, as the doors and windows cannot then

be opened from the inside. Locked doors

could delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to

eak int

o the v

ehicl

e or st

eal it. The system

will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-

nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned

on when the vehicle is locked with the key.

The system is immediately activated and the

turn signal light located on the driver door will

flash along with the turn signals, indicating

that the alarm and the locking security sys-

tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,

they will not be included in the protection

zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-

nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-

quently closed, they will be automatically in-

cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle

and the turn signals will flash accordingly

when the doors close.

●

The turn signal light will flash twice on

opening and deactivating the alarm.

●

The turn signal light will flash once on clos-

ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for

about 30 seconds alongside a sound and

optical (flashing) warning signals and will be

repeated about ten times when the vehicle is

locked and the following unauthorised ac-

tions are attempted:

●

Opening a door that is mechanically un-

locked using the vehicle key without switching

on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-

tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is

no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is

activated immediately on opening the door).

●

A door is opened.

●

Opening the bonnet.

●

The rear lid is opened.

●

When the ignition is switched on with a non-

authorised key.

●

Undue manipulation of the alarm.

●

Disconnection of the vehicle battery.

●

Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles

with interior monitoring

›››

page 108).

●

When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with

anti-tow system

›››

page 108).

107

Operation

●

When the v

ehicl

e is r

aised (in v

ehicl

es with

anti-tow system

›››

page 108).

●

When the vehicle is transported on a ferry

or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or

vehicle interior monitoring

›››

page 108).

●

When a trailer connected to the anti-theft

alarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm

●

Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button 

of the key.

●

OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically

using the key, the key must be inserted into

the ignition, and the ignition must be turned

on within 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.

and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTION

If the anti-theft security system is switched

off, the vehicle interior monit

oring and the

tow-away protection are automatically

disconnected.

Note

●

After 28 days, the indicator light will be

switched off t

o prevent the battery from ex-

hausting if the vehicle has been left parked

for a long period of time. The alarm system

remains activated.

●

If, after the audible warning goes off

, an-

other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the

rear lid is opened after a door has been

opened), the alarm is triggered again.

●

The anti-theft alarm is not activated

when the vehicle is locked from within using

the central locking button .

●

If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-

ly with the key, only the driver door is un-

locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.

Only when the ignition has been turned on

will the other doors be available - but not

unlocked - and the central locking button

will be activated.

●

If the vehicle battery is run down or flat

then the anti-theft alarm will not operate

correctly.

●

Vehicle monitoring remains active even if

the battery is disconnected or not working

for any reason.

●

The alarm is triggered immediately if one

of the battery cables is disconnected while

the alarm system is active.

Interior monitoring and the anti-

w syst

em*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-

ed in the anti-theft al

arm* which det

ects

unauthorised v

ehicle entry by means of ultra-

sound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-

ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched

on. In order to activate it, all the doors and

the rear lid must be closed.

If the “Safe” security system*

›››

page 106 is

switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring

and the tow-away protection are automati-

cally disconnected.

Activation

●

It is automatically switched on when the

anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation

●

Open the vehicle with the key, either me-

chanically or by pressing the  button on the

remote control. The time period from when

the door is opened until the key is inserted in

the contact should not exceed 15 seconds,

otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

●

Press the  button on the remote control

twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors

will be deactivated. The alarm system re-

mains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-

tow system are automatically switched on

again next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior

monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must

108

Opening and closing

be done each time that the vehicle is locked;

if not, they will be aut

omatically s

wit

ched on.

The v

ehicl

e interior monitoring and the anti-

tow system should be switched off if animals

are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,

their movements will trigger the alarm) or

when, for example, the vehicle is transported

or has to be towed with only one axle on the

ground.

Deactivation through the infotainment

system

●

Turn off the ignition and select: key   

> Vehicle > SETTINGS > Opening and

closing> Central locking > Interior

monitoring.

●

When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle

interior monitoring and the tow-away protec-

tion are switched off until the next time the

door is opened.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctly

if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-

serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false

alarm:

●

Open windows (partially or fully).

●

Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or

completely).

●

Movement of objects inside the vehicle,

such as loose papers, items hanging from the

rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note

●

If the vehicle is relock

ed and the alarm is

activated without the volumetric sensor

function, relocking will activate the alarm

with all its functions, except the volumetric

sensor. This function is reactivated when

the alarm is switched on again, unless it is

deliberately switched off.

●

If the alarm has been triggered by the

volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by

a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver

door when the vehicle is opened. The flash

is different to the flash indicating the alarm

is activated.

●

The vibration of a mobile phone left in-

side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-

terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both

sensors react to movements and shakes in-

side the vehicle.

●

If on activating the alarm, any door or the

rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-

vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and

the anti-tow system will only be activated

once all the doors are closed (including the

rear lid).

Doors

Intr

oduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man-

ually and partially opened, for example if the

ey or the central locking is damaged.

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly can

cause serious injury.

●

If the vehicle is locked from outside, the

doors and windows cannot be opened from

the inside.

●

Nev

er leave children or disabled people

alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be

able to get themselves to safety.

●

Depending on the time of the year, tem-

peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-

cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness or

even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the rear

lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-

jury.

●

Open and close the doors and the r

ear lid

only when there is nobody in the way.

109

Operation

CAUTION

When opening and closing in an emergen-

cy, carefully disassemble components and

then reassemble them car

efully to avoid

damage to the vehicle.

Emergency unlocking or locking of

the driver’s door

Fig. 101 Driver door handle: Concealed lock

cylinder

Fig. 102

Driver door handle: lever the cover off

If the central locking system should fail to op-

, the driv

er door can still be l

ocked and

unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door is

locked manually all other doors are locked.

When it is unlocked manually, only the driver

door opens. Please observe the instructions

relating to the anti-theft alarm system

›››

page 107.

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade

›››

page 98.

●

Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in

the cover on the driver door handle

›››

Fig. 102 then remove the cover upwards.

●

Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to

unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics

●

The anti-theft alarm will remain active

when vehicles are unlocked. However, the

alarm will not be triggered

›››

page 107.

●

After the driver door is opened, you have 15

seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this

time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.

●

Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-

bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-

activates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when

the vehicle is locked manually using the

ey shaft

›››

page 100.

Emergency lock of doors without

ock cylinders

Fig. 103

Locking the door manually.

110

Opening and closing

If the central locking system should fail to

ork at any time

, doors with no l

ock cylinder

will hav

e t

o be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the front of

the front passenger's door and the rear

doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

●

Pull the cap out of the opening.

●

Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to

the right as far as it will go (if the door is on

the right side) or to the left (if the door is on

the left side).

●

Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-

ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-

rior door handle once to unlock and open the

door.

Childproof locks

Fig. 104

Childproof lock on the left hand side

door

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors

om being opened fr

om the inside

. This sys-

em pr

events minors from opening a door ac-

cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle

electronic opening and locking systems. It

only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-

ted and deactivated manually, as described

below:

Activating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof

lock.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in the

door using the ignition key, clockwise for

the left hand side doors

›››

Fig. 104 and an-

ti-clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-

vate.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in the

door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise

for the left hand side doors

›››

Fig. 104 and

clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the

door can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNING

Careless and unsuitable locking, opening

and closing of the rear lid can cause acci-

dents and serious injury.

●

The rear lid must not be opened when the

verse or rear fog lights are lit. This may

damage the tail lights.

●

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it

down with your hand on the rear window.

The glass could smash. Risk of injury!

●

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing

it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while

driving.

111

Operation

●

Closing the rear lid without observing

and ensuring it is clear could cause serious

injury t

o you and to third parties. Make sure

that no one is in the path of the rear lid.

●

Never drive with the rear lid open or half-

closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into

the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-

soning!

●

Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-

low children to play inside or next to it, es-

pecially if the rear lid is open. Children

could enter the luggage compartment,

close the rear lid and become trapped. A

locked vehicle can reach extremely high

and low temperatures, depending on the

time of year, thus causing serious injuries,

illness or even death.

CAUTION

Before opening or closing the rear lid, make

sure that there is enough space to open or

close it, e

.g. when pulling a trailer or in a

garage.

Note

Before closing the rear lid, make sure that

the key has not been left inside the luggage

compartment.

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 105

Rear lid: opening from outside.

The rear lid opening system operates electri-

cally. It is activ

ed by using the insignia sha-

ped handl

e on the r

ear lid

›

››

Fig. 105.

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the  or

 buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument panel

display if the rear lid is open or not properly

closed.* An audible warning is also given if it

is opened while the vehicle is moving faster

than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing

●

To open: pull on the handle and lift it up

›››

Fig. 105. The rear lid opens automatically.

●

Close: hold the gate by one of the handles

fitted to the inner lining and close it by moving

it downwards.

If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also

locked.

112

Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 106

Detail of the luggage compartment:

emer

gency unl

ocking (LEON model).

Fig. 107

Detail of the luggage compartment:

emer

gency unl

ocking (L

eon Sport

our

er ST

model).

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in

the e

ent of an emer

gency (e

.g. no batt

ery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart-

ment allowing access to the emergency

opening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-

gage compartment

Valid for the model: Leon

●

Insert the key blade into the slot and move

the key in the direction of the arrow until the

lock unlocks

›››

Fig. 106.

Valid for the model: Leon Sportourer ST

●

Remove the cover by inserting a screwdriv-

er into the slot

›››

Fig. 107 .

●

Insert the key into the opening and turn it in

the direction of the arrow until the latch is re-

leased

›››

Fig. 107 .

113

Operation

Window controls

ectrically opening and cl

osing

the windo

Fig. 108

Detail of the driver's door: window

contr

●

Opening the window: press the button .

●

Closing the window: pull the button .

Butt

ons on the driv

er door

Windo

w on the fr

ont l

eft door

Window on the front right door

Window on the rear left door

Window on the rear right door

Safety switch for deactivating the electric

window buttons in the rear doors.

The front and rear electric windows can be

oper

ed by using the contr

s on the driv

door. The other doors each have a switch for

their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park the

vehicle or leave it unattended

›››

ou can use the el

ectric windo

ws f

or appr

ox.

10 minutes after switching off the ignition if

neither the driver door nor the front passen-

ger door has been opened and the key has

not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch *

The safety control

›››

Fig. 108

on the driver

door can be used t

o disabl

e the el

ectric win-

w butt

ons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear

doors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors

are deactivated.

The safety control symbol  lights up in yel-

low if the buttons on the rear doors are

switched off.

Convenience open/close function

The electric windows can be opened or

closed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening:

●

Press and hold the  button on the remote

control key until all the windows and the sun-

roof* have reached the desired position.

●

OR: First unlock the vehicle using the  but-

ton on the remote control key and then keep

the key in the driver door lock until all the win-

dows and the sunroof* have reached the re-

quired position.

Convenience closing:

●

Press and hold button  on the remote

control key until all the windows and the sun-

roof* are closed

›››

●

OR: K

eep the key in the driver door in the

ock" position until all the windo

ws and the

sunr

oof* ar

e closed.

During convenience closing, first the windows

and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.

Different settings can be changed using the

Easy Connect system. Select: key    >

Vehicle > SETTINGS > Opening and

closing > Window operations > Con-

venience opening.

One-touch opening and closing

The one-touch automatic opening and clos-

ing is used to open or close the windows

completely. It will not be necessary to hold

the button of the corresponding electric win-

dow.

114

Opening and closing

For the automatic raising function: pull the

butt

on f

or the corr

esponding windo

w up-

ards until it reaches the second position.

For the automatic lowering function: pull

the button for the corresponding window up-

wards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull on

the button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

The one-touch opening and closing function

is not active after the vehicle battery has

been disconnected or is flat and will have to

be reset.

●

Pull the button of the corresponding win-

dow and hold it for one second in this posi-

tion.

●

Release the button and pull upwards and

hold again. The one-touch function is now

ready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windows

can be reinitialised individually or several at a

time.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Intro-

duction on page 109.

●

Incorrect use of the electric windows can

result in injury.

●

Never close the rear lid without observing

and ensuring it is cl

ear, to do otherwise

could cause serious injury to you and third

parties. Make sure that no one is in the path

of a window.

●

If the ignition is switched on, the electric

equipment could be activated with risk of

injury, for example, in the electric windows.

●

The doors can be locked using the re-

mote control key. This could become an

obstacle for assistance in an emergency

situation.

●

Therefore always take the key with you

when you leave the vehicle.

●

The electric windows will work until the

ignition has been switched off and one of

the front doors has been opened.

●

If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-

able the rear electric windows. Make sure

that they have been disabled.

●

For safety reasons, you should only use

the remote control open and close func-

tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.

To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the

windows when pressing the button to close

them. The windows stop moving as soon as

the button is released.

Note

If the window is not able to close because it

is stiff or because of an obstruction, the

window will automatically open again

›››

page 115. If this happens, check why the

window could not be closed before at-

tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-

jury when the electric windows close.

●

If a windo

w is obstructed when closing au-

tomatically, the window stops at this point

and lowers immediately

›››

●

Next, check why the window does not close

bef

e att

empting it again.

●

If you try within the f

oll

owing 10 seconds

and the window closes again with difficulty or

there is an obstruction, the automatic closing

will stop working for 10 seconds.

●

If the window is still obstructed, the window

will stop at this point.

●

If there is no obvious reason why the win-

dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by

pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-

dow closes with maximum force. The roll-

back function is now deactivated.

●

If more than 10 seconds pass, the window

will open fully when you operate one of the

buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

115

Operation

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Elec-

trically opening and closing the windows

on page 115.

●

The r

oll-back function does not prevent

fingers or other parts of the body getting

pinched against the window frame. Risk of

accident.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof only works when the ignition is

wit

ched on. Once the ignition has been

wit

ched off

, you can still open or close the

sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver

door and the front passenger door are not

opened.

WARNING

If the sunroof is used negligently or without

paying due attention, it can cause serious

injury.

●

Open or close the sunroof and the sun

blind only when no one is in their path of

mov

ement.

●

Never leave any key inside the vehicle

when exiting.

●

Never leave a child or any other person

who may need help in the vehicle, espe-

cially if they have access to the vehicle

key. If using they key unattended, they

could l

ock the vehicle, start the engine,

switch on the ignition and activate the sun-

roof.

●

After switching off, it is still possible to

open or close the sunroof during a short

space of time provided that neither the

driver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION

●

o prevent damage

, during winter tem-

peratures remove any ice or snow that

might be on the car roof before opening the

sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.

●

Before leaving the vehicle or in case of

rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the

sunroof open or in a tilted position, water

can enter the interior and can cause con-

siderable damage to the electrical system.

As a result, other damage can occur in the

vehicle.

Note

●

Leaves and other loose objects that ac-

cumul

ate on the sunroof rails should be

regularly cleaned away either by hand or

with a vacuum.

●

If the sunroof does not work correctly, the

anti-trap function will not work either. Con-

tact a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 109

On the interior roof lining: turn the

wit

ch t

o open and cl

ose

Fig. 110

On the interior roof lining: press the

wit

ch and pull on it t

o r

aise and l

ower the roof.

To open the sunroof, the switch must be in the

position

●

Open: turn the switch to position

›

Fig. 109

116

Opening and closing

●

Comf

ort position: t

urn the s

wit

ch t

o position

›››

Fig. 109

●

Close: turn the switch to position

›

Fig. 109

●

Lift: Push the switch to position

›

Fig. 1

. For an intermediate position, hold down

the s

wit

ch until you r

each the desir

ed posi-

tion.

●

ower: pull the switch to position

›››

Fig. 110

. For an intermediate position, hold down

the s

wit

ch until you r

each the desir

ed posi-

tion.

Opening and cl

osing the sunshade

blind

3 Valid for vehicles: with sun blinds

Fig. 111

On the interior roof lining: sunshade

blind butt

ons.

Once the ignition has been switched off, you

can still open or cl

ose the sun blind f

or a f

minut

es provided the driver door and the

front passenger door are not opened.

Opening completely (automatic function)

●

Press button

›››

Fig. 111

briefly.

osing compl

ely (aut

omatic function)

●

ess the button

briefly.

op aut

omatic oper

ation

●

ess butt

or button

briefly.

o set the int

ermediat

e position

●

ess butt

or button

until the cor-

ect position is set.

Conv

enience function t

o open or

ose the sunr

oof*

Fig. 112

Door handle: sensor surface.

The sunroof can be opened and closed with

the conv

enience function, just lik

e the win-

ws.

Using the door l

ock*

●

Hol

d the key in the door lock of the driver

door in either the unlocking or locking posi-

tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-

sition. Release the key to interrupt this func-

tion.

Using the remote control

●

Keep the locking or unlocking button press-

ed to open or close the roof. If you release the

button is the opening or closing will stop.

117

Operation

Using the Keyless Access* system (only

osing)

●

ess and hol

d the l

ocking sensor surf

ace

›››

Fig. 112 (arrow) on the door handle to

close the sunroof. If you release the sensor

surface, the closing movement stops.

Anti-trap function of the panoramic

sunroof and sunshade

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of

injury when cl

osing the sunr

oof and the sun

blind

›

. If the sunroof or sun blind encoun-

er r

esist

ance or an obst

acl

e when closing,

they reopen immediately.

●

Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not

close.

●

Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.

●

If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed

due to an obstacle or some resistance, it

stops at the corresponding position and then

opens. For automatic closing, a new closing

attempt might take place.

●

If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to

close, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without

the anti-trap function

●

The switch

›››

Fig. 109 should be in the

“closed” position

●

ass r

oof:

within appr

x. 5 seconds of the

activation of the anti-trap function, keep the

control pulled backwards

›››

Fig. 110 (arrow

) until the roof is completely closed.

●

Sunshade blind: within appr

ximat

ely

5 seconds of having activ

ed the anti-trap

function, press button

›››

Fig. 111

until the

sun blind cl

oses compl

ely.

●

The sunr

oof or sun blind cl

ose without

the anti-trap function intervening!

●

If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close,

visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the

anti-trap function can cause serious inju-

ries.

●

Always be careful when cl

osing the sun-

roof and sun blind.

●

No person should ever remain in the way

of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when

closing without the anti-trap function.

●

The anti-trap function does not prevent

fingers or other parts of the body from be-

coming trapped against the roof frame and

injuries occurring.

Lights

ehicl

e lighting

ed video

Fig. 113 Lights and visi-

bilit

Control lamps



It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.



It lights up

Rear fog light switched on

›››

page 120.



It lights up

Left or right turn signal.

The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a t

urn

signal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on

›››

page 124

118

Lights



It lights up

Trailer turn signals



It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on

›››

page 121



It lights up

The Light Assist system is on

›››

page 122.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a few seconds when the ignition is swit

ch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Headlight switch

Fig. 114

Dash panel: lights control.

●

Turn the switch to the required position

›

Fig. 1

Sym-

bol

Ignition switch-

ed off

Ignition is

switched on



Fog lights, dipped

beam and side

lights off.

Light off or day-

time driving light

on.



The “Coming

home” and “L

eaving

home” guide lights

may be switched

on.

Automatic contr

of dipped beam

and daytime run-

ning light.



Side light on.



Dipped beam head-

light off

Dipped beam

witched on.

The driver is personally responsible for the

corr

ect use and adjustment of the lights in all

sit

uations.

Aut

omatic dipped beam headlight contr



*

The automatic dipped beam control is merely

intended as an aid and is not able to recog-

nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the

vehicle lights and the instrument panel and

switch lighting switch on automatically in the

following situations

›››

●

The photo sensor detects d

arkness

, f

or e

ampl

e, when driving through a tunnel. They

switch off when adequate lighting is detec-

ted.

●

The rain sensor detects rain and activates

the wipers. They switch off when the wipers

have not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individu-

al lights, integrated in the front headlights.

These lights come on when the daytime run-

ning lights are switched on. On vehicles

equipped with LED tail lights, the rear side

light is switched on as well

›››

The daytime running lights t

urn on e

ery time

the ignition is s

wit

ched on, if the switch is in

119

Operation

position  or , accor

ding t

o the l

el of ex-

terior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a light

sensor automatically switches dipped beam

on and off (including the control and instru-

ment lighting) or the daytime running lights

depending on the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehicles

equipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected and disconnected

via the corresponding Easy Connect system

menu.

●

Activation: when going above 110 km/h

(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-

ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-

er's visibility distance.

●

Deactivation: when reducing the speed of

the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the

dipped beam immediately returns to its nor-

mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver that

the lights have not been switched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driver

door is open, an audible warning signal is

heard in the following cases: this will remind

you to turn the light off.

●

When the parking light is on

›››

page 121.

●

When the light switch is in position  or .

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road

users cannot see the vehicle well enough

or at all, accidents may occur.

●

The aut

omatic dipped beam control

( ) only switches on the dipped beam

when there are changes in light conditions

but not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNING

The side lights or daytime running lights

are not bright enough to illuminate the road

ahead and t

o ensure that other road users

are able to see you.

●

Always use your dipped beam head

lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

●

Never drive with daytime lights if the road

is not well lit due to weather or lighting

conditions.

●

On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,

when activating the daytime running light

the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-

cle which does not have the rear lights on

may not be visible to other drivers in the

darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in

conditions of poor visibility.

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and not

used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or

distracting other road users. This could re-

sult in a serious accident.

●

Always make sure that the headlights are

correctly adjusted.

Note

●

The l

egal requirements regar

ding the use

of vehicle lights in each country must be

observed.

●

The dipped beam headlights will only

work with the ignition on. The side lights

come on automatically when the ignition is

turned off.

Fog lights

Fig. 115

Dash panel: lights control.

The warning lamps  or  al

so sho

, on the

light s

wit

ch or instrument panel, when the

front fog lights are on.

120

Lights

●

urning on the fr

ont f

og lights*

: pull the

light switch out to its first click position

›››

Fig. 115

, from positions ,  or .

●

Turning on the rear fog light : pull the

light s

wit

ch fully out

from position ,  or





●

o s

wit

ch off the fog lights, press the light

switch or turn it to position .

Note

The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind

you. You should use the rear fog light only

when visibilit

y is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 116

Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right t

urn light or right

-hand parking light

(ignition s

wit

ched off).

Left turn light or left-hand parking light

(ignition s

wit

ched off).

Main beam on: contr

ol l

amp

 lit up on

the instrument panel.

Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-

trol lamp  lit up.

Push the lever all the way down to turn off the

corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals

When the ignition is switched on, move the

lever as far as possible upwards or down-

wards and release the lever. The turn signal

will flash three times.

The convenience turn signal can be activated

and deactivated in the Easy Connect system

using the key    > Vehicle > SET-

TINGS > Lighting > Light assistance

> Convenience turn signal

›››

page 92.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-

ing menu, this function can be deactivated in

a specialised workshop.

Parking light 

The parking lights will only work with the igni-

tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning

will sound while the driver door is open.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Move the turn signal lever up or down.

When the parking light is switched on, the

ont side light and the t

ail light on the corr

sponding side of the v

ehicl

e turn on.

Parking light on both sides

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Place the light switch in position .

●

Lock the vehicle from the outside.

In doing so, only the side lights of both head-

lights light up, and additionally the tail lights

will do so partially.

WARNING

Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,

or forgetting to deactivat

e them can con-

fuse other road users. This could result in a

serious accident.

●

Always give warning when you are going

to change lane, overtake or when turning,

activating the turn signal in good time.

●

As soon as you have finished changing

lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn

signal off.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the headlights may cause

accidents and serious injury, as the main

beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

121

Operation

Note

●

If the turn signal lever is l

eft on after the

key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

an acoustic signal sounds when the driver

door is opened. This is intended as a re-

minder to switch off the turn signal, unless

you wish to leave the parking light on.

●

If the convenience turn signals are oper-

ating (three flashes) and the other conven-

ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-

tive part stops flashing and only flashes

once in the new part selected.

●

The turn signal only works when the igni-

tion is switched on. The hazard warning

lights also work when the ignition is switch-

ed off.

●

If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the

control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn

signals) and the vehicle turn signal will

flash at double speed.

●

The main beam headlights can only be

switched on if the dipped beam headlights

are already on.

●

In cold or damp weather conditions, the

headlights, tail lights and turn signals may

mist up inside temporarily. This is normal

and in no way effects the useful life of the

vehicle lighting system.

●

The parking light does not activate auto-

matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-

nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-

ted.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist acts within the limits of

the system and depending on environmental

and traffic conditions. Once s

witched on, the

system is activated as of a speed of about 60

km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below

about 30 km/h (18 mph)

›››

When the system is activated and the cam-

era det

ects other vehicles that may be daz-

zled, the main beam is automatically switch-

ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati-

cally switched on.

The main beam assist generally detects illu-

minated areas and deactivates the main

beam when passing through a town, for ex-

ample.

Switching the main beam assist on



●

Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch

to the position .

●

From the base position, press the t

urn signal

and main beam headlights lever forwards

›››

Fig. 116

When the lamp  is displ

ayed

on the instrument panel displ

ay, the main

beam assist is s

wit

ched on.

witching the main beam assist off



●

Turn the light switch to a position other than



›››

page 119.

●

OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turn

signal light and main beam headlights lever

forwards

›››

Fig. 116

●

OR: push the t

urn signal and main beam

headlight l

er f

orwards to manually turn on

the main beam. The main beam assist will

then be deactivated.

Malfunctions

The following conditions may prevent the

main beam headlight control from turning off

the headlights in time or from turning off alto-

gether:

●

In poorly lit towns with highly reflective

signs.

●

Other insufficiently lit road users (such as

pedestrians or cyclists).

●

On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)

and when oncoming vehicles are partially

obscured.

●

When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-

cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard

rail in the centre of the road.

●

If the camera is damaged or the power

supply is cut off.

●

In fog, snow and heavy rain.

●

With dust and sand turbulence.

●

With loose gravel in the field of vision of the

camera.

122

Lights

●

When the fiel

d of vision of the camer

a is

mist

ed up

, dirt

y or covered by stickers, snow,

ice, etc.

WARNING

The convenience features of the main

beam assist should not encourage the tak-

ing of risks. The syst

em is not a replace-

ment for driver concentration.

●

You are always in control of the main

beam and adapting it to the light, visibility

and traffic conditions.

●

It is possible that the main beam head-

light control does not recognise all driving

situations and is limited under certain cir-

cumstances.

●

When the field of vision of the camera is

dirty, covered or damaged, operation of

the main beam control may be affected.

This also applies when changes are made

to the vehicle lighting system, for example,

if additional headlights are installed.

CAUTION

To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-

tem, take the foll

owing points into consid-

eration:

●

Clean the field of vision of the camera

regularly and make sure it is free of snow

and ice.

●

Do not cover the field of vision of the

camera.

●

Check that the windscreen is not dam-

aged in the area of the field of vision of the

camera.

Note

Main beam and headlight flasher can be

urned on and off manually at any time with

the turn signal and main beam lev

›››

page 121.

Fog lights with cornering light func-

tion*

The cornering light function is an additional

function t

o the dipped beam headlights t

impr

e lighting of the side of the road when

taking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when the

dipped beam headlights are already on and

it is activated when driving at speeds below

approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

●

If the steering wheel is turned or the turn

signal is switched on, the front fog light grad-

ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering

light function is gradually switched off.

●

When engaging reverse gear, both front fog

lights turn on.

“Coming home” and “Leav-

ing home” function

The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”

function lights up the vehicle’s immediat

proximity when getting into and out of it in the

dark. When switched on, the front position

and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-

cense plate light come on.

The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-

sensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-

ment system you can adjust the duration of

the light switch-off delay, and activate and

deactivate the function.

Activating the “Coming Home” function

For vehicles with light and rain sensors.

●

Switch off the engine and remove the key

from the ignition with the light switch in posi-

tion 



›››

page 119.

●

The automatic “Coming Home” function is

only active when the light sensor detects

darkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-

mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the “Coming

Home” lighting comes on. The delay in

123

Operation

switching off the headlights is count

ed fr

when the l

ast door or boot hat

ch is cl

osed.

The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in

the following cases:

●

Automatically, once the headlight turn off

delay has elapsed.

●

Automatically, when a vehicle door or the

rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting

the engine.

●

When the rotary light switch is turned to po-

sition 

›››

page 119.

●

With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the “Leaving Home” function

●

Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.

●

The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-

ted when the light switch is in position 

and the light sensor detects darkness.

The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off

in the following cases:

●

Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”

delay period ends (default 30 sec).

●

When the vehicle is locked using the remote

control.

●

When the light switch is turned to position .

●

With the ignition is switched on.

Note

To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-

ing Home” function, the rotary light switch

must be in position

 and the light sensor

must detect darkness.

Hazard warning lights 

Fig. 117

Dash panel: hazard warning lights

wit

The hazard warning lights are used to draw

the att

ention of other r

oad users t

o your v

ehi-

e in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from

moving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard

warning lights

›››

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;

or an aut

omatic gearbo

x, mo

e the gear

lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-

tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when

you leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the

hazard warning lights are switched on. The

two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the

turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at

the same time. The simultaneous hazard

warning lights also work when the ignition is

switched off.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-

ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50

mph), the brake light flashes several times per

second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If

you continue braking, the hazard warning

lights will come on automatically when the

vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off

automatically when the vehicle starts to

move again.

WARNING

●

The risk of an accident increases if your

vehicle breaks do

wn. Always use the haz-

ard warning lights and a warning triangle to

124

Lights

draw the attention of other road users to

your stationary vehicle.

●

Due t

o the high temperatures that the

catalytic converter can reach, never park

in an area where the catalytic converter

could come into contact with highly inflam-

mable materials, for example dry grass or

spilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note

●

The batt

ery will run down if the hazard

arning lights are left on for a long time,

even if the ignition is switched off.

●

The use of the hazard warning lights de-

scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-

utory requirements.

Light range control

Fig. 118

Next to the steering wheel: headlight

ange contr

The headlight range control

›

Fig. 1

modified according to the value of the head-

light beam and the vehicle load status. This

offers the driver optimum visibility and the

headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers

›››

The headlights can only be adjust

ed when

the dipped beam is s

wit

ched on.

o r

eset, turn switch

›››

Fig. 118:

Value Vehicle load status



Two front occupants, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment full. With trailer and minimum

drawbar l

oad.



Driver only, luggage compartment full

With trailer and maximum drawbar load.

If the vehicle load does not correspond to those

sho

wn in the t

abl

, it is possibl

e to select intermediary

positions.

OR:

Through the Easy Connect system, with the

button







> Vehicle

> SETTINGS >

Lighting > Light assistance > Head-

light height adjustment

›››

page 92).

Setting 0

Two front occupants, luggage com-

partment empty

Setting 1

All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment empty

Setting 2

All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment full. With trailer and minimum

drawbar load.

Setting 3

Driver only, luggage compartment full

Driving with trailer and maximum

drawbar load.

Dynamic headlight range control

The contr

ol is not mount

ed in v

ehicl

es with

dynamic headlight r

ange control. The head-

light range is automatically adjusted accord-

ing to the vehicle load status when they are

switched on.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean

that the headlights dazzle and distract oth-

er drivers. This could r

esult in a serious ac-

cident.

●

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load

status so that it does not blind other driv-

ers.

125

Operation

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights is

asymmetric: the side of the road on which

you are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manuf

actured in a country

that drives on the right travels to a country

that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-

mally necessary to cover part of the head-

light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-

justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling

other drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certain

light values that must be complied with for

designated points of the light distribution. This

is known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the halogen and full-

LED headlights allows the specific “tourist

light” values to be met without the need for

stickers or changes in the settings.

Note

“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If

you are planning a long stay in a country

that driv

es on the other side, you should

take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical

Service to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel

displ

ays and s

wit

ches

Depending on the model, the lighting of the

instrument panel and switched can be adjus-

ted in the Easy Connect system, using the

butt

on    > Vehicle > SETTINGS

›››

page 92.

With the ignition on and without light activa-

tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting

remains activated in daytime light conditions.

The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-

minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving

through a tunnel without the  function ac-

tive, the instrument panel lighting may even

switch off. The objective of this function is to

provide the driver with a visual indication that

he or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-

strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the

following message will appear Turn on the

lights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 119

Detail of roof lining: front lighting of

the passenger compartment.

Knob Function



Turns off the interior lights.



Turning the interior lights on or off.

Central po-

sition



The interior lights come on automati-

cally when you unl

ock the vehicle,

open a door or r

emove the key from

the ignition.

The light goes out a few seconds after

closing all the doors, when locking the

vehicle or connecting the ignition.





Turning the reading light on and off

Depending on version.

126

Visibility

Glove compartment and luggage com-

par

tment lighting*

When opening and cl

osing the gl

e com-

partment on the front passenger side and the

rear lid, the respective light will automatically

switch on and off.

Footwell lighting*

The lights in the footwell area below the dash

(driver and front passenger sides) will switch

on when the doors are opened and will de-

crease in intensity while driving. This intensity

setting can be changed through the infotain-

ment system menu (key    > Vehicle

> SETTINGS > lIGHTING > Interior

lighting

›››

page 92).

Ambient light*

The ambient light lights up the area of the

centre console and the footwell area and,

depending on the version, the front door pan-

els as well.

The brightness of the ambient light can be

adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as

can colour, in versions with lighting on the

front door panel (button    > Vehicle

> SETTINGS > Ambient lighting

›››

page 92).

Note

●

Depending on the features fitted in the

ehicle, LEDs can be used for the following

interior lights: front vanity mirror light, rear

vanity mirror light, footw

ell light, sun blind

and glove compartment light.

●

The reading lights switch off when the ve-

hicle is locked using a key or after several

minutes if the key is removed from the igni-

tion. This prevents the battery from dis-

charging.

Visibility

Windscr

een wiper and r

ear

windo

w wiper syst

ems

Windo

w washer lever

Fig. 120

Operating the windscreen wiper and

ear wiper

More the lever to the required position:



Windscreen wipers off.



Wiper intervals.

Use control

›››

Fig. 120

to set the in-

erv

al (v

ehicl

es without r

ain sensor), or

the sensitivity of the rain sensor.



Slow wipe.



Continuous wipe.

127

Operation

More the lever to the required position:



Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.

Hold the lever do

wn for more time to in-

crease the wipe frequency.



Windscreen washer. The windscreen

washer function is activated by push-

ing the lever towards the steering

wheel, and the wipers operate simulta-

neously.



Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-

er will wipe the window approximately

very six seconds.



The rear window wash function is acti-

vated by pressing the le

ver, and the

rear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNING

In cold conditions you should not use the

wash/wipe system unless you have

armed the windscreen with the heating

and ventilation system. The windscreen

washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the

windscreen and obscure your view of the

road.

CAUTION

If the ignition is switched off with the wind-

screen wipers active, they complet

e their

wipe before returning to the rest position.

When switching the ignition back on, the

windscreen wiper will continue to operate

at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-

age the wiper and the windscreen wiper

motor.

●

If necessary, remo

ve snow and ice from

the windscreen wipers before starting your

journey.

●

Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-

ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-

icer spray for this operation.

●

Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if

the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the

windscreen wipers while dry can cause

damage.

●

In icy conditions, always check that the

wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-

fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it

may help to leave the vehicle parked with

the wipers in service position

›››

page 46.

Note

●

The windscreen and window wipers only

function when the ignition is switched on

and the bonnet or r

ear lid, respectively, are

closed.

●

The interval wipe speed varies according

to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle

is moving, the more often the windscreen is

cleaned.

●

The rear wiper is automatically switched

on when the windscreen wiper is on and the

car is in reverse gear.

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-

ent situations

●

If the vehicle is stopped, the activ

ated posi-

tion temporarily moves to the previous posi-

tion.

●

The air conditioner comes on for approxi-

mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode

when the windscreen washer is activated, 

to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-

er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.

●

When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary

according to the speed. The higher the vehi-

cle speed the short

er the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets*

The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does

not thaw the water in the washer hoses.

When the ignition is switched on the heated

windscreen washer jets automatically adjust

the heat depending on the ambient tempera-

ture.

Headlight washer system*

The headlight washer cleans the glass of the

headlights and only works when the dipped

beam headlights are on. After switching on

the ignition, the headlights are also washed

when the automatic wiper is activated for the

first time and then every fifth time.

128

Visibility

Regularly clean dirt that has become encrus-

ed on the headlights, e

.g., r

emains of insects.

o ensur

e the headlight washers work cor-

rectly in winter, clean away any snow that

may be present on the jet covers located on

the bumper. If necessary, remove ice with an

anti-ice spray.

Note

●

The wiper will try to wipe away any ob-

stacles that ar

e on the windscreen. The

wiper will stop moving if the obstacle

blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and

switch the wiper back on again.

●

If you stop the vehicle with the wind-

screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto-

matically change to a lower position

speed. The set speed will be resumed when

the vehicle pulls away.

●

The windscreen will be wiped again ap-

proximately 5 seconds after the wind-

screen washer has been activated, provi-

ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).

If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec-

onds after the “drip” function, a new wash

sequence will begin without performing the

last wipe. For the “drip” function to work

again, you have to turn the ignition off and

then on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 121

Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor

Fig. 122

Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the

windscr

een wiper int

erv

s, depending on the

amount of r

ain

›››

. The sensitivity of the rain

sensor can be adjust

ed manually. Manual

wipe

›

page 127

Move the lever to the required position

›››

Fig. 121:

Rain sensor off.

Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-

sary.

Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor

–

Set control to the right: high sensitivity.

–

Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and then

back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts

operating again when the windscreen wipers

are in position

and the vehicle is travelling

at mor

e than 16 km/h (

10 mph).

Modified behaviour of the r

ain sensor

ossibl

e causes of faults and mistaken read-

ings on the sensitive surface

›››

Fig. 122 of the

rain sensor include:

●

Damaged wipers: a film of water on the

damaged blades may lengthen the activa-

tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-

sult in a fast and continuous wipe.

●

Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger

the windscreen wiper.

●

Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on

the roads may cause an excessively long

wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.

●

Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus

effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may

reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or

make it react more slowly, later or not at all.

129

Operation

●

Windscr

een cr

ack: the impact of a st

one

will trigger a singl

e wipe cycl

e with the rain

sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-

duction in the sensitive surface area and

adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the

sensor will vary with the size of the damage

caused by the stone.

WARNING

The rain sensor may not detect enough rain

to switch on the wipers.

●

If necessary, swit

ch on the wipers man-

ually when water on the windscreen ob-

structs visibility.

Note

●

Clean the sensitive surface of the rain

sensor r

egularly and check the blades for

damage

›››

Fig. 122 (arrow).

●

To remove wax and coatings, we recom-

mend a window cleaner containing alco-

hol.

●

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in

front of the rain sensor*. This may cause

sensor disruption or faults.

Mirrors

Int

erior mirr

or anti-dazzl

e function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-

zle function*

The anti-dazzle function is activated e

very

time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the

interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-

matically according to the amount of light it

receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-

led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNING

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle

rear vision mirror breaks, an electr

olyte flu-

id may leak. This could cause irritation to

the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you

come into contact with this liquid, it must

be rinsed with large quantities of water. If

necessary, get medial help.

CAUTION

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle

rear vision mirror breaks, an electr

olyte flu-

id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-

faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon

as possible.

Note

●

If the light incident in the interior rear vi-

sion mirror is obstructed (e

.g. with the sun

blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror

with automatic setting will not operate per-

fectly.

●

When the interior lights are on or reverse

gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken

with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle

position.

●

If you have to stick any type of sticker on

the windscreen, do not do so in front of the

sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-

dazzle function from working well or even

from working at all.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 123

Detail of the driver's door: control for

the e

erior mirr

130

Visibility

Turn the control to the corresponding posi-

tion:

urning the knob t

o the desir

ed position,

adjust the mirr

ors on the driv

er side (L,

left) and the passenger side (R, right) to

the direction desired.

Depending on the equipment fitted on

the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated

according to the outside temperature.

Folding in mirrors.

Synchronized regulation of the exterior

mirrors

Select in the Easy Connect system menu

   > Vehicle > Settings > Mir-

rors and wipers > Mirrors if the exterior

mirrors have to be adjusted in a synchronised

manner.

●

Turn the knob to position L

●

Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The

right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the

same time (synchronised).

●

If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-

view mirror: rotate the control to position R

L/R





Tilt function for front passenger exterior

mirror*

When parking backwards, and in order to be

able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-

ror can be automatically tilted towards the

passenger to provide a better view of the

kerb. The control must be in the position R

for this feature to be operational.

The mirror returns to its original position as

soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h

(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-

turns to its original position if the position of

the control is adjusted.

Storing the rear view mirror settings for the

tilt function

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Using the Easy Connect system, button

   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Mir-

rors and wipers > Mirrors select Lower

while reversing

›››

page 92.

●

Select the R

position on the control.

●

Select reverse gear.

●

Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so

that you can see, for example, the kerb area

well.

●

Release the reverse gear.

●

The adjusted position for the rear view mir-

ror is stored.

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the

vehicle*

Using the Easy Connect system, button

   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Mir-

rors and wipers > Mirrors can be se-

lected to fold the outside mirrors when park-

ing and to lock the vehicle

›››

page 92.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote

control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-

tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with

the remote control, the exterior mirrors are

deployed automatically.

WARNING

Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors

give a larger field of vision. Ho

wever, they

make objects look smaller and further

away than they really are. If you use these

mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles

behind you when changing lane, you could

misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNING

Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking

care to avoid injuries.

Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-

metrical.

131

Operation

●

Only fold or unfold the e

xterior mirror

when there is no-one in the way of the mir-

ror.

●

When moving the mirror, take care not to

trap fingers between the mirror and the

mirror bracket.

CAUTION

●

If one of the mirr

or housings is knocked

out of position (e.g. when parking), the mir-

ors must first be fully retracted with the

electric control. Do not readjust the mirror

housing by hand, as this will interfere with

the mirror adjuster function.

●

Before washing the vehicle in an auto-

matic car wash, please make sure to re-

tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them

from being damaged. Electrically retracta-

ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or

out by hand. Always use the electrical

power control.

Note

●

If the electrical adjustment should fail to

oper

ate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-

ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of

the mirror glass.

●

The fold-in function on the exterior mir-

rors will not activate at speeds over

40 km/h (25 mph).

Sun protection

Sun blind

Fig. 124

Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-

senger sun visors

●

Lower the sun visor towards the wind-

scr

een.

●

The sun visor can be pull

ed out of its

mounting and t

urned t

wards the door

›››

Fig. 124

●

Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-

udinally backw

ds.

Ther

e is a v

anity mirror on the sun visor, with a

cover. When the cover is opened

a light

comes on.

The l

amp goes out when the v

anit

y mirr

ver is closed or the sun visor is pushed

back up.

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

●

Always store sun blinds and visors in their

housing when not in use.

Note

The light above the sun visor automatically

switches off after a fe

w minutes in certain

conditions. This prevents the battery from

discharging.

Sunshade blind*

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 125

Rear window: sunshade blind.

Rear lid sunshade blind*

–

Pull out the blind and hook it into the hooks

in the centr

e of the t

op of the door fr

ame

›

Fig. 125.

132

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

ed video

Fig. 126 Vehicle interior

Manual adjustment of the front

seats

Fig. 127

Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and

e the seat. The seat must engage

when the l

er is released!

Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push

down (several times if necessary) from its

home position.

Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

Lumbar support: move the lever until the

required position is achieved.

WARNING

Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-

cidents and severe injuries.

●

Only adjust the seats when the vehicl

e is

stationary, as the seats could move unex-

pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and

you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-

thermore, an incorrect position is adopted

when adjusting the seat.

●

Adjust the height, position and inclination

of the front seats only when their move-

ment area is empty.

●

Make sure there are no objects in that

area.

●

Make sure that the movement and lock-

ing areas of the seats are clean.

WARNING

Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-

ers might cause an accidental activation of

the electrical seat adjustment system and

mak

e it move unexpectedly while driving.

This might cause loss of control of the vehi-

cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-

over

, the electrical components of the front

seats might be damaged.

●

Never attach or place seat upholstery or

covers on the electric controls.

●

Never use upholstery or seat covers that

have not been explicitly authorised for the

seats of the vehicle.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*

Fig. 128 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.

Adjust the lumbar support: press the but-

on accor

ding t

o the desir

ed position.

Seat f

orwards/backwards: press the but-

ton forwards/backwards.

133

Operation

Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the

butt

on up/do

wn. T

o adjust the angl

e of

the seat cushion, pr

ess the front of the

button up/down.

Backrest further upright/further reclined:

press the button forwards/backwards.

WARNING

●

If the electric front seats are used negli-

gently or without paying due attention, it

can cause serious injury.

●

The fr

ont seats can also be electrically

adjusted when the ignition is switched off.

Never leave a child or any other person

who may need help in the vehicle.

●

In the event of an emergency, electrical

adjustment can be stopped by pressing

any control.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the electrical compo-

nents of the front seats, please refrain fr

kneeling on the seat or applying sharp

pressure at a single point to the seat cush-

ion and backrest.

Note

●

It may not be possible to electrically ad-

just the seat if the vehicl

e battery is very

low.

●

If the engine is started while the seats ar

being electrically adjusted, the adjustment

will stop.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-

sembly of the headrests are described below

Always make sure that the seats are correctly

adjusted

›››

page 12.

All seats are equipped with a headrest. The

central rear headrest is only intended for the

central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do

not install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrest

Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is

at the same level as the top of your head and

under no circumstances below eye level.

Keep the back of your head always as close

to the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short people

Lower the headrest completely, even if your

head is below its upper edge. In the lowest

position, there may be a small distance be-

tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall people

Push the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNING

If travelling with the headrests removed or

improperly adjusted, the risk of sever

e or

fatal injuries in the event of accidents and

sudden braking or manoeuvres increases.

●

Always travel with the headrest correctly

installed and adjusted.

●

To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in

the event of an accident, adjust the head-

rest correctly based on your height, always

making sure that its upper edge is at the

same height as the top of the head, but

never below eye level. Keep the back of

your head always as close to the headrest

as possible and centred.

●

Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

●

Under no circumstances should the rear

passengers travel while the headrests are

in the non-use position.

CAUTION

When assembling and disassembling the

headrests, do not let them meet the top lin-

ing of the vehicl

e, the back rest of the front

seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,

this could damage the vehicle.

134

Seats and headrests

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 129

Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 130

Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.

Adjusting the height of the headrests

●

Grab the sides of the headrests with both

hands and push up

ds t

o the desir

ed posi-

tion. To lower it, repeat the same action,

pressing the

›

Fig. 129

›

››

Fig. 130 button

on the side.

●

The headrest must lock correctly in one po-

sition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 131

Rear headrest: removal.

Removing and fitting the front headrests

●

Move the headrest upwards until it arrives

o the t

●

ess the side butt

›››

Fig. 129

and re-

e the headr

est.

●

o r

efit, insert the headrest into the holes in

the backrest, pushing it down until it engages.

Removing the rear headrests

To remove the headrest, the corresponding

backrest must be partially folded forward.

●

Unlock the backrest

›››

page 136.

●

Move the headrest upwards until it arrives

to the top.

●

Press button

›››

Fig. 131

, while simultane-

ously pr

essing on the securit

y hol

with a

at scr

driv

er a maximum of 5 mm wide,

and remove the headrest.

●

Move the backrest until it engages properly

›››

in Folding down and raising the rear

seat backr

est on page 136

Fitting the r

ear headr

ests

o mount the external headrests, the corre-

sponding backrest must be partially folded

forward.

●

Unlock the backrest

›››

page 136.

●

Insert the headrest bars into the guides until

they perceptibly engage. It should not be

possible to remove the headrest from the

backrest.

●

Move the backrest until it engages properly

›››

in Folding down and raising the rear

seat backr

est on page 136

WARNING

Remove the rear headrests only when it is

necessary to fit a child seat. After remo

ving

a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

135

Operation

Seat functions

ding the backr

est of the fr

ont

passenger seat*

Fig. 132 Front passenger seat: lever to fold

wn the backr

est.

The front passenger seat can be folded down

o incr

ease the st

age space

●

Pull lever

›

Fig. 132

and push the seat

backr

est

until the backrest is horizontal.

WARNING

When the front passenger seat is folded

down it cannot be occupied.

Folding down and raising the rear

seat backr

est

Fig. 133

Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt in

ace

Fig. 134

Rear seat: folding the backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each part

be l

ed separ

ately to extend the luggage

compartment.

Folding the backrest forwards

●

Place the side seat belts in the trim clip

›››

Fig. 133.

●

Completely lower the rear headrests

›››

page 135.

●

Press the unlock button

›››

Fig. 134

for-

ds and at the same time f

d the backr

est

down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged

when the red marking of the button

is visi-

Conv

ting the t

able to a seat

●

Raise and lock in the back rest. The red

marking on the tab

should no longer be

visibl

e when the backr

est is pr

operly secur

ed.

WARNING

Serious injuries can be caused if the rear

seat backrest is lower

ed or lifted without

due care and attention.

●

Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest

while driving.

●

Do no trap or damage the seat belt when

raising the rear seat backrest.

●

When lowering or lifting the rear seat

backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet

and other body parts out of its path.

●

For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-

sary protection all the parts of the rear

backrest must be properly engaged. This is

particularly important in the case of the

centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a

136

Seats and headrests

seat whose backrest is not properly engag-

ed they will fly forward, along with the

backr

est, during an accident or a sudden

driving or braking manoeuvre.

●

A red signal on the button

warns that

the backrest is not engaged. Always check

that the red marking is not visibl

e when the

backrest is in the upright position.

●

When the rear seat backrest is lowered or

is not properly engaged nobody else can

travel in the corresponding seats (not even

a child).

CAUTION

Serious damage can be caused to the vehi-

cle and other objects if the rear seat back-

est is lowered or lifted without due care

and attention.

●

Before lowering the rear seat backrest,

always adjust the front seats so that nei-

ther the headrests nor the cushions of the

rear backrest can hit them.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

with the r

emot

e r

ease l

ever

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 135

In the luggage compartment: levers

or r

emot

e r

ease of the left part

and right

part

of the rear seat backrest.

●

Lower the headrest properly.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Pull the remote release lever of the left part

›

Fig. 135

or right part

of the backrest

in the dir

ection of the arr

. The r

eleased

part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-

matically down and forwards.

●

If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged when

the red marking of the button

›››

Fig. 134

visibl

ont centr

e armr

est

Fig. 136

Front centre armrest

To lift the centr

al armr

est, lift it up

ds in the

direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 136, setting by

setting.

To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest

position. Then lower it down.

To move the armrest horizontally, move it for-

ward

›››

Fig. 136 or backward as much as

possible in the direction of the corresponding

arrow.

WARNING

The front centre armrest may obstruct the

driver's arm movements, which coul

cause an accident and severe injuries.

●

Keep the storage compartments of the

centre armrest closed at all times while the

vehicle is in motion.

137

Operation

●

Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-

est while the vehicle is in motion, not even

a child. This position is incorrect and may

cause severe injuries.

Transport and practical

equipment

oring ob

jects

ositioning the luggage and car

It is possible to carry objects and luggage in

the vehicle, in a trail

›››

page 308 and on

the roof

›››

page 149. When doing so, please

consider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely

●

Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly

as possible.

●

Always pl

ace equipment and heavy ob-

jects in the boot

›››

●

Position heavy items in the boot as far for-

d as possibl

●

ake into account the maximum authorised

weight per axle, as well as the maximum au-

thorised weight of the vehicle

›››

page 372.

●

Secure the objects to the fastening rings of

the boot using appropriate chains or belts

›››

page 144.

●

Also place small objects safely.

●

Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into

account the pressure adhesive of the tyres

›››

page 348.

●

In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys-

tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa-

›››

page 352.

WARNING

Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri-

ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring

or braking or in case of an accident. Partic-

ularly if the airbag hits them when depl

oy-

ing and they are thrown across the inside of

the vehicle. Please observe the following

rules to minimise the risk of injury:

●

Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-

ly.

●

Secure all objects, little and large.

●

Place the objects in the cabin in such a

way that they can never reach the airbag

deployment areas while the vehicle is in

motion.

●

Keep the storage compartments closed

at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

●

Place the objects in such a way that they

never force any occupant of the vehicle to

sit in an incorrect position.

●

When transporting objects that take up a

seat, never let anyone use that seat.

●

Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects

loose in open storage compartment of the

vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat

or on the dashboard.

●

Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects

from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin

and store them safely.

138

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING

The transport of heavy object changes ve-

hicle handling and increases braking dis-

tance

. Heavy objects that are not properly

placed or secured may cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.

●

Never put too much load in the vehicle.

Both the carrying capacity as well as the

distribution of the load in the vehicle have

effects on the driving behaviour and brak-

ing ability.

●

When transporting heavy objects, the

driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due

to the displacement of the centre of gravi-

ty.

●

Always distribute the load in the vehicle

as evenly and horizontally as possible.

●

Always place heavy objects in the boot

before the rear axle and as far away from it

as possible.

●

Objects in the luggage compartment

that are unsecured could move suddenly

and modify the handling of the vehicle.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

Accelerate with particular care and cau-

tion.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Brake earlier than usual.

WARNING

●

Never leave your v

ehicle unattended, es-

pecially when the rear lid is open. Children

could climb into the luggage compartment,

closing the door behind them; they will be

trapped and run the risk of death.

●

Close and lock all the doors and the rear

lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you

lock the vehicle, make sure that there are

no adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Electrical wires or, depending on the fea-

tures, the antenna embedded into the r

ear

windows could be damaged, even irrepara-

bly, if they are in contact with objects.

Note

Straps for securing the load to the fasten-

ing rings are commercially availabl

e from

accessory shops.

Luggage compartment

uggage compar

tment shelf

3 Valid for: Leon

Fig. 137

In the luggage compartment: remov-

ing and fitting the shelf

Fig. 138

In the luggage compartment: remov-

ing and fitting the shelf

139

Operation

Removing

●

Detach the cord loops

›

Fig. 137

from

their hooks

●

Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-

ports

›

Fig. 138

by pulling it up

wards and

then take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-

der the luggage compartment double floor

›››

page 141.

Fitting

●

Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-

cess” fits onto the axis of the supports

›››

Fig. 138 and press down until it engages.

●

Hook the loops

›››

Fig. 137

to the rear lid.

WARNING

Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-

ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-

jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or

braking or in case of an accident.

●

Do not leave har

d, sharp or heavy ob-

jects or in bags on the rear shelf.

●

Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION

●

Before closing the rear lid, ensur

e that

the rear shelf is correctly fitted.

●

An overloaded luggage compartment

could mean that the rear shelf is not cor-

rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-

aged.

●

If the luggage compartment is overloa-

ded, remove the tray.

Note

Ensure that, when placing items of clothing

on the luggage compar

tment cover, r

ear

visibility is not reduced.

Retractable shelf

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 139

In the luggage compartment: unroll-

ing and r

olling up the shelf

140

Transport and practical equipment

Fig. 140 In the luggage compartment: remov-

ing the shelf.

Extending the shelf

●

Pull evenly on the rear shelf using its handle

›

Fig. 139

 in a backw

ds dir

ection un-

til it audibly clicks int

o pl

ace.

Retracting the rear shelf

●

Press on the handle of the rear shelf in the

direction of the arrow to release it

›››

Fig. 139

.

The shelf will automatically move towards

the end and will retract completely.

Removing the shelf

●

Press the rear shelf support

›››

Fig. 140

in the direction of the arrow.

●

Remove the rear shelf through the support

and up

ds.

●

The r

ear shelf can be st

ored under the lug-

gage compartment variable floor when the

latter is in the top position (except for vehicles

equipped with natural gas engine CNG)

›››

page 142.

Fitting the shelf

●

Place the rear shelf in the housing provided

in the left side cover.

●

Engage the support of the rear shelf

›››

Fig. 140

in the right housing.

●

Check that the support

›

Fig. 140

operly engaged.

WARNING

Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-

ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-

jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or

braking or in case of an accident.

●

Do not leave har

d, sharp or heavy ob-

jects or in bags on the rear shelf.

●

Never carry animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION

To retract the rear shelf, press on its handle

in a downwards only direction; if you pr

ess

it upwards it may lead to its axles breaking.

Store the rear shelf

3 Valid for: Leon

Fig. 141

In the luggage compartment: covers

or st

oring the r

ear shelf

Fig. 142 In the luggage compartment: fitting

the r

ear shelf

Depending on the equipment, once the lug-

gage compartment shelf has been r

emo

ed,

it can be st

ed under the boot floor.

●

Remove the left and right covers

›››

Fig. 141.

141

Operation

●

ace the r

ear shelf in the corr

esponding

housing

›

Fig. 142.

●

Put the left and right covers in their original

position.

Storing the retractable shelf

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 143 In the luggage compartment: space

o st

e the r

etr

actable shelf.

Fig. 144 In the luggage compartment: space

to store the retr

actable shelf.

The retractable shelf can be stored under the

luggage compartment v

ariabl

e fl

oor

●

emove the left and right covers

›››

Fig. 143

●

Press the head of the retractable shelf in

the dir

ection of the arr

w until it engages in

its housing

›

Fig. 144.

●

Put the left and right covers in their original

position.

Variable luggage compartment

floor

3 Valid for: Leon

Fig. 145

Luggage compartment: adjustable

oor

Fig. 146

Luggage compartment: adjustable

oor

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the v

ariabl

e fl

oor is tilt

ed you can ac-

cess the spar

e wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

142

Transport and practical equipment

●

Lift the v

ariabl

e fl

oor using handl

›

››

Fig. 145

, pull it back and push the back-

est of the r

ear seat until the mo

abl

e part of

the floor is resting on it.

●

Rest the floor on its housings

›››

Fig. 146

(arrows).

Variable luggage compartment

floor

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 147 Variable luggage compartment floor:

positions.

Fig. 148 Variable luggage compartment floor:

inclined slots.

Variable floor in high position

●

To move from the low position to the high

position, lift the fl

oor using the handl

›

Fig. 147

, and pull it back until the front

of the fl

oor has fully passed the supports

●

Move the floor forward over the supports as

ar as the r

ear seat backr

est and then l

wer

the floor with the handle

ariabl

e fl

oor in l

w position

●

To move from the high position to the low

position, lift the floor using the handle

›››

Fig. 147

, and pull it back until the front

of the fl

oor has fully passed the supports

●

Now let the front part fall to the floor and

slide the fl

oor f

orw

ds as f

ar as the rear seat

backrest; lower the floor at the same time

with the handle

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the v

ariabl

e fl

oor is tilt

ed you can ac-

cess the spar

e wheel or anti-puncture kit

area.

●

Lift the variable floor using handle

›››

Fig. 147

and pull it back until the front of

the fl

oor has fully passed the tilt

ed gr

›››

Fig. 148

●

Run the floor through these grooves with

the help of handl

as the rear seat back-

est and until the fl

oor is r

esting in the

ves.

WARNING

●

Always secure objects, e

ven when the

luggage compartment floor is properly lif-

ted.

●

Only objects that do not protrude more

than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-

ried between the rear seat and the raised

luggage compartment floor.

●

Only objects that do not weigh than ap-

proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between

the rear seat and the raised luggage com-

partment floor.

CAUTION

●

The maximum weight that can be loaded

on the luggage compartment variabl

e floor

in the upper position is 100 kg (Leon model)

and 125 kg (Leon Sportourer ST model).

143

Operation

●

Do not let the luggage compartment

floor fall when cl

osing it. Always carefully

guide it downwards in a controlled manner.

Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the

luggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 149 In the luggage compartment: fasten-

ing rings (L

eon model e

cept v

ersions with

spar

e wheel and CNG).

Fig. 150 In the luggage compartment: fasten-

ing rings (Leon Sportourer ST model).

There are fastening rings

›

Fig. 149

›

››

Fig. 150 on the front and rear of the boot

to secure loose objects and luggage with fas-

tening belts and cords.

WARNING

If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining

straps are used, they could break in the

vent of braking or an accident. Objects

could then be launched across the passen-

ger compartment and cause serious or fa-

tal injuries.

●

Always use belts or straps that are suita-

ble and in good condition.

●

Tighten the belts and straps in a cross

layout over the load placed on the boot

floor and secure them to the fastening rings

safely.

●

Never exceed the maximum t

ensile load

of the fastening rings when securing ob-

jects.

●

Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-

jects, the upper edge of the load is higher

than the fastening rings.

●

Depending on the features, take into ac-

count the instruction panels on the boot on

how to place the load.

●

Never secure a child seat to the fastening

rings.

Note

●

The maximum tensile load that the fas-

ening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.

●

Belts, straps and securing systems for the

appropriate load can be obtained from

specialised dealerships. SEAT recom-

mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

144

Transport and practical equipment

Net bag*

Fig. 151

In the luggage compartment: net bag

hook

ed up at fl

oor l

el (Leon Sportourer ST

model).

Fig. 152

In the luggage compartment: rings

and hooks

for securing the net bag (Leon

Sport

our

er S

T model).

The luggage compartment prevents light

luggage fr

om mo

ving. The net bag has a zip

and can be used t

o st

e small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug-

gage compartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggage

compartment floor

If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded

first

›››

page 144.

●

Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings

and

›

Fig. 151

›

››

. The bag zip

shoul

d be f

acing up

ds.

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh-

old

●

Secure the short net hooks to the fastening

rings

›››

Fig. 152

›

. The bag zip should

be f

acing up

ds.

●

Secur

e the straps in the bag hooks

emo

ving the net bag

The hook

ed up net bag is t

aut

›

››

●

Release the net bag from the fastening

rings.

●

Store the net bag in the luggage compart-

ment.

WARNING

To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-

ing rings of the boot it must be stretched

out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag

is hook

ed up or unhooked incorrectly the

hooks could cause injuries.

●

Always secure the bag hooks properly so

that they do not suddenly r

elease from the

fastening rings when hooking or unhooking

them.

●

On hooking or unhooking them, protect

your eyes and face in case the hooks are

released suddenly.

●

Always hook up the net bag hooks in the

described order. If a hook is unfastened

suddenly, this may cause injuries.

145

Operation

Bag hooks

Fig. 153

In the luggage compartment: bag

hooks (L

eon model).

Fig. 154 In the luggage compartment: bag

hooks (L

eon Sport

our

er S

T model).

There may be hooks for hanging bags on

both sides of the luggage compartment

›

Fig. 153

The r

etaining hooks have been designed to

secure light shopping bags.

WARNING

Never use the hooks to hang luggage or

other objects. In case of sudden braking or

an accident, the hooks could break

Trapdoor for transporting long ob-

jects*

Fig. 155 In the rear seat backrest: opening the

apdoor

Fig. 156 In the luggage compartment: open-

ing the trapdoor.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,

ther

e is a t

ailboar

d f

or tr

ansporting long items

in the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects

should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before

they are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-

el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard

●

Lower the centre armrest.

●

Pull the release lever in the direction of the

arrow and push the tailboard cover

›››

Fig. 155

down and forwards.

●

Open the rear lid.

●

Insert the long objects through the gap

om the luggage compartment.

●

Secur

e the ob

jects with the seat belt.

146

Transport and practical equipment

●

ose the r

ear lid.

osing the t

ailboar

●

Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The

red mark on the luggage compartment side

should never be visible.

●

Close the rear lid.

●

Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

Note

The tailboard can also be opened from the

luggage compartment. To do so, press the

elease lever down, in the direction of the

arrow, and the cover upwards

›››

Fig. 156.

Net partition*

Using the separ

ation net behind

the r

ear seat*

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 157

In the luggage compartment: secur-

ing the net partition.

Fig. 158 In the luggage compartment: remov-

ing the net partition.

Pulling out and securing the net partition

●

Pull up handle

›

Fig. 157

to remove the

net fr

om the casing

●

Hook in the net partition on the right side

(magnified image).

●

Hook in the net partition in the left side

housing

pulling the rod.

The net partition is pr

operly assembl

ed when

the T

-shaped ends ar

e firmly secur

ed in the

corresponding housings

and

etr

acting the net par

tition

●

Unhook the r

od fr

om the housings

and

●

Roll up the net into the casing

lowering it

with your hand.

emo

ving the net par

tition

●

d the rear seat backrests forward.

●

Press the left or right release catch

›››

Fig. 158 in the direction of the arrow

●

Remove the casing from the support in the

dir

ection of the arr

›

Fig. 158

Fitting the net par

tition

●

d the r

ear seat backr

ests forward.

●

Fit the casing in the right and left supports.

●

Press the casing into the left and right sup-

ports in the opposite direction to the arrow

›››

Fig. 158

until it engages.

147

Operation

The red markings on the release buttons

shoul

d no l

onger be visibl

WARNING

●

Always secure objects, e

ven when the

net partition is properly assembled.

●

There should be nobody behind the as-

sembled partition when the vehicle is mov-

ing.

CAUTION

Incorrect handling of the net partition

could cause damage.

●

Do not “release” the net par

tition when

lowering it, as the net and other vehicle

parts could be damaged. Roll down the net

partition by hand.

Using the net partition while the

ear seat backs ar

e f

ded do

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 159

Assembling the net partition in the

ear seat backr

ests.

Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: net par-

tition hook

ed in pl

ace with the r

ear seat backs

ded down.

Fitting the net partition

●

Fold the rear seat backrests forward.

●

Remove the net partition from the side sup-

ports.

●

Place the net casing in the rail slots in the

dir

ection of the arr

›

Fig. 159

●

Push the casing towards the left side of the

ehicl

e in the dir

ection of arr

›››

Fig. 159

and as far as it will go.

●

Check that the net is secure.

Pulling out and securing the net par

tition

●

Pull up handl

›

Fig. 160

to remove the

net fr

om the casing

›

Fig. 160

●

Hook in the net partition on the right side

›

Fig. 160

(magnified image).

●

Hook in the net partition in the left side

housing

›

Fig. 160

pulling the rod.

The net partition is pr

operly assembl

ed when

the T

-shaped ends ar

e firmly secur

ed in the

corresponding housings

›››

Fig. 160

and

etr

acting the net par

tition

●

emo

ve the rod from the housings in the

trims of the roof side members.

●

Roll up the net into the casing

›››

Fig. 160

lowering it with your hand.

148

Transport and practical equipment

Removing the net partition

●

Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cm

in the opposit

e dir

ection t

o the arr

›››

Fig. 159

●

Remove the casing from the rails by pulling

in the opposit

e dir

ection t

o the arr

›››

Fig. 159

●

Lift the rear seat backrests.

WARNING

During a sudden driving or braking ma-

noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob-

jects coul

d be flung though the interior and

cause serious or fatal injuries.

●

Always secure objects, even when the

net partition is properly assembled.

●

There should be nobody behind the as-

sembled partition when the vehicle is mov-

ing.

WARNING

The rear seat backrests should only be lif-

ted again once the net partition has been

disassembled.

CAUTION

Incorrect handling of the net partition

could cause damage.

●

Do not “release” the net par

tition when

lowering it, as the net and other vehicle

parts could be damaged. Roll down the net

partition by hand.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-

mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross

bars or conv

entional roof carrier systems

cannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in the

roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-

proved cross bars and roof carrier systems

can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof

carrier system should be disassembled.

●

When they are not used.

●

When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.

●

When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-

mum height, for example

, in some garages.

WARNING

●

Always secure the load pr

operly using

belts or retaining straps that are suitable

and in a good condition.

●

Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a

negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-

tre of gravity and driving performance.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Adapt your speed and driving styl

e at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

CAUTION

●

emove the cross bars and the r

oof carri-

er system before entering a car wash.

●

Vehicle height is increased by the instal-

lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system

and the load secured on them. For this pur-

pose, check that your vehicle's height does

not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-

ple, for underpasses or for entering garage

doors.

●

Cross bars, the roof carrier system and

the load secured on them should not inter-

fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path

of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.

●

On opening the rear lid make sure that it

does not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environment

When cross bars and a roof carrier system

are installed, the increased air r

esistance

means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

149

Operation

Securing the crossbars and the

oof carrier syst

Fig. 161

Leon: attachment points for the roof

ailings f

or the r

oof carrier syst

em.

Fig. 162

Leon Sportourer ST: attachment

points f

or the r

oof r

ailings f

or the r

oof carrier

system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of

special r

oof carrier syst

ems. F

or saf

y rea-

sons, special fixtures must be used to safely

transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards

or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories

can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof

carrier system properly. Always take the as-

sembly instructions that come with the cross-

bars and the roof carrier system in question

into account.

LEON model

The front and rear attachment points

and

are only visible when the doors are open

›

Fig. 161

eon Sportourer ST model

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-

ings. The attachment points can be seen on

bottom of the roof railing

›››

Fig. 162.

WARNING

Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-

bars and the roof carrier system may cause

the whole system t

o detach from the roof

and cause an accident and injuries.

●

Always take the manufacturer assembly

instructions into account.

●

Check threaded joints and attachments

travelling and if necessary tighten them af-

ter you have travelled a short distance.

When making long trips, check the threa-

ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.

●

Do not modify or repair the crossbars or

roof carrier system.

Note

Always read the assembly instructions that

come with the crossbars and the roof carri-

er system carefully and k

eep them in the

vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars

and the roof carrier system are properly in-

alled

›››

Maximum authorised car

go on the r

oof

The maximum authorised car

go permitt

ed t

be transport on the roof is 75 kg. This figure

comes from the combined weight of the roof

carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on

the roof

›››

ays check the w

eight of the r

oof carrier

syst

em, the cross bars and the weight of the

load to be transported and weigh them if

necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-

thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier

with a lower weight rating, you will not be

able to carry the maximum authorised roof

load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-

mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is

listed in the fitting instructions.

150

Transport and practical equipment

Distributing a load

Distribut

e l

oads unif

ormly and secur

e them

corr

ectly

›››

Check att

achments

Once the cr

oss bars and r

oof carrier syst

hav

e been installed, check the bolted con-

nections and attachments after a short jour-

ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-

cy.

WARNING

●

Never exceed the maximum authorised

oad on the roof and on the axles or the ve-

hicle's maximum authorised weight.

●

Never exceed the load capacity of the

cross bars and the roof carrier system,

even if the maximum authorised roof load

has not been reached.

●

Secure heavy items as far forward as

possible and distribute the vehicle load

uniformly.

WARNING

If the load is loose or not secured, it could

fall from the roof carrier system or cause

accidents and injuries.

●

ways use belts or retaining straps that

are suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Intr

oduction

Use the storage compartments only for small

or light items.

WARNING

Objects inside the vehicle that are not se-

cured could be thrown acr

oss the cabin in

the event of sudden braking or manoeu-

vring. This may cause severe injuries as

well as loss of control of the vehicle.

●

Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or

heavy items in open storage compartments

of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the

cover behind the rear seats, or inside

pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-

cle.

●

Keep the storage compartments closed

at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi-

cult the use of the pedals. This may cause

loss of control of the vehicl

e and increases

the risk of severe injuries.

●

Make sure that nothing prevents you from

using the pedals at any time.

●

Always secure the mat in the footwell.

●

Never place other mats or other type of

covers on the factory-fitted mat.

●

Ensure that no objects can fall into the

driv

er's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-

tion.

●

When the vehicle is stationary, remove

the objects in the footwell.

WARNING

If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they

might be damaged or lit inadv

ertently. This

could l

ead to severe burns and damage to

the vehicle.

●

Before moving a seat, make sure there

are no lighters in the moving part area of

the vehicle.

●

Before closing a storage compartment,

make sure there are no lighters in the clos-

ing area.

●

Never leave a lighter inside a storage

compartment or any other surface of the

vehicle as it could ignite due to the high

temperatures on such surfaces, particular-

ly during the summer.

CAUTION

●

Do not store heat- or cold-sensitiv

e ob-

jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat

and cold could damage them or render

them useless.

●

Objects made from transparent materi-

als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,

magnifying glasses or transparent suction

151

Operation

pads stuck to the windows can concentrate

sunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 163

On the front passenger side: glove

compartment.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

CD pl

ayer and SD car

d r

eader ar

e l

ocated in

the glove compartment. Its operation is de-

scribed in

›››

page 197.

Opening and closing the glove compart-

ment

Opening: Pull the handle

›››

Fig. 163 and

open the glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up-

wards.

WARNING

If the glove compartment is left open, the

risk of causing severe injuries in the ev

ent

of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-

vring increases.

●

Always keep the glove compartment

closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Folding table

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 164 Front left seat: folding table.

Depending on the model version, at the rear

of the fr

ont seats, ther

e may be “pl

ane-st

e”

folding tables for passengers in the rear

seats.

●

To open the tray, open it up in the direction

of the arrow

›››

Fig. 164.

●

To fold it back, push the folding table down

as far as possible.

A drink holder is built into the folding table

›››

page 153.

WARNING

The table must always be closed while

driving to decrease the risk of injuries.

Object holder under front seats*

Fig. 165

Storage compartment under the front

seats.

Opening: Pr

ess the t

ab on the dr

er handl

and take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until

it engages.

WARNING

If the drawer is left open, it could prevent

use of the pedals. This may cause serious

accidents and injuries.

152

Transport and practical equipment

●

Always keep the draw

er closed while the

vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer

and any objects in it could fall into the driv-

er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

CAUTION

The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart-

ments and supports in other parts of the v

ehi-

●

In the centr

e consol

●

In the top of the glove compartment in vehi-

cles that do not have a CD reader. The load

of the compartment should not exceed 1.2 kg.

●

Below the instrument panel in the driver's

area there is a removable box for access to

fuses and relays. The load of the compart-

ment should not exceed 0.2 kg.

●

Other storage compartments are found in

the rear seat, to the left and the right of the

seats.

There are hangers on the struts of the doors

and the rear.

WARNING

Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's

visibility, which may cause serious acci-

dents and injuries.

●

Always hang clothes fr

om hangers in

such a way that the driver's visibility is not

affected.

●

Only hang light pieces of clothing from

the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave

heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets

of these pieces of clothing.

●

Do not use clothes hangers to hang up

the clothing, as this could interfere with the

function of the head-protection airbags.

Drink holder

Intr

oduction

The storage compartments of the driver and

passenger doors cont

ain a bottl

e hol

der

The f

olding tables of the front seats contain

more bottle holders

›››

page 152.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the bottle holders may

cause injuries.

●

Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.

In the event of sudden braking or an acci-

dent while driving, hot beverages in the

bottle holders might spill and cause burns.

●

Ensure that no bottles or other ob

jects

are dropped in the driver footwell while

driving, as they could get under the pedals

and obstruct their working.

●

Never place glasses, food or other heavy

objects drink holders. These heavy objects

may be thrown across the cabin in the

event of an accident and cause serious in-

juries.

WARNING

Closed bottles may explode inside the ve-

hicle due to cold or heat.

●

Nev

er leave closed bottles in the vehicle

if the temperature inside is very high or very

low.

CAUTION

Do not leave open cans in the drink holders

when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is

spilled (e.g. due t

o sudden braking) it may

damage the vehicle and its electrical sys-

tem.

Note

The inside elements of the drink holders

can be extracted for cl

eaning.

153

Operation

Front drink holders

Fig. 166

Centre console: front drinks holders.

There are two cup holders in the centre con-

sol

›

Fig. 166

Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 167  Centre console: 12 volt front po

wer

socket  Rear of the centre console: USB sock-

ets.

Fig. 168 Detail of the side lining of the luggage

compartment: 12 volt power socket (v

alid only

for the Leon Sportourer ST model).

●

Lift the power socket cover

›

Fig. 16

›››

Fig. 168.

●

Insert the plug of the electrical appliance

into the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected to

the 12 volt power socket.

The appliances connected to each power

socket must not exceed a power rating of 120

Watt.

USB power sockets

Depending on the equipment and the coun-

try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-

tions exclusively for charging or as a power

socket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of

the console, between the front seats

154

Air conditioning

›››

Fig. 16



. These connect

ors can work at

a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

WARNING

The power socket works only when the igni-

tion is on. Improper use may cause serious

injury or even fire

. Children should there-

fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if

the button is also left behind. Otherwise

there is a possibility that they may be in-

jured.

CAUTION

Always use the correct type of plugs to

avoid damaging the sockets.

Note

●

The use of electrical appliances with the

engine switched off will cause a battery

dischar

ge.

●

Should the connected appliance over-

heat, immediately switch it off and discon-

nect it from the socket.

●

Before switching the ignition on or off, un-

plug the appliances from the USB ports to

protect them from any damage caused by

fluctuations in voltage.

Air conditioning

Heating, v

entil

ation and

cooling

ed video

Fig. 169 Air conditioning

Introduction

Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, sever-

al syst

ems may hav

e been fitt

ed:

●

The

heating and v

entilation heats and

ventilates the passenger compartment. It

cannot cool.

●

The manual air conditioning and the Cli-

matronic cool and dehumidify the air. They

operate most effectively with the windows

and the sunroof closed.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-

propriate button. Press the button again to

switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the respective function of a control has

been switched on.

Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen filter with its activated

charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier

against impurities in the air taken into the ve-

hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changed

regularly so that air conditioner performance

is not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to

use in areas with very high levels of air pollu-

tion, the filter must be changed more fre-

quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in-

creases the risk of serious accidents.

●

Always ensure that all windo

ws are free

of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-

ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-

erything outside.

●

Only drive when you have good visibility.

●

Always ensure that you use the air condi-

tioning, heater or rear window heating to

maintain good visibility to the outside.

●

Never leave the air recirculation on for a

long period of time. If the cooling system is

switched off and air recirculation mode

155

Operation

switched on, the windows can mist over

very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.

●

Swit

ch air recirculation mode off when it

is not required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and

educe driver concentration possibly re-

sulting in a serious accident.

●

ver leave the fresh air fan turned off or

use the air recirculation for long periods of

time; the air in the vehicle interior will not

be refreshed.

CAUTION

●

To replace the pollen filt

er, always visit a

service centre.

●

Switch the climate control or air condi-

tioner off if you think it may be broken. This

will avoid additional damage. Have the cli-

mate control or air conditioning checked

by a specialised workshop.

●

Repairs to the climat

e control or air con-

ditioning require specialist knowledge and

special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT Official Service.

Note

●

When the cooling syst

em is turned off, air

coming from the outside will not be dried.

o prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT

recommends leaving the cooling system

(compressor) turned on. To do this, press

the 

button. The button lamp should

light up.

●

The maximum heat output required to de-

ost windows as quickly as possible is only

available when the engine has reached its

normal running temperature.

●

Keep the air intake slots in front of the

windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to

ensure heating and cooling are not im-

paired, and to prevent the windows from

misting over.

●

The air from the vents flows through the

vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in

the luggage compartment designed for this

purpose. Therefore

, you should avoid ob-

structing these slots with any kind of ob-

ject.

●

Do not smoke while air recirculation

mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air

conditioning system leaves residue on the

evaporator, producing a permanent un-

pleasant odour.

●

It is advisable to turn on the air condition-

ing at least once a month, to lubricate the

system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-

crease in the cooling capacity is detected,

a Technical Service should be consulted to

check the system.

●

When the engine is under extreme strain,

switch off the compressor for a moment.

156

Air conditioning

Climatronic* controls

Fig. 170 In the centre console: Climatronic con-

trols.

Automatic mode 



Aut

omatic adjustment of t

emper

ure, fan,

and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa-

bled when the ventilation is modified manual-

ly.

Cooling mode 

Press the button to switch on or off the cool-

ing system.

Temperature

The temperature of the right and left sides

can be adjust

ed separ

ely using the adjust

ers. The sel

ected temperature is shown on

the display of the climate control panel.

Synchronisation: press button  so that

settings on the driver's side apply to the pas-

senger side. Use the temperature regulator

for the passenger side to set a different tem-

perature.

Blower 

The power of the fan is automatically adjus-

ted.

The fan is also adjusted manually by turning

the control.

Air distribution  /  / 

The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort.

It can also be manually distributed to the de-

sired zone by pressing the corresponding

button:

The airflow is directed towards the chest

The airflow is directed towards the foot-

well.

The airflow is directed at the windscreen.







Maximum cooling power





The recirculation of air and the cooling sys-

tem turn on automatically and air distribution

adjusts automatically to the position .

Defrost/demist function





The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di-

rected at the windscreen and air recirculation

is automatically switched off. To defrost the

windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi-

fied at temperatures over approximately

+3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum

output.

Infotainment system: 

The climate control operation and settings

menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect

system screen.

157

Operation

Heated rear window 

This only w

orks when the engine is running

and s

wit

ches off aut

omatically aft

er a maxi-

mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glass

is demisted. By saving electrical power you

can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an

automatic temporary disconnection of this

function is possible, coming back on when

normal operating conditions are re-establish-

ed.

Air recirculation 

›››

page 161

Seat heating  

›››

page 162

Switching off

Press button  or manually set the fan to .

Manual air conditioning* controls / Heating and fresh air system

Fig. 171

In the centre console:  contr

s f

or the manual air conditioning;



heating and fresh air system controls.

Cooling mode 



Manual air conditioning:

ess the butt

on t

switch on or off the cooling system.

Temperature

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Heating and fr

esh air syst

em:

The t

emper

ture cannot be lower than that of the exterior

air temperature, as this system cannot cool or

dehumidify the air.

Blower 

Turning the regulator

sets the fan power.

At l

el 0 the f

an and manual air conditioning

e disconnected. Level 6 is the maximum.

Air distribution  /  /  /  / 

Turning regulator

distributes the air to the

desir

ed z

one:

The airfl

w is dir

ected towards the chest

The airflow is directed towards the chest

and the footwell area.

The airflow is directed towards the foot-

well.







158

Air conditioning

The airflow is directed towards the wind-

scr

een and the f

ootw

ell ar

ea.

Defr

ost/demist function 

Manual air conditioning: When control

is in

position  the air fl

w is dir

ect

ed at the wind-

scr

een and air recirculation is disconnected

automatically or not activated. Increase the

fan power to clear the windscreen of con-

densation as soon as possible. To dehumidify

the air, the cooling system will automatically

switch on.

Maximum cooling power





Manual air conditioning: When the control is

in position   air recirculation and the

cooling system are connected automatically

and the air flow is automatically adjusted to

position .

Heated rear window 

This only works when the engine is running

and switches off automatically after a maxi-

mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glass

is demisted. By saving electrical power you

can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an

automatic temporary disconnection of this

function is possible, coming back on when

normal operating conditions are re-establish-

ed.

 Air recirculation



›››

page 161

Seat heating  

›››

page 162

Operating the Climatronic through

the Easy Connect system*

3 Valid for vehicles with a Media System Colour.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possible

o perform various adjustments to the Clima-

tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu

●

Press the  button on the Climatronic

control panel.

●

OR: pr

ess the    button in Easy Con-

nect. With the rotating switch select the air

conditioner menu and open it.

On the touch screen you can see and

change the current settings, for example, the

temperature set for the driver and passenger

sides, the air distribution and the fan speed.

To switch a function on or off, or to select a

submenu, you must press the corresponding

function button.

Function button: Function

OFF: Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.

SYNC: Synchronise driver and front passenger tem-

peratures.

SETTINGS The air conditioning settings submenu is

opened. The following settings can also be adjust

ed:

Air conditioning profile: Adjust the

power of the fan in AUTO mode

. You can choose

between low, medium and high.

Automatic air recirculation: Switching

automatic air recir

culation on and off

›››

page 161.

Operating the Climatronic through

the Easy Connect syst

em*

3 Applies to vehicles with Media System Plus /

Navi Syst

em / Navi System Plus.

Fig. 172 Easy Connect screen: Climate control

menu.

159

Operation

In the Easy Connect system it is also possible

o perf

orm v

arious adjustments t

o the Clima-

onic.

Open the air conditioner menu

●

Press the  button of the Climatronic

control panel.

On the screen you can view and change the

current settings, such as, for example, the

temperature set for the driver and passenger

sides. Temperatures up to +22°C (+72°F) are

shown with blue arrows, and temperatures

over +22°C (+72°F) with red arrows.

To switch a function on or off, or to select a

submenu, you must press the corresponding

function button.

Function button: Function

OFF: Climatronic is switched off.

ON: Climatr

onic is switched on.

SYNC: Synchronise driver and front passenger tem-

per

atures.

SETTINGS The air conditioning settings submenu is

opened. The following settings can also be adjust

ed:

Automatic supplementary heater: to

activate/deactivat

e the automatic activation of

the auxiliary heating for colder countries (only

for engines with auxiliary heating). With the op-

tion deactivated, depending on the outside tem-

perature the heating may need more time than

normal to reach a comfortable temperature.

Function button: Function

Air conditioning profile: Adjust the

power of the fan in AUTO mode

. You can choose

between low, medium and high.

Automatic air recirculation: to switch

automatic air r

ecirculation on and off

›››

page 161.

Back : Close the submenu.

Climate control usage instructions

The interior cooling system only works when

the engine is running and f

an is s

wit

ched on.

Economic use of the air conditioning

When the air conditioning is s

wit

ched on, the

compressor consumes engine power and has

influence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioner operates most effectively

with the windows and the panoramic sliding

sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has

heated up after standing in the sun for some

time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-

ly by opening the windows and the panoram-

ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Change the temperature unit (Climatron-

ic)

The temperature display can be changed

from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of

the Infotainment system using the Infotain-

ment button    > Settings > Units.

The cooling system cannot be activated

If the air conditioning system cannot be

switched on, this may be caused by the fol-

lowing:

●

The engine is not running.

●

The fan is switched off.

●

The air conditioner fuse has blown.

●

The outside temperature is lower than ap-

proximately +3°C (+38°F).

●

The air conditioner compressor has been

temporarily switched off because the engine

coolant temperature is too high.

●

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air

conditioner checked by a specialised work-

shop.

Special characteristics

If the humidity and temperature outside the

vehicle are high, condensation can drip off

the evaporator in the cooling system and

form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is

normal and does not indicate a leak!

Note

After starting the engine, any residual hu-

midity in the air conditioner could mist over

160

Air conditioning

the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-

tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-

screen of condensation.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-

lation in the vehicle interior

, the air vents must

remain open.

●

Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in the

required direction to open and close the air

vents. When the thumbwheel is in the  posi-

tion, the corresponding air vent is closed.

●

Change the air direction using the ventila-

tion grille lever

There are other additional, non-adjustable air

vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in

the rear area of the passenger compartment.

Note

Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen-

sitive objects should nev

er be placed in

front of the air outlets as they may be dam-

aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation 

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient

air fr

om ent

ering the int

erior

When the outside t

emperature is very high,

selecting manual air recirculation mode for a

short period refreshes the vehicle interior

more quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is

switched off when the button   is press-

ed or the air distributor turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculation

mode on and off

●

Press the button  to connect or discon-

nect manual air recirculation.

Climatronic automatic air recirculation

mode

With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-

tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-

terior is enabled. If the system detects a high

concentration of hazardous substances in the

ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched

on automatically. When the level of impurities

drops to within a normal range, recirculation

mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasant

smells.

●

Automatic air recirculation is activated and

deactivated in the climate control menu

›››

page 159.

The air recirculation will not connect auto-

matically in versions without humidity sensor

and in the following external conditions:

●

The outside temperature is lower than +3°C

(+38°F).

●

The cooling system is switched off and the

outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).

●

The cooling system is switched off, the out-

side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and

the windscreen wipers are switched on.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Intro-

duction on page 156.

●

If the cooling system is switched off and

air recirculation mode swit

ched on, the

windows can mist over very quickly, con-

siderably limiting visibility.

●

Switch air recirculation mode off when it

is not required.

CAUTION

Do not smoke when air recirculation is

switched on in vehicles with an air condi-

tioner

. The smoke taken in could lie on the

cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-

vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and

pollen filter, leading to a permanently un-

pleasant smell.

Note

Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-

vated to pre

vent exhaust gas or unpleasant

odours from entering the vehicle interior

161

Operation

when it is in reverse and while the automat-

ic windscreen wiper is working.

Seat heating*

With the engine on, the seat cushion and the

seat backrest can be heated electrically.

Control seat heating

●

ess buttons  or  on the control panel

to turn on the seat heating as high as possi-

ble.

●

Press buttons  or  repeatedly to adjust it

to the r

equired level.

●

To turn off the seat heating, press button 

or  repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

If the ignition is switched on again in approx.

the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating is

automatically turned on to the level set the

last time.

Cases in which the heat seating should

not be switched on

Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the

following conditions are met:

●

The seat is not occupied.

●

The seat has a cover.

●

A child seat has been installed on the seat.

●

The seat cushion is wet or damp.

●

The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-

er than +25°C (77°F).

WARNING

People who cannot perceive pain or tem-

perature because of medications, paralysis

or chr

onic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have

a limited perception of these, may suffer

burns to the back, buttocks or legs when

using seat heating.

●

People with limited pain and temperature

thresholds must never use seat heating.

●

If an abnormality in the device's temper-

ature control is detected, have it checked

by a specialist workshop.

WARNING

If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can

adversely affect the operation of the seat

heating, increasing the risk of burns.

●

Mak

e sure the seat cushion is dry prior to

using the seat heater.

●

Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is

wet or damp.

●

Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp

on the seat.

●

Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION

●

To avoid damaging the heating elements

of the seat heaters, pl

ease do not kneel on

the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single

point on the seat cushion or backrest.

●

Liquids, sharps objects and insulating

material

s (e.g. covers or child seats) can

damage the seat heating.

●

In the event of smells, switch off the seat

heating immediately and have it inspected

by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The seat heating should remain on only

when needed. Otherwise

, it is an unneces-

sary fuel waste.

162

Introduction

Infotainment System

Intr

oduction

Saf

y w

arnings

Saf

ety warnings regarding the Info-

tainment system

Only operate the infotainment system and its

various functions when the traffic situation

really permits this.

WARNING

●

Before starting the trip

, you should famili-

arise yourself with the different infotain-

ment system functions.

●

High audio volume may represent a dan-

ger to you and to others. Hearing may be

impaired if the volume is too high, even for

short periods of time.

●

Changes to the Infotainment system set-

tings should be made when the car is stop-

ped, or by a passenger.

WARNING

Current traffic requires maximum attention

from public road users. Distracting the driv-

er in any way can l

ead to an accident and

cause injuries. Operating the Infotainment

system can distract your attention from the

traffic.

●

Always drive car

efully and responsibly.

●

Select volume settings that allow you to

hear sounds from outside the vehicle at all

times (e.g. emergency services sirens and

horns).

WARNING

The volume level may suddenly change

when you s

witch audio source or connect a

new audio sour

ce.

●

Lower the base volume before connect-

ing or switching audio sources.

WARNING

The driving recommendations and traffic

indications shown on the navigation system

may differ from the curr

ent traffic situation.

●

Traffic signs and traffic regulations have

priority over the recommendations and dis-

plays provided by the navigation system.

WARNING

Connecting, inserting or removing a data

medium while driving can distract your at-

tention fr

om the traffic and cause an acci-

dent.

WARNING

Place the connecting cables of external

equipment so that they do not interfere

with the driver

’s mobility.

WARNING

External devices that are loose or not prop-

erly secured could move ar

ound the pas-

senger compartment during a sharp ma-

noeuvre or accident.

●

Avoid placing external devices on the

doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash

panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or

near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between

these areas and the occupants. They could

cause serious injury in an accident, espe-

cially when the airbags inflate.

WARNING

The armrest* must always remain closed

during the journey as it could restrict the

driver’

s movements.

WARNING

Opening the CD or DVD player can lead to

injuries from invisible laser radiation.

●

Hav

e CD or DVD repaired only by a spe-

cialist workshop.

163

Infotainment System

CAUTION

The Infotainment system can be damaged

by the incorrect insertion of a data stor

age

device or the insertion of an incompatible

data storage device.

●

When inserting a data storage device,

make sure it is correctly positioned.

●

Applying force may irreparably damage

the memory card slot locking mechanism.

●

Only use compatible memory cards.

●

When inserting and removing CDs and

DVDs, always hold them at right angles to

the front of the CD/DVD drive without tilt-

ing so as not to scratch them.

●

If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is

already in the unit or being ejected, the

CD/DVD drive may be damaged. Always

wait until the data medium is completely

ejected.

CAUTION

Foreign objects stuck to a CD or DVD, or if it

is not round, the player may be damaged.

●

Only clean, standar

d 12 cm CDs or DVDs

should be used.

–

Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel off

and damage the drive.

–

Do not use printable data media. Prin-

ted labels and coverings may peel off

and damage the CD/DVD drive.

–

Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-

larly shaped CDs or D

VDs.

–

Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual

Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker

than normal CDs.

CAUTION

The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-

aged if the v

olume is too high or the sound

is distort

ed.

Note

For the proper functioning of the Infotain-

ment system it is important that the date

and time set in the v

ehicle are correct.

164

Introduction

Overview of the unit

Media Syst

em Col

our

Fig. 173

Overview of the controls (this configura-

tion depends on the v

ersion).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency

›

page 189

ouchscr

een

›››

page 170

Telephone mode* / TP Settings

›››

page 233

Media mode (audio sources)

›››

page 197

Volume and sound settings

›

page 1

Vehicle settings

›››

page 92,

›››

page 228

Main menu

›››

page 169

Volume. Off/on

›››

page 169

Slot for memory cards

›››

page 206

Settings button (search and selection)

›

page 169

165

Infotainment System

Media System Plus / Navi System / Navi System Plus

Fig. 174 Overview of the controls

Main menu

›

page 169

Full Link

›

page 179

Volume. Off/on

›››

page 169

Touchscreen

›››

page 170

If your vehicle does not have Full Link*, pressing

the key will bring up a message on the screen

telling you that you can activat

e this function in

an Official Service of your choice.

166

Introduction

Main menus

Fig. 175

Menu summary (these menus depend on the equipment in question).

167

Infotainment System



Radio

›››

page 189

RADIO main menu

››

›

page 189

RDS radio dat

a services

›››

page 190

Digital radio mode

›››

page 191

Memory buttons

›››

page 192

Save station logos

›››

page 193

Select, tune and save stations

›››

page 193

SCAN automatic playback

›››

page 194

TP traffic information

›››

page 194

Setup

›››

page 195



Media

›››

page 197

Data and fil

e formats

›››

page 197

Playback or

der

›››

page 200

›››

page 200

Change the media source

›››

page 203

Change track

›››

page 203

Selecting an album by cover

›››

page 204

Selecting a track from a track list

›››

page 204

Data bank view

›››

page 205

Insert or remove a CD or DVD

›››

page 206

Memory card

›››

page 206

External data storage device connected to the USB

port

›››

page 207

External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-

media socket

›››

page 208

External audio source with Bluetooth

›››

page 208

Images

›››

page 213

Setup

›››

page 214



Navigation

›››

page 214

w destination

›››

page 21

Route options

›››

page 218

›››

page 218

My destinations

›››

page 219

Special destinations (POI)

›››

page 220

View

›››

page 221

Split screen

›››

page 221

Map display

›››

page 222

Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide

›››

page 222

Predictive navigation

›››

page 223

Import vCards

›››

page 224

Navigation with images

›››

page 224

Road signs

›››

page 224

Route guidance in Demo mode

›››

page 224

Setup

›››

page 225

Offroad mode

›››

page 226



Vehicle

Instrument panel

›

››

page 229

Sport

››

›

page 229

Offroad

›››

page 230

Consumers

›››

page 230

Driving data

›››

page 231

Ecotrainer

›››

page 231

Vehicle status

›››

page 232



Traffic

›››

page 222

affic information (TP)

›››

page 194

affic bulletins and dynamic guide

›››

page 222



Telephone

›››

page 233

Bluetooth

›

››

page 234

Tethering

›

››

page 235

Function buttons

›››

page 236

Enter number

›››

page 238

Agenda

›››

page 239

Short messages (SMS)

›››

page 240

Call list

›››

page 241

Quick dial keys

›››

page 242

Setup

›››

page 242



Sound

›››

page 17



Full Link

›››

page 17

Requirements

›››

page 180

Activation of Full Link

›

››

page 181

Tethering of portable devices

›››

page 182

MirrorLink

›››

page 183

Apple CarPlay™

›››

page 183

Android Auto™

›››

page 184

Frequently Asked Questions

›››

page 185



SEAT Md. Climate

›››

page 185

WLAN access point

››

›

page 186



Images

›››

page 213



Control

›››

page 159



Setup

›››

page 17

168

Introduction

General instructions for use

Intr

oduction

Fig. 176 Related video

If the setup is changed, this may change the

displ

ay on the scr

een and the Inf

ainment

syst

em may behave in a manner different to

that described in this manual.

Note

●

Just press a button or the screen to use

the inf

otainment system's functions.

●

The equipment’s software depends on

the market in question, so it is possible that

not all of the function buttons or described

functions are available. The equipment is

not faulty if a function button is missing.

●

Due to country-specific legislation, cer-

tain functions may not be available on the

screen when the vehicle is travelling above

a certain speed.

●

Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-

cle may provoke noise in the speakers.

●

Restrictions on the use of devices using

Bluetooth

technology may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact

the local authorities.

●

On vehicles with ParkPil

ot, the audio vol-

ume is automatically lowered when reverse

gear is selected. The volume can be low-

ered in the menu Sound > Volume.

Diagram of the menus

Fig. 177

Main menu

The Infotainment system touchscreen can be

used t

o sel

ect the diff

ent main menus.

ess the Infotainment button    to

open the menus summary .

The display of the touchscreen's main menu

can be switched between “grid” and “carou-

sel” and vice-versa using the menu Settings

> Screen

›››

page 173.

Note

Depending on the infotainment version,

there may be more icons on the second

page. In this case, t

o see the remaining

icons press the function button

›››

Fig. 177

(arrow) or slide your finger horizontally

across the screen.

Rotary push buttons and infotain-

ment buttons

Rotary/push buttons

The l

eft r

ary push butt

 is the on/off

button if pressed and the volume knob if

turned.

Infotainment buttons

The buttons on the unit are shown in this

manual with the word “infotainment button”

and their function within a rectangle, for ex-

ample, the infotainment button   .

The Infotainment buttons are used by press-

ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

When the system is turned on, it starts up with

the v

olume at which it w

as t

urned off

, as l

ong

as it does not exceed the preset maximum

start-up volume. Select Sound > Volume.

169

Infotainment System

The unit will switch off automatically when

the k

ey is r

emo

ed fr

om the ignition or when

the on/off button is pressed (depending on

the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-

fotainment system is switched on again, it will

switch off automatically after approximately

30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note

●

The Infotainment system is a part of the

ehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-

cle.

●

If the battery has been disconnected, the

ignition must be activated before switching

on the Infotainment system.

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume or

muting the sound

aise the v

olume

: t

urn the v

olume control 

clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on

the multifunction steering wheel upward .

Lower the volume: turn the volume control 

clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on

the multifunction steering wheel downward

.

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-

ume bar on the screen. The volume can be

controlled using the steering wheel controls.

In this case, the changes in volume are dis-

played on the instrument panel by a volume

bar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settings

and adjustments. Select    > Sound >

Volume.

Muting the Infotainment system sound

●

Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise

until it displays .

●

OR: press the left wheel of the multifunction

steering wheel.

Playback is paused while in Media mode (ex-

cept AUX). The screen displays .

Operation of the function buttons

and the instructions on the screen

Fig. 178 View of some of the function buttons

on the scr

een.

Fig. 179 Sound setup menu

Active areas of the touchscreen that call up a

cert

ain function ar

e call

ed “function butt

ons”.

These butt

ons are operated by pressing them

on the screen or holding them down.

The function buttons appear in this manual as

a “function button” and a button symbol

inside a rectangle

These activ

e functions or open submenus.

The curr

ently sel

ect

ed menu is displayed in

the title bar

›››

Fig. 178

of the submenus.

Inactiv

e (gr

ey) function butt

ons cannot be se-

ect

ed.

Increase or decrease the size of the im-

ages displayed on the screen

The size of the navigation map image and im-

age views can be enlarged or reduced. To do

this, slide 2 fingers across the screen to sepa-

rate them or bring them together.

170

Introduction

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect

The title bar shows the selected menu

and other function buttons.

B Press it to open another menu.

The scroll bar is shown on the right. Scroll

the bar by sliding your finger vertically on

›››

page 1

71, Open list entries and

search in lists.

Movable cursor: Move the cursor by slid-

ing your finger across the screen.

OR:

Press a point on the screen where

you want the sound to be direct

ed.

Fixed crosshair: Press on the arrows to

move the sound around according to your

preferences.

OR: Press the central button to centre the

stereo sound in the centre of the passen-

ger compartment



Press it on some lists to move up a level,

one by one.

BACK



Button to return to the previous menu or

ve up through the fol

der structure.



When pressed, a pop-up window opens

(options window) which displays other

setup options.

 /



Some functions are activated  or deac-

tivated  by pressing this box.

Display and function buttons: operation

and effect

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

ess to close a pop-up window or an in-

put windo





Press them to change the set

up adjust-

ments one at a time.



Move the scroll butt

on across the screen

by sliding your finger.

Open list entries and search in lists

Fig. 180

Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated by

essing them on the scr

een or by using the

settings butt

on.

Mark list entries using the set

up butt

and open them

●

Turn the adjustment knob to search and se-

lect from the list.

●

Press the setup button to activate the

marked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen)

The scroll bar is shown on the right and its

size depends on the entries in the list

›››

Fig. 180

●

On the bar: Pr

ess abo

e or bel

w the mark

or slide your finger vertically over the mark

until you reach the desired position.

Input window with on-screen key-

pad

Fig. 181 Input window with on-screen keypad.

171

Infotainment System

The on-screen keypad is used for functions

such as ent

ering an memory name

, sel

ecting

a destination addr

ess or ent

ering a search

term for searching long lists.

The input line with cursor is located in the top

bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed

here.

Input windows for “free text input”

In the input masks for open text, you may en-

ter letters, numbers and characters in any

combination.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry

(e.g. selection of a destination address)

It is only possible to enter a sequence of let-

ters, numbers and characters that matches a

stored entry.

Matches are suggested on the input line

›››

Fig. 181

. In the case of compound

names, it is necessary t

o ent

er a space

ervie

w of the function buttons*

Function icon and text: operation and ef-

fect

Letters and

digits

Press them t

o copy them into the input

line.

Press to change the keypad to anoth-

er language. Keypad languages can

be selected from the menu System

settings > Speech.

Function icon and text: operation and ef-

fect

Press to show symbols on the keypad.

If there are fewer than 99, it shows the

number of entries that can be selec-

ted. Pressing opens the list according

to the entry.

Scroll bar, the size of which depends

on the number of matching entries.

If the button is held down, special

characters based on that letter ar

displayed. Press the desired charac-

ter to enter it. Some special charac-

ters can be written out instead (e.g.

“AE” for “Ä”).



Space bar



Deletes characters on the input line

from right to left.

Press and hol

d to delete several char-

acters.

BACK  Close the input window.

Additional information and display

options

The displays appearing on the screen may

ary depending on the settings, and may dif

er fr

om those described her

The status bar on the screen can display, for

example, the current time and outside tem-

perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com-

pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 182

Initial configuration wizard

It will help you to set up your Infotainment

syst

em the first time you s

wit

ch it on.

ery time you s

witch on the Infotainment

system, the initial setup screen will appear

›››

Fig. 182 if any parameters have not been

set or if the NEVER function button has not

been pressed.

172

Introduction

Function button: function

Closes the Configuration Wizard, and

the main menu or last mode in which

you used the Infotainment system will

appear

NEVER

Disables the possibility of changing

the settings of the Infotainment sys-

tem. To configur

e the system go to:

System settings and select Con-

figuration wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

If the system includes navigation, the

date and time are set automatically

by the GPS.

Search and save the radio stations

with the best reception at that time in

all available bands.

Link your mobile phone to the Infotain-

ment system.

Add your home address using your

current position or by manually enter-

ing an address.

evious or next parameter to config-

ure.

When a parameter has been config-

ured, the only way to reconfigure it is

by clicking on it on the main menu, not

by using the Previous/Next buttons.

When you configure a parameter, 

will be displayed over it.

Function button: function

FINISH

Once one or more settings have been

applied, finalise the configuration in

the main menu of the wizzard.

If you have not set all the par

ameters,

the Initial Configuration Wizard will

start the next time you turn the Info-

tainment system on.

Only valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.

Menu and system settings

The settings that can be selected varies de-

pending on the country and the equipment in

question, and on the v

ehicl

e's equipment.

●

ess the Inf

ainment button    and

then press the SETTINGS

function button.

ess the function butt

on of the main menu or

the functions f

or which you w

ant t

o change

the settings. All settings are automatically

applied when the menus are closed.

Function button: function

Screen : To change the screen settings.

Menu : To select the main menu display mode

(Mosaic or Carousel).

Function button: function

Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) : If this function is

active and the infotainment system is not used,

the scr

een will automatically switch off after ap-

prox. 10 seconds. Pressing the screen or pressing

one of the infotainment buttons will turn the

screen on again.

Brightness

: To select the brightness level of the

screen.

Day / Night : To select the type of display (Day,

Night or Automatic).

Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a

function button is pressed is active.

Sho

w clock in standby mode

: In standby mode, the

time is displayed on the infotainment system

scr

een.

Date and time

: Change the time and date settings.

Clock time source : To select the time source (GPS

or manual).

GPS : The time and date can be selected using

the Time zone function button. In this case, the

Time and Date function buttons for manual

entry will not be active.

Manual : The time and date can be set manual-

ly using the Time and Date function buttons.

Time : To set the time manually.

Time zone : To adjust the desired time zone.

Time format : To select the time display format (12

or 24 hours).

Date : To set the current date.

173

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Date format : To select the date display format

(DD.MM.YYYY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY).

Language : To select the desired language for texts

and phrases in the voice control system.

Additional keypad languages : To select additional key-

board languages.

Units : To set the units of measurement of the vehi-

cle's displays: distance

, speed, temperature, volume,

consumption and pressure.

Data transfer for SEAT apps

Data transfer for SEAT apps : This allows data to be

exchanged between the vehicl

e and SEAT apps.

They are not personal data.

Operation via apps

: Change the level of interaction

with apps.

Deactivate : This limits specific functions that

require a higher lev

el of security.

Confirm

: Allows 100% of functions of the app,

and certain specific actions on the Infotain-

ment system hav

e to be confirmed.

Allow

: Allows all available functions to be exe-

cuted from the app.

Voice contr

: To change the voice control settings

›››

page 175

Remove safely

: To eject the data medium (SD/USB

card) from the system. After corr

ectly ejecting the

data storage device from the system, the function

button becomes inactive (grey colour).

Function button: function

Factory settings : When the original factory settings

are restored, all

inputs and settings that are made

are deleted, depending on the selected settings.

Bluetooth

: To change the Bluetooth

›››

page 243

settings.

WLAN

: To change the WLAN access point settings

›››

page 2

11.

System information

: Display of the system information

(device number, hardwar

e and software versions).

Update

: To update the navigation data, do

›››

page 214

No remove the memory card while

the navigation data are being installed.

: Information about copyright.

Configuration wizard : Opens the Infotainment system’s

initial configuration wizard.

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.

Note

For the proper functioning of the Infotain-

ment system it is important that the date

and time set in the v

ehicle are correct.

Volume and sound settings

The settings that can be selected varies de-

pending on the country and the equipment in

question, and on the v

ehicl

e's equipment.

●

ess the Inf

ainment button    and

then press the Sound

function button.

●

Press the main menu function button for the

settings that hav

e t

o be changed. All settings

e applied inst

antly.

erview of screen and function buttons

Function button: function

Volume : To change the volume settings.

Warnings : To set the playback volume of warn-

ings, such as traffic announcements.

Navigation announcements : To set the playback

volume of audio driving recommendations.

Voice control : To set the playback volume of

voice control.

Maximum swit

ch-on volume

: To set the equipment's

maximum switch-on volume.

Speed-dependent v

olume adjustment

(GALA): To set

the extent to which the volume is adjust

ed de-

pending on the speed. The volume of the audio

will increase automatically as the speed of the

vehicle increases.

Entertainment fading when parking

: To adjust the

desired reduction in audio volume when ParkPi-

ot is active.

Entertainment fading (nav. announcements)

: Adjusts

the playback volume when the navigator is

speaking.

174

Introduction

Function button: function

Volume : To set the playback volume of audio

sources connected via the AUX-IN multimedia

jack (Low, Medium or

High). Also see

›››

page 174, Overview of screen and function

buttons.

Bluetooth audio

: To set the playback volume of

the audio sources connected by Bluetooth

(Low, Medium or High). Also see

›››

page 174,

Overview of screen and function buttons.

Equaliser : To adjust the sound properties.

Balance - Fader : To adjust the sound distribution. The

cursor indicates the current sound distribution in the

passenger compartment. To modify the sound distri-

bution, briefly press on the desir

ed position in the

passenger compartment view or use the arrow keys

for a step-by-step modification. To centre sound dis-

tribution in the passenger compartment view, press

the central function button located between the ar-

rows.

Sound focus

: Optimizes the sound in the passenger

compartment.

Subwoofer *: Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer.

Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a func-

tion button is pressed is active.

Disabling v

oice navigation during calls

: During a tele-

phone conversation, audio driving recommendations

will not be given.

Adjust the playback volume of external

audio sour

ces

If you need t

o incr

ease the pl

ayback v

olume

for the external audio source, first lower the

base volume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audio source

is very low, increase the output volume on

the external audio source. If this is not

enough, change the input volume to medium

or high.

If the sound from the connected external au-

dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the

output volume on the external audio source.

If this is not enough, change the input vol-

ume to medium or low.

Voice control

How it works

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 183

Voice control: main screen

Many of the radio, media, telephone and nav-

igation functions can be changed by v

oice

commands.

The v

oice contr

ol of the inf

ainment system

will only be available for the language selec-

ted in System settings

›››

page 173.

●

Voice control settings

›››

page 178.

Start and stop voice control

●

To activate voice control, briefly press the

button on the multifunction steering wheel .

●

When activating voice control, a dialogue

start tone will sound and the main voice con-

trol screen will be displayed,

›››

Fig. 183, (the

175

Infotainment System

main screen will appear in the format selec-

ed in V

oice contr

ol settings

›

page 178).

The spoken indications guide you through the

following “dialogue”.

●

Speak the desired command and follow the

instructions in the “dialogue”. Often a func-

tion can be activated by different spoken

commands. If in doubt, try speaking a com-

mand or say Help.

●

When an action is taken (e.g., call a con-

tact), the voice control ends automatically

and you must activate it again if you want to

continue with it. There are certain commands

after which the voice control does not end,

and it waits by saying Next command?.

●

To manually end voice control, press and

hold the button  until the corresponding

confirmation signal sounds, or briefly press

the  button twice, or press the function but-

ton  in the upper right corner of the screen.

●

You can also end the voice control by

speaking the following commands: Stop or

Cancel.

Voice control help

It is recommended to listen to the Help the

first time you use the voice control.

●

Activate voice control .

●

Say the command Help to start it in the lan-

guage indicated System Settings, and fol-

low the instructions in the dialogue. The Help

command can also be spoken followed by a

function of the infotainment system, such as

“Help with navigation”.

Interacting with the dialogue mode

Icons in upper left corner:

The system waits for a user's command.

The system has recognised a command

and will act shortly.

The system transmits a spoken com-

mand and confirms the command that

has been given.

The system is in paused mode. (max. 3

minutes).

Hide or show the voice control menu

›››

Fig. 183.

Operation during the dialogue

While the infotainment system transmits a

spoken instruction, the symbol  will be dis-

played on the screen.

●

You can stop the speech by pressing the

upper left icon on the screen or button  and

voice recognition will resume for the user.

IMPORTANT: The system will ONLY recog-

nize a command when the symbol  is

displayed as “active” on the panel or on

the touchscreen.













If you make a mistake when speaking a com-

mand, or pronounce it incompletely and it

has no effect, you may repeat the command.

The symbol  remains activated.

●

Briefly press button  to repeat the com-

mand.

Voice control instructions

Follow the instructions shown below for opti-

mal operation of the voice control.

●

Speak slowly and clearly if possible. The

system will not recognise words that are un-

clearly pronounced, or words and numbers

that are missing syllables.

●

Telephone numbers should be spoken digit

by digit, or by blocks units, tens or hundreds.

●

Speak at a normal volume, without exag-

gerated pronunciation or long pauses.

●

Avoid outside and nearby noise (for exam-

ple, conversations inside the vehicle). Close

all doors, windows and the sliding sunroof.

●

Do not direct the air from the outlets to-

wards the roof of the passenger compart-

ment.

●

If you are driving at high speed, talk a little

louder.

By activating voice control the system takes

you to the main screen

›››

Fig. 183, which will

display the contexts in which the system op-

erates and the main commands.

176

Introduction

From here you can command the system

based on the cont

xt that you w

ant t

o oper

ate, or give a voice command directly.

When selecting each of the contexts (Naviga-

tion, Telephone, Radio, Media, Voice control)

a menu will displayed listing the main com-

mands, and providing brief explanations of

how to give each of them, as a help mode.

Voice control (RADIO)

Effect Voice command

LISTEN TO THE RADIO Listen to the radio

SELECT STATION

Station STATION NAME 1

Set station

SELECT FREQUENCY

Frequency 87.9

Set frequency

CHANGE BAND

Band FM

Change band

Voice control (MEDIA)

Effect Voice command

SOURCE SELECTION

Play Jukebox

Listen to CD

MUSIC SELECTION

Select track / album / ar-

tist / genre

Effect Voice command

PLAY SIMILAR TITLES

Play similar titles

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Voice control (TELEPHONE)

Effect Voice command

CALL CONTACTS

Call Name Surname

Home

Call Name Surname Mo-

bile

CALL NUMBERS

Call 01234

Call number

CALL LIST

Show all calls

Missed call

REDIAL Redial

CALL MAILBOX Call mailbox

SMS Read out text message

SERVICE Breakdown call

INFORMATION Information call

Voice control (NAVIGATION)*

Effect Voice command

ENTER THE ADDRESS

Enter address

Guide to City, Street,

number

SEARCH FOR SPEC.

DESTINATION

Search for car parks

Search f

or restaurants

near destination

HOME ADDRESS Home address

LAST DESTINATIONS Last destinations

NAVIGATION TO CON-

ACTS

Navigate t

o Name Sur-

name

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Start route guidance

Route information

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

oice contr

Effect Voice command

VOICE CONTROL

Pardon?

Back

Main menu

Cancel voice control

Pause voice control

177

Infotainment System

Effect Voice command

HELP

Help

What can I say?

VOICE BUTTON 

Note

Voice control is not available when parking

Voice control settings

●

Press the infotainment button



> Set-

tings > Voice control.

When cl

osing a menu, the changes will be

made aut

omatically.

Function button: function

Example commands (infotainment system) : Display voice

control examples on the inf

otainment system screen.

Example commands (instrument cluster)

: Display voice

control examples on the instrument panel.

Voice control session start tone : a signal will sound

when activating voice control. Pr

ess to deactivate

the signal.

Voice control session end tone

: a signal will sound when

deactivating voice control. Pr

ess to deactivate the

signal.

Function button: function

Input tone in voice dialogue : the input tone to confirm

an order is activated.

End tone in v

oice dialogue

: the end tone to confirm an

order is deactivated.

Available depending on equipment

178

Connectivity

Dat

a tr

ansf

Intr

oduction

This communication can allow data to be

read and/or written.

From the menu SETTINGS > Data trans-

fer for SEAT apps, ther

e is a checkbox to

activate/deactivate the function and a drop-

down menu called Operation via apps

which controls the level of interaction be-

tween the apps and the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description

3 Not available for model: Media Syst

em Colour

Fig. 184 Related video

The Full Link connection is made through a

USB cabl

The Full Link syst

em brings t

ogether t

echnol-

ogies that allow communication between the

Infotainment System and mobile devices:

●

MirrorLink

●

Android Auto™

●

Apple CarPlay™

Interfaces

To access the Full Link system, press the info-

tainment button  or press the infotainment

button    and then select the Full

Link context.

WARNING

Any applications that are not suitable or

execute incorrectly may cause damage t

the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.

●

SEAT recommends the use of the Apps

that SEAT provides for this vehicle.

●

To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must

activate the option Settings > Data

transfer for SEAT apps.

●

The interaction level of the Apps on the

system must be: Allow.

●

Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-

cations from improper use.

●

Never make modifications to the applica-

tions.

●

Consult the instruction manual for the

mobile terminal.

WARNING

The use of applications while driving can

distract your attention from the traffic. Dis-

acting the driver in any way can lead to

an accident and cause injuries.

●

Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION

●

In areas where special regulations apply

or the use of mobil

es forbidden, it must be

switched off at all times. The radiation pro-

duced by the mobile when switched on

may interfere with sensitive technical and

medical equipment, possibly resulting in

malfunction or damage to the equipment.

●

SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-

age caused to the vehicle as a result of the

use of applications that are of poor quality

or are defective, the inadequate program-

ming of the applications, the insufficient

coverage of the network, the loss of data

during transmission or the improper use of

mobiles.

Note

●

The use of Full Link technology could in-

crease the amount you pay f

or data.

●

SEAT recommends having a high battery

charge on the device when connected to

Full Link.

●

SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,

the “Date and time” should be correctly

179

Infotainment System

configured. Select Settings > Time and

date.

●

SEAT apps are designed to communicate

with the vehicle and interact with it thr

ough

the Full Link connection.

●

You can find further information on the

technical requirements, compatible devi-

ces, suitable applications and availability

at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 185

Message on Infotainment system

scr

een.

If your vehicle does not have Full Link, you

can pur

chase it as an accessory at your

SEAT deal

›

Fig. 185.

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 186 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not hav

Full Link in your v

ehicl

e you can acquir

e it

as an accessory at your Authorised Serv-

ice

Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-

Link

, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

websites to confirm whether your phone

is compatibl

e with the syst

em.

Mirr

or Link

–

Check smartphone compatibilit

www

.mirrorlink.com/phones

–

MirrorLink

1.1 or higher

–

Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de-

vice.

Android Auto

–

Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/

–

Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher

–

Install Android Auto™ app

Apple CarPlay

–

Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay

–

iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher

–

Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone:

Use the approved USB cable supplied

with the phone.

180

Connectivity

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 187

Full Link Setup

Fig. 188

Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not

necessary t

o est

ablish the connection be-

een the smar

tphone and Full Link

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-

sary to enable all of the app features

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

●

Switch on the Infotainment system

●

Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's

USB port using a USB cable

›››

page 244.

●

In the main menu for the Full Link settings,

select Activate data transfer for

SEAT apps

›››

Fig. 187.

Finally, a message will appear stating that

data transfer will commence when the device

is connected. Please note that data is trans-

ferred over connections between your vehi-

cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-

ted, the technology compatible with your de-

vice can be used.

Note

Depending on your smartphone, it may

have to be unlocked f

or the connection to

occur.

What should I do if it does not con-

nect?

Restart the mobile device.

Check the USB cable. Check whether the

USB cable is damaged. Check that neither

connection (USB/micr

o USB) is damaged or

worn.

Check that the USB ports are correctly

connected. Check that the USB port of the

vehicle and the device are not damaged

and/or deteriorated.

●

Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle).

●

Try with another compatible mobile device.

●

Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT au-

thorised service.

●

Have the mobile device r

epaired or replace

it.

Using the data connection to transfer the

smartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi-

tional char

ges. Please check the charges with

your operator.

181

Infotainment System

Tethering of portable devices that

suppor

t Mirr

orLink

, Andr

oid Aut

o™

and/or Appl

e CarPlay™ technolo-

gies

Fig. 189

Full Link menu

When you enter Full Link for the first time, the

echnol

ogies av

ail

abl

e for pairing the porta-

ble device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys-

tem will offer you the technologies available

for establishing a connection.

In the event of simultaneous connections be-

tween two devices with different operating

systems, a choice will be presented for which

one to make the connection with

›››

Fig. 189.

View of the device list

iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car-

Play™.

There are some Android devices that support

MirrorLink

and Android Auto™.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec-

ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link Settings

Function button: function

Activate data transfer for SEAT apps : allows the ex-

change of information between the vehicle and ap-

plications authorised by SEAT

Last Mode

If the t

ephone connection is t

erminat

ed on-

ly by unplugging the cabl

e, the next time the

device is connected, the session will start

without the user having to take any action

Information

Consult the mobile device manual.

Depends on each technology:

Availability in a country

Third party applications

For further information:

MirrorLink

www.mirrorlink.com

Apple CarPl

ay™:

www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Andr

oid Auto™:

www.android.com/auto

Note

●

In order to use Android Auto™ t

echnology

it is necessary to download the Android

Auto™ application, located on Google

Play™.

●

Only compatible applications can be

used, in accordance with the technology

connected.

Unless the device requires the screen to be un-

locked in order to est

ablish the connection.

182

Connectivity

MirrorLink

Fig. 190

Function buttons in the general view

of compatibl

e applications.

Fig. 191 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink

is a pr

ocol which enabl

es com-

munication betw

een a de

vice and the Info-

tainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operate

content and functions on the device from the

screen of the infotainment system.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,

only specially adapted applications can be

used

›››

in Full Link technology descrip-

tion on page 1

equir

ements

In order to use MirrorLink

, the following re-

quirements must be met:

●

The device must be compatible with Mirror-

Link

●

Depending on the device that is used, a

suitable application must be installed for the

use of MirrorLink

Initiating the connection

●

In order to initiate the connection with the

device, just connect it to the Infotainment sys-

tem via the USB cable.

●

A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-

quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages

Function button: function

Full Link

To return to the Full Link main

menu.

CLOSE APPS

Press to close the open apps.

Then press the apps to be

closed or the Close all function

button to close all the open ap-

plications.

Function button: function

1 : 1

Press to change to the mobile

device screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

›

››

Fig. 191

Press to return to the MirrorLink

main menu.

›››

Fig. 191

Press to display all the function

buttons in the lower or upper

right

-hand margin of the screen.

›››

Fig. 191  / 

OR: Right adjust-

ment button

Allows butt

ons

and

to be

hidden or shown.

MirrorLink

set

Function button: function

Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows : Allows MirrorLink

pop-up windows in applications that support it.

Apple CarPlay™*

3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-

phones. Also, iPhone™ mobil

e telephones only

support Apple CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables

communication between a device and the in-

fotainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operate

content and functions on the device from the

screen of the infotainment system.

183

Infotainment System

Requirements

In or

der t

o use Appl

e CarPl

ay™, the f

ollowing

requirements must be met:

●

Make sure that you do not have Apple

CarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set-

tings > General > Restrictions >

CarPlay > ON.

●

The mobile device must be compatible with

Apple CarPlay™.

Initiating the connection

In order to initiate the connection with the de-

vice, just connect it to the Infotainment sys-

tem via the USB cable.

●

A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-

quest that you accept the device.

●

If you start the session using Apple

CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible

to pair another device via Bluetooth

. The fol-

lowing message will appear in the main

Phone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlay

first to connect a different mo-

bile phone.

Holding down the  button on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel will start the Apple™ voice

“engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-

ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto™*

3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Android Auto™ is a prot

ocol which enables

communication between a device and the in-

fotainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operate

content and functions on the device from the

screen of the infotainment system.

Requirements

In order to use Android Auto™, the following

requirements must be met:

●

The mobile device must be compatible with

Android Auto™.

●

The Android Auto™ application shoul

d al-

ready be downloaded and installed on the

mobile device.

Initiating the connection

In order to initiate the connection with the de-

vice, just use the USB cable to connect it to

the infotainment system and follow the in-

structions on the device to be paired.

●

The first connection to Android Auto™ must

be done while the vehicle is stationary.

●

Once the first pop-up window about ac-

cepting data transfer between the car and

the device has been accepted, a message

will appear requesting that you check your

mobile device for the confirmations needed

to pair it with the Infotainment system.

●

If you are starting the session using Android

Auto™ technology, the device also automati-

cally connects to the Infotainment system via

Bluetooth

and it will not be possible to pair

another device via Bluetooth

Holding down the  button on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel will start the Android™

voice “engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-

ment system, press the  button.

Note

Some devices require a change in the USB

connection mode in order to use Android

Auto™.

●

Mak

e sure that your device is in “Media

Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is

connected to the Infotainment system.

Note

Android Auto™ requires the use of Google™

services, as well as certain basic applica-

tions of the Android syst

em.

●

Make sure that you always have Google™

services updated in order to use this tech-

nology.

184

Connectivity

Frequently asked questions about

Full Link

What connection method is used?

USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicl

No. The USB cable supplied with the device should

be used.

Is it possibl

e to navigate?

Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link

technologies if the technol

ogy is available in your

country and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Link

system navigator (via a device) instead of anoth-

er navigat

or?

Advantages: Daily updates.

Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages?

With certified applications, you can reply, not send.

What applications will be visible while driving?

Depending on the technology:

– for MirrorLink

: Apps certified by SEAT and the

CCC,

– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,

– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

Where can I find compatible Apps?

Compatible apps are listed at the foll

owing links:

www.mirrorlink.com/

www.android.com/auto/

www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Where can I download the apps?

On Google Play™ for Android Aut

o™/MirrorLink

and

on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

If Full Link stops working, where can I go to repair

it?

If the problem is in the car, you should go t

o the deal-

er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should

see your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified?

The WhatsApp situation depends on the technology.

Is MirrorLink

ailable in my country?

Yes, MirrorLink

is available in all countries and re-

gions where SEAT is located.

What are the differences between MirrorLink

Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™?

MirrorLink

is not compatible with Android Auto™ and

Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.

They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is

designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-

ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink

be installed in a previous SEAT

model?

, it is not possible.

Where can I find more information about Full

Link?

If you have any questions, please see our Innov

tion/Connectivity sections on our website:

www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re-

[email protected]

SEAT Media Control*

Intr

oduction

3 Not available for model: Media Syst

em Colour

Fig. 192 Related video

The SEAT Media Contr

app can be used

o r

emot

ely oper

ate some partial functions in

Radio, Media and Navigation mode. Informa-

tion can be exchanged between a device

and the Infotainment System.

Availability depends on the country.

185

Infotainment System

The functions are operated by means of a

abl

et or partially by a mobil

e phone

Oper

ating requirements:

●

A tablet or mobile phone.

●

The app must be available on the corre-

sponding device.

●

There must be a WLAN connection between

the Infotainment System and the device. Se-

lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN >

Share connection over WLAN > Config-

uration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti-

vated:

●

From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans-

fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to

activate/deactivate the function and a drop-

down menu called Operation via apps

which controls the level of interaction be-

tween the apps and the system . Select Menu

> Settings > Data transfer from mo-

bile devices.

You can obtain information about technical

requirements on the SEAT website or at SEAT

dealerships.

Telephone functions do not form part of this

app.

Data transmission and control

functions

Fig. 193

SEAT Media Control Main menu

With SEAT Media Contr

you can oper

the Inf

otainment System from other places in

the vehicle in Radio and Media modes and,

depending on the country and the equip-

ment, you can exchange the following infor-

mation between a device and the Infotain-

ment System:

●

Navigation destinations.

●

Traffic information.

●

Social media contents.

●

Audio transmission.

●

Vehicle data.

●

Location-specific information, for example,

POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

The Infotainment System can be used t

share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-

ces

›››

page 187, Configuration for sharing

a connection over WLAN.

The Infotainment System can also use the

WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-

vide Internet to the devices connected to the

hotspot (WLAN client)

›››

page 187, Config-

ure Internet access.

Note

●

Data transmission may incur charges.

Due to the high v

olume of data exchanged,

SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar-

iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op-

erators can provide the relevant informa-

tion.

●

The exchange of data packages may

generate additional costs, depending on

your mobile phone rate, particularly if you

are abroad (for example, roaming rates).

186

Connectivity

Configuration for sharing a con-

nection o

er WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire-

less network (WLAN)

●

Press the Infot

ainment button  and then

press the Settings menu.

●

Activate the wireless network. To do so,

press the WLAN function button.

●

Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the

device that is to be connected. If necessary,

refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man-

ual.

●

Activate the mobile device assignment on

the Infotainment System. To do so

, press the

Enable WLAN connection button and acti-

vate the checkbox.

●

Enter and confirm the network key dis-

played on the device.

The following settings can also be made on

the menu Share connection:

●

Security level: WPA2 encryption auto-

matically generates a network key.

●

Network key: Network key automatically

generated. Press the function button to man-

ually change the network key. The network

key must have a minimum of 8 characters

and a maximum of 63.

●

SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of

32 characters).

●

Do not send network name (SSID):

Activate the checkbox to deactivate the visi-

bility of the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed. To complete the connection, it may be

necessary to enter other data into the device.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used t

o cr

eat

a cipher

ed l

ocal wireless network quickly and

simply.

●

Establish the connection with the wireless

network (WLAN)

›››

page 211.

●

Press the WPS button on the WLAN router

until the warning light on the router starts

flashing. If the WLAN router does not support

WPS the network must be configured man-

ually.

●

OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the

WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router

starts flashing.

●

Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Configure Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLAN

hotspot of an e

ernal de

vice t

o est

ablish an

internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-

less network (WLAN)

●

Activate and check the wireless hotspot on

the external device. If necessary, refer to the

manufacturer’s instruction manual.

●

Press the Infotainment  button and then

press the Settings menu; OR access Media

or SEAT Md. Ctrl. and press the SETTINGS

menu.

●

Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLAN

connection and check the verification box.

●

Press the Find function button and select

the device you want from the list.

This function depends on the equipment and

the country in question.

187

Infotainment System

●

If necessary, ent

er the netw

ork k

ey of the

vice in the Inf

otainment System and con-

firm with OK.

Manual settings:

●

To manually enter the network settings of

an external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-

ed. To complete the connection, it may be

necessary to enter other data into the device.

Note

Due to the large number of devices on the

market, it is not possible to guarant

ee fault-

free operation of all functions.

188

Operating modes

adio

ed video

Fig. 194 Radio mode

RADIO main menu

Fig. 195 RADIO main menu.

Fig. 196 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button 







 and

then select the Radio context to open the RA-

DIO main menu

›››

Fig. 195.

RADIO main menu function buttons

Function button: function

Memory keys (1 to 18

memories, 3

banks (screens)

›››

page 192

)

BAND Select the band.

STATION

LIST

List of radio station that can be tuned.

MANU

AL Selecting the frequency manually.

VIEW

Selecting the information shown on the

screen. Only available in D

AB mode.

SETTINGS

Settings menu for the current frequen-

cy band.

Function button: function





Previous or next station that is stored or

on the station list. See Settings

›››

page 195

Scan

Stops the station search (visible only if

it is running

›››

page 195).

The Media System Colour model has 15 memories.

Indications and possible icons

Display: Meaning

Frequency or name of the station or

radio text. The name of the radio st

tion and the radio text will only be dis-

played if RDS is active.

RDS off

The RDS radio data service is deacti-

vated.

Traffic inf

ormation can be retrieved:

select Radio > Settings >

Traffic programme (TP).



No stations with traffic ne

ws are avail-

able.



The radio station is st

ored on a memo-

ry butt

on.

Note

●

The AM and DAB bands will be available

accor

ding to countries and/or equipment.

In this case, the BAND function button will

not be displayed.

189

Infotainment System

●

Being underground, in tunnels, in ar

eas

with tall buildings or mountains can inter-

fere with the radio reception.

●

Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to

the windows may affect reception on vehi-

cles with a window aerial.

●

Radio stations are responsible for the

content of the information they transmit.

Radio data services RDS (FM band)

Fig. 197 Standard representation: FM station

listing menu

The RDS (Radio Data System) or radio data

service off

ers additional FM inf

ormation such

as the displ

ay of the st

ation name

, automatic

station tracking (AF), texts broadcast by radio

(Radio text), traffic announcements (TP) and

the type of station (PTY).

Depending on the country and the equip-

ment in question, RDS can be deactivated in

the FM Settings menu

›››

page 195.

In general, no radio data services are avail-

able without RDS.

Station name and automatic station track-

ing

If the RDS function is available, the names of

the stations can be displayed on the RADIO

main menu and on the Station list .

FM stations temporarily transmit other con-

tent on different regional frequencies under

the same name (for example, Station 3).

In general, automatic station tracking takes

charge of switching to the frequency with the

best reception of the station that is tuned at

any given time, while driving. However, this

may cause a regional broadcast to be inter-

rupted.

Automatic frequency switching and automat-

ic station tracking can be deactivated in FM

Settings

›››

page 195.

Set a station name

In certain cases the station name is exces-

sively long. This text can be locked / unlocked

by pressing on the name of the station for

about 3 seconds until an audible warning is

heard (a point will flash to the right and left of

the station name).

Radio text

Some stations that have RDS transmit addi-

tional information in text, the so-called radio

text.

The radio text is displayed in the upper half of

the screen above the memory buttons

›››

Fig. 195

The r

adio t

xt displ

ay can be deactiv

ated in

the Settings

›››

page 195.

Order of the station list

The stations available at any given time are

displayed on the station list screen (STA-

TIONS function button). This list can be sorted

by broadcast group, genre or alphabetically

›››

Fig. 197.

Note

The RDS functionality will be limited in

some countries for infrastructure r

easons,

and traffic announcements (TP), automatic

190

Operating modes

station tracking (AF) and station type (PTY)

may not be available.

Digital radio mode (DAB, DAB + and

DMB audio)*

Fig. 198

Display of memory buttons in DAB

mode

Fig. 199 Station information display in DAB

mode.

The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB +

and DMB audio tr

ansmission st

andar

ds.

In Eur

ope

, digital radio is transmitted over

band III frequencies (from 174 MHz to 240

MHz).

The frequencies are called “channels” and

have an abbreviation (eg 12 A).

In a channel, several available DAB stations

are grouped together in an “ensemble”.

Starting the Digital radio mode

●

In the RADIO main menu, press the BAND

function button and select D

The l

ast D

AB st

ation that w

as sel

ected will be

played, if it can still be tuned in that location.

The selected DAB station is shown in the top

bar of the screen. The selected station en-

semble is shown below

›››

Fig. 198.

Additional DAB stations (Secondary Serv-

ice Components)

Some DAB stations temporarily or perma-

nently offer additional stations (for example,

for the transmission of sporting events).

DAB stations containing additional stations

are identified on the station list by the symbol

.

Select additional stations

Press the name of the main station on the

DAB main menu to select an additional sta-

tion. Or, select the additional station from the

station list.

On the DAB main menu, the name of the ad-

ditional tuned station is displayed next to the

abbreviated name of the main DAB station.

Additional stations can not be saved.

Automatic station tracking

DAB radio is not currently available every-

where. DAB radio mode displays the areas

without DAB coverage .

Depends on the market and unit in question.

191

Infotainment System

If the DAB station that is being listened to can

no l

onger be t

uned (e

.g. ther

e is no D

AB cov-

erage), the infotainment system tries to find

and tune the same station in the different

available frequency bands. If the station can

not be found again, the radio sound is muted.

Automatic station tracking can be activated

in the DAB Settings in the following modes

›››

page 196:

●

DAB - DAB station tracking: The radio tries

to tune to the same station on an alternative

DAB frequency. To allow station tracking,

both DAB stations need to broadcast the

same station identification, or to signal the

other corresponding DAB station through

DAB.

●

DAB - FM Automatic switching: The radio

tries to tune to the same station in the FM fre-

quency band. To allow station tracking, the

DAB station and the FM station need to

broadcast the same station identification, or

to signal the other corresponding FM station

through DAB. When the corresponding FM

station has been found, “FM” is displayed be-

hind the name of the station. If the corre-

sponding DAB station becomes available

again, it returns to DAB mode after a while

and the “FM” identification is concealed.

●

Switch to a similar station: This allows

service providers to indicate alternative sta-

tions with similar content. In this way, if the ra-

dio loses coverage of a DAB station and does

not find an alternative FM or DAB frequency, it

is possible to tune to a station with similar

content.

Radio text

Some stations transmit additional text infor-

mation, the so-called radio text.

Radio text is displayed in the upper half of the

screen above the memory buttons

›››

Fig. 198

or on the Station Information or Radio text

screens of the Display menu

›››

page 192.

The radio text display can be deactivated in

the DAB Settings

›››

page 196.

Slideshow

Some stations transmit additional visual infor-

mation in the form of images.

These images are displayed as a slideshow

on the Stations

or Slidesho

screens of the

Screen menu

›

page 192

The slidesho

w can be displayed in full screen

by pressing on the current image.

Screen Menu

The function buttons refer to the menu that is

displayed when the View

button is pressed

›

Fig. 198

Function button: function

Preset list : Viewing the preset buttons

›››

Fig. 198.

Function button: function

Station List : Simultaneous display of radio text and

slideshows instead of memory keys

››

›

Fig. 199.

Radio text

: The radio text is displayed instead of the

memory buttons.

Slideshow : Slideshows are shown in full screen mode.

Note

Not all DAB stations broadcast radio text

and slideshows.

Memory buttons

Fig. 200

RADIO main menu.

In the R

adio main menu, you can store sta-

tions fr

om all av

ail

abl

e frequency wave-

lengths on the numbered function buttons.

These function buttons are called “memory

buttons”.

192

Operating modes

Storing the station on the memory buttons

See: Pr

eset st

ations

›

page 194.

Change the memory bank (screens)

●

Move your finger over the screen from left

to right or vice-versa.

●

OR: Press one of the function buttons

›››

Fig. 200

Selecting the station from the memory

butt

ons

●

ess the memory butt

on corr

esponding t

the desired station.

The stored stations can only be played by

pressing the corresponding memory button

provided it can be received at your current

location.

Storing the station logo on the memory

buttons

Saved stations can be assigned logos

›››

page 193.

Save station logos

Save automatically (only in FM and DAB

mode)

When a station is saved, the station logo is

aut

omatically assigned.

If there are 2 or more logos in the database,

there is the option to choose the appropriate

one.

Saving manually

Station logos can be imported from a com-

patible data medium (for example, memory

card or memories with a USB port).

●

Press the function button Settings

and then

ation l

ogos .

●

Press the stored station button that you

ant t

o use t

o st

e a station logo.

●

Select the source in which the logo has

been memorized (for example, SD Card 1

). It is

ecommended that the l

ogos shoul

d be put in

the r

oot dir

ectory of the memory unit.

●

Select the station logo.

●

Repeat the process to assign other logos;

press the infotainment key    and then

select the Radio context to return to the Ra-

dio main menu.

●

If you want to change the logo of a memory

button where a button has already been

saved, it must first be deleted from the button

in question.

Note

Not all stations are in the database, so it is

not always possible to assign l

ogos auto-

matically.

Select, tune and save stations

Selecting stations

Select the sta-

tion using the

arrow keys

Press the function butt

on 

or 

›››

Fig. 195.

This switches between stations

available for tuning

›››

page 195.

Selecting sta-

tions from the

station list

Press the Stations

›››

Fig. 195

function button to open the station

list.

Browse the list and tune to the sta-

tion you want by pressing it.

Press the BACK 

›››

Fig. 196

function button t

o close the list. If it

is not used, the list will close auto-

matically after a while.

Not available for the Media System Colour

model.

193

Infotainment System

Manually tuning a station frequency

Display the

frequency

band

Press the Manual function button

›››

Fig. 195.

Changing the

equency step

by step

Turn the adjustment knob

OR: Pr

ess the +

or – keys on the

dial displayed on the screen.

Quickly track

the frequency

band

ess and hold one of the arro

buttons on the left of the multifunc-

tion steering wheel. R

eleasing the

button switches to the next radio

station that can be tuned.

OR: Keep your finger on the scroll

button in the frequency band and

mov

e your finger to move the but-

ton.

Hide the fre-

quency band

Briefly press the settings button.

Selecting a station using the mem-

ory button also ends the manual

selection of frequencies. If no oper-

ations are performed, the frequen-

cy band is hidden after a while.

Presetting stations

Saving the sta-

tion that is be-

ing list

ened t

ess and hol

d the desired preset

button

››

›

Fig. 195 until an audible

signal is heard.

The tuned station is stored on a

preset button.

Presetting stations

Saving a sta-

tion from the

stations list

Press the Stations

›››

Fig. 195

function button t

o open the station

list.

The stations that are already stor-

ed on a memory key are marked on

the station list with the symbol



›››

Fig. 196.

Select the desired station by

pressing and holding it down on

the scr

een. A screen opens for sav-

ing the station on the memory but-

tons.

Press the memory key where the

station will be saved.

A sound is heard and the station is

sav

ed on the memory button. Re-

peat the process to continue sav-

ing other station on the list.

Delete preset

stations

The Settings menu can be used

to delete all of the saved stations

together, or separately

›››

page 195.

Automatic playback (SCAN)

When automatic playback is active, all tune-

abl

e st

ations in the sel

ect

ed fr

equency band

are played for approximately 5 seconds

each.

Start and end automatic playback

Start automatic

playback

Press the Settings function button

and then select Scan .

End automatic

playback

Press the  function button to

stop automatic playback on the

station that is being played.

Automatic playback also ends

when a station is selected man-

ually using the memory buttons,

or when the scr

een is changed.

Traffic information (TP)

It is only possible for traffic information to be

ack

ed with the TP function if the st

ation in

question can be t

uned. St

ations with the traf-

fic information function are shown on the RA-

DIO main menu and on the station list with

the symbol TP

›››

Fig. 195 and

›››

Fig. 196.

Some stations without their own traffic infor-

mation support the TP function by broad-

casting traffic announcement from other sta-

tions (EON).

Activating and deactivating the TP func-

tion

●

In the Settings (FM, AM, DAB) menu,

activate  or deactivate  the

Traffic programme (TP)

function button by

essing it

›

page 195

194

Operating modes

Active TP function and station selection

affic announcements ar

e pl

ayed in Audio

mode

If a station without the TP function in FM mode

is selected, the radio tries to find stations with

this function in the background. If none are

found, it will be displayed half way up the left

hand side of the screen



In AM mode or in Media mode, a traffic sta-

tion is automatically tuned in the background

as long as there is one available. Depending

on the situation this operation may take some

time.

Incoming traffic announcement

In Audio mode, traffic announcements are

played automatically when they are re-

ceived.

While the traffic announcement is playing, a

pop-up window is displayed and the radio

switches, if necessary, to the traffic informa-

tion station.

Media mode is interrupted and the volume is

set as adjusted

›››

page 174.

The volume of the traffic announcement can

be changed with the volume control . The

modified volume remains as set for subse-

quent warnings.

●

Press the Cancel

function button to end the

curr

ent tr

el w

arning. The TP function r

mains active.

●

OR: Press the Deactivate

function button to

end the curr

ent tr

affic announcement and

deactiv

e the

TP function permanently. The

function can be reactivated in the Settings

menu.

Settings (FM, AM, DAB)

FM settings

Sel

ect the

equency band by pr

essing

the infotainment key  and then selecting

the Radio context.

OR: Press the BAND

function button and se-

ect the

equency band.

ess the SETTINGS

function button to open

the FM settings menu.

Function button: function

Sound : Sound settings

›››

page 17

Scan

: Automatic playback (SCAN function). When

automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable

stations in the selected frequency band are played

for approximately 5 seconds each

›››

page 194.

Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons 

and . The setting applies to all frequency bands

(FM, AM and DAB).

Function button: function

Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-

tween all of the saved stations in the select

frequency band.

Station List

: The arrow keys are used to switch

between all of the tuneable stations in the selec-

ted frequency band.

Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of

traffic information stations) is active

›

››

page 194.

Delete presets

: To erase all or some of the preset sta-

tions.

Station logos : To assign or delete manually the sta-

tion logos saved in the memory keys

››

›

page 193.

Radio text

: The radio text is active

›››

page 190, Ra-

dio t

ext.

Advanced settings

: Radio data services (RDS) set-

tings.

Autost

ore station logos

: The stations saved on the

memory buttons are aut

omatically assigned ra-

dio station logos if they are available in the info-

tainment system. Also see

›››

page 193.

Station logo region

: This allows the vehicle

's re-

gion (country) to be selected. This optimizes the

automatic assignment of station logos. The op-

tion also allows the system to select the region

automatically.

Automatic frequency control (AF)

: Automatic sta-

tion tracking is active

. When there is no check in

check box , the function button RDS regional

will be inactive (grey).

195

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Radio data system (RDS)

: The Radio Data System

(RDS) is deactivat

›››

page 190. If there is no

check in check box , the traffic information

station (TP), radio text, station name and pro-

gram type functions will not be available.

RDS regional

: Set the RDS automatic station

tracking

›››

page 190.

Fixed : Only alternative frequencies of the

set station with an identical region program

e set.

Automatic

: It always changes to the frequen-

cy of the set station that has the best signal

at the time, even if a r

egional broadcast that

is in progress is interrupted.

This depends on the country and unit in question.

AM settings

Sel

ect the

equency band by pr

essing

the infotainment key  and then select the

Radio context.

OR: Press the BAND

function button and se-

ect the

equency band.

ess the SETTINGS

function button to open

the AM settings menu.

Function button: function

Sound : Sound settings

›››

page 17

Function button: function

Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When

automatic playback is active, each of the t

uneable

stations in the selected frequency band are played

for approximately 5 seconds each

›››

page 194.

Seek mode

: To set the settings for the arrow buttons 

and . The setting applies to all frequency bands

(FM, AM and DAB).

Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-

tween all of the saved stations in the select

frequency band.

Station List

: The arrow keys are used to switch

between all of the tuneable stations in the sel

ec-

ted frequency band.

Traffic programme (TP)

: The TP function (tracking of

traffic information stations) is active

›

››

page 194.

Delete presets

: To erase all or some of the preset sta-

tions.

Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on

memory buttons

›››

page 193

DAB settings

Sel

ect the

equency band by pressing

the infotainment key  and then select the

Radio context.

OR: Press the BAND

function button and se-

ect the

equency band.

Press the SETTINGS

function button to open

the DAB settings menu.

Function button: function

Sound : Sound settings

›››

page 17

Scan

: Automatic playback (SCAN function). When

automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable

stations in the selected frequency band are played

for approximately 5 seconds each

›››

page 194.

Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons 

and . The setting applies to all frequency bands

(FM, AM and DAB).

Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-

tween all of the saved stations in the select

frequency band.

Station List

: The arrow keys are used to switch

between all of the tuneable stations in the sel

ec-

ted frequency band.

Traffic programme (TP)

: The TP function (tracking of

traffic information stations) is active

›

››

page 194.

Delete presets

: To erase all or some of the preset sta-

tions.

Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on

memory buttons

›››

page 193

Radio text

: The radio text is active

›››

page 190, Ra-

dio t

ext.

Advanced settings

: DAB services settings.

Autostore station logos

: Station logos are as-

signed automatically when the r

adio stations are

stored on the memory buttons

›››

page 193.

DAB traffic announcements

: DAB traffic announce-

ments are played in the same way as TP traffic

announcements in any equipment mode

196

Operating modes

Function button: function

Other DAB announcements : DAB announcements

(news, sports information, weather, w

arnings,

etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode is ac-

tive.

DAB - DAB station tracking

: Automatic station track-

ing within the DAB frequency range is active.

Automatic DAB - FM switching : Switching to the FM

frequency band is permitted for automatic st

tion tracking.

Switch to a similar station

: This allows service pro-

viders to indicate alternative st

ations with similar

content.

This depends on the country and unit in question.

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Media

Intr

oduction

Fig. 201 Related video

Audio or image sources containing files in dif-

ent media ar

e kno

wn as “

media sources”.

These audio files can be played through the

corresponding players or the infotainment

system's audio inputs.

Only supported files are displayed and

played. Other files are ignored.

Consider the legislation on the intellectual

property of audio and video files.

Note

●

MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technolo-

gy and patents are licensed by Fr

aunhofer

IIS.

●

This product is protected by certain Mi-

crosoft Corporation copyright and proper-

ty rights. The use or commercialization of

technology of this type outside the config-

uration of this product, without a licence

from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft

branch is prohibited.

●

The infotainment system only plays com-

patible undamaged audio files; other files

are ignored.

●

Check the list of compatible devices on

the SEAT website.

Requirements for data media and files

The factory-fitted CD and DVD players are

ass 1 accor

ding t

o DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6 / VDE

0837.

Only st

andar

d 12 cm CD/DVDs and 32 mm x

24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm memory cards can

be inserted in the infotainment system.

Any playable file formats on the list will here-

inafter be known as “audio files”. A CD con-

taining these types of audio files is called an

“audio data CD”.

197

Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Navi System Plus

Data media

Playback requirements

Audio files Video files

 Optical discs:

– Audio CD (up t

o 80 min).

– Standard video DVD and compatible audio DVD.

– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700

MB (megabyte) with the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF

1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.

– DVD +/- R / RW up to a maximum of 4.7 GB and double layer

DVD up to max. 8.5 GB in the Joliet file system (single session

only); UDF.

 Memory cards:

– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or

VFAT (max 2 GB).

– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and

NTFS file systems.

 USB data media:

– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications.

– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system.

– Different generations of iPods™

, iPads™

and iPhones™

– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “Ready-

ForVista”..

 Jukebox (internal SSD memory).

– Digital Audio Specification.

– MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer

rat

es from 32 to 320 kbit/s or variable transfer

rate.

– WAV files (.wav).

– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without

copy protection and transfer rates of up to

384kbit/s.

– AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy

protection.

– OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of

up to 256kbit/s.

– FLAC files (.flac).

– Matroska container files (.mka).

v Maximum resolution 720 x 576 pixel and 25-30fps

(frames per second).

– MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 formats

(.mpg, .mpeg, .m2ts, .avi and .mkv) with a maximum

resolution of 352x288 pix

els.

– ISO MPEG-4 format (.mp4, .m4v, .avi, .mov, .3gp

and .mkv).

– MPEG-4 ASP DivX format 4, 5 and 6 (.avi, .divx

and .mkv).

– Xvid MPEG-4 format (.avi and .mkv).

– MPEG-4 H.264 format:

(.mp4, .m4v, .mov, .3gp, .avi, .m2ts, .mkv, .flv, .f4v

and .webm).

– Windows Media Video 9 format

(.wmv, .asf, .mp4, .m4v, .mov, .3gp and .avi).

– MJPEG format (.avi, .mov, .mp4 and .m4v).

– Theora format (.ogv).

– Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.

– Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.

– Fil

e names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.

– On DVD, a maximum of 1000 files per medium and directory.

– On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per directory.

– On the Jukebox (SSD), a maximum of 3000 files.

 Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions

›››

page 208.

 Playing audio files via Bluetooth

®b)

. – The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth

profile

›››

page 208.

 Playing audio files over WLAN. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions

›››

page 211

iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth

is a r

egist

ed tr

ademark of Bluet

ooth

SIG, Inc.

198

Operating modes

Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi System

Data media Requirements for playing audio files



Optical discs:

– Audio CD (up to 80 min).

– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) with

the ISO 9660 L

evel 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.



Memory cards:

– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB).

– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems.



USB data media:

– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications.

– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system.

– Different generations of iPods™

, iPads™

and iPhones™

– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “ReadyForVista”..

– Digital Audio Specification.

– MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer rat

es from 32 to 320 kbit/s or varia-

ble transfer rate.

– WAV files (.wav).

– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer rates

of up to 384kbit/s.

– AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy protection.

– OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s.

– FLAC files (.flac).

– Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.

– Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.

– Fil

e names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.

– On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per di-

rectory.



ayback of audio fil

es thr

ough the AUX-IN jack

– The e

xternal audio source must meet a series of playback conditions

›››

page 208.



aying audio files via Bluetooth

®b)

– The ext

ernal media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth

profile

›››

page 208.



Play audio files through WLAN.

– The ext

ernal audio source must meet a series of playback conditions

›››

page 21

iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth

is a r

egist

ed tr

ademark of Bluet

ooth

SIG, Inc.

199

Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Media System Colour

Media sources Playback requirements



SD and MMC memory cards according to file syst

em FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, XFAT or

VFAT (max 2GB), as well as SDHC and SDXC memory cards.

– MP3 files (.mp3) with a rate of 8 to 320 kbit/s or variable rate.

– WMA (.wma) files up to 9.2 mono / ster

eo without copy protection.

– Playlists in PLS, M3U, WPL and ASX formats.

– Playlists not exceeding 1000 items or 20 kB.

– File names and addresses no longer than 256 characters.

– On memory cards: a maximum of 1000 folders and a maximum of 2048 files.



USB data support with specification 2.0 according to fil

e system FAT12, FAT16,

FAT32 or VFAT (max 2GB).



aying audio fil

es via Bluet

ooth

®a)

– The e

ernal media player must support the Bluetooth A2DP.

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of Bluet

ooth

SIG, Inc.

Read and bear in mind the instruction manual

for the external data st

orage device.

Limitations and indications

Dirt, high temperatures and mechanical

damage can cause data media to fail. Con-

sider the indications provided by the manu-

facturer of the data media.

Quality differences between data media pro-

duced by different manufacturers can cause

playback interference.

Consider copyright legislation!

The configuration of data media or of the

equipment or programs used for recording

may cause some tracks or data media to be

unreadable. On the Internet, for example, can

be found information about the best way to

record audio files or data media (compres-

sion rate, ID3 tag, etc.).

The reading speed can vary considerably

depending on the size, the usage status

(copying and deleting processes), the struc-

ture of the folders and the type of files of the

data media used.

Playlists only establish a certain playback

order. The files are not saved in them. Play-

lists cannot be played if the files on the data

media are not saved to the path to which the

playlist refers.

A cover can only be displayed when the

name starts with “Cover”, “Folder” or “Al-

bum”.

Note

●

Do not use memory card adaptors, USB

extension cor

ds or USB hubs!

●

SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-

ration or loss of files on data storage devi-

ces.

Playback order of files and folders

Fig. 202

Example of the structure of an audio

dat

a CD

200

Operating modes

The audio files  st

ed on dat

a media ar

oft

en arranged by file folders  and playlists

 to establish a certain playback order.

Depending on their name on the data media,

tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu-

merically and alphabetically.

The illustration shows an example of a con-

ventional audio data CD, containing tracks

, folders  and subfolders

›››

Fig. 202.

In this case the tracks will be played as fol-

lows

Tracks

and

in the root directory

oot) of the CD

acks

and

in the first F1 f

der of

the CD r

oot dir

ect

ory

Track

in the first subf

der

F1.

1 of f

old-

er F1.

Track

in the first subf

der

F1.

1 of

subfolder F1.1

Track

in the second subf

der F1.

2 of

der F1

Track

and

in the second f

der F2

Note

●

The playback sequence can be modified

by selecting the different pl

ayback modes

›››

page 202.

●

Playlists do not play automatically, they

have to be selected directly from the track

selection menu

›››

page 204.

MEDIA main menu

Fig. 203

MEDIA main menu.

Using the Media main menu, diff

ent media

sour

ces can be sel

ect

ed and played.

●

Press the infotainment button    and

then select the Media context to open the

MEDIA main menu

›››

Fig. 203.

It will continue playing the last media source

selected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicated

on the dropdown list when pressing the

SOURCE

function button

›

Fig. 203

If ther

e is no available media source, the Me-

dia main menu is displayed.

The Mix/repeat including subfolders function must

be active in the Media settings menu

›››

page 214.

201

Infotainment System

MEDIA main menu function buttons

Function button: function

SOURCE 

MEDIA

The media source that is being

played. Press to select another me-

dia sour

ce.

JUKEBOX

: Internal hard drive

(SSD)

›››

page 209.

CD/DVD

: Internal CD and DVD

drive

››

›

page 206.

SD CARD 1

, SD CARD 2 *: SD memo-

ry card

›››

page 206

USB 1

, USB 2 *: External data stor-

age device connected to the USB

port 

›››

page 207.

AUX

: External audio source con-

nected to the AUX-IN multimedia

socket

››

›

page 208.

BT AUDIO

: Bluetooth

audio

›››

page 208.

WLAN *

: External audio source

connected by WLAN

›››

page 211

SELECTION

Depending on the level, track list,

folders or source.





Changes track in Media mode or

fast forward/rewind.



Playback stops. The 

function

button changes to  .

Function button: function



Playback is resumed. The  func-

tion button changes to  .





Play similar tracks.

Creates a virtual playlist that in-

cludes tr

acks with a similar rhythm

to the one being played if available

using Gracenote

SETTINGS

Opens the menu Media Set-

tings.



REPEAT

Repeats all the tracks that are on

the same memory level as the track

being pl

ayed at that moment. If in

the Media Settings menu the

Mix/Repeat including subfolders

option

is enabl

ed, it al

so includes the sub-

ders.



REPEAT

epeat the current track.

MIX



Random playback of tracks that are

at the same memory level as the

current tr

ack. If in the Media Set-

tings menu the

Mix/Repeat including subfolders

option

is enabled, it also includes the sub-

folders.

Depends on the equipment in question

Only available for the Navi System Plus model.

Not available for the Media System Colour model.

Indications and symbols of the MEDIA

main menu

Display: Meaning

Information about the artist name, al-

bum name and song title.

Audio CD: track information if av

aila-

ble via Gracenote

®a)

. If no data is

ailable, it only displays Track and

the corresponding order number.

Album cover.

The system prioritizes the display as

foll

ows:

1st Cover embedded in the file(s).

2nd Image in the file folder.

3rd Image provided by the Grace-

note

database

4th Icon of the connected device.

If playing a video file, by pressing the

icon (cover) it can be played on full

screen.

The playing time so far and time re-

maining in minutes and seconds.

RDS off

The RDS radio data service is deacti-

vat

ed. The RDS can be activated in

the

FM settings menu.

The TP function is active and can be

tuned in.



There is no traffic news st

ation availa-

ble.

202

Operating modes

Display: Meaning



DAB not available.

Gracenote

is a database available on the Inf

otain-

ment system hard drive that contains information on

the tracks of different artists and albums. In order for

the user to benefit from the functions offered by

Gracenote

, the tracks must contain the artist and/or

album data (only available for the model: Navi Sys-

tem Plus.

Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note

●

When the media source is inserted, play-

ing will not st

art automatically; it is neces-

sary for the user to select the source. Nor

will the media source change when it is

ejected.

●

In order to see the different covers inside

of the same album/folder, make sure that

the tracks contain different information

about the Artist or Album in its metadata. If

not, you will see the same cover for all of

tracks contained in the same album/folder.

Switching the Media source

Fig. 204

MEDIA mode: switching media

sour

●

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment

syst

em.

●

om the

Media

main menu, pr

ess the

SOURCE

function button

›

Fig. 204

and se-

ect the desired media source.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources not

selected are shown as deactivated (in grey).

When a Media source that has already been

played is selected again, playback is re-

sumed from the point at which it was stop-

ped.

Note

The Media source can be changed in the

Track list view

: select Media > View.

Changing track in the MEDIA main

Fig. 205

MEDIA main menu.

The tracks of the Media source that is being

list

ened t

o can be changed successiv

ely us-

ing the arr

w buttons.

The arrow buttons cannot be used to exit a

playlist or start the playback of a playlist.

Both actions have to be performed manually

from the track selection menu

›››

page 204.

Control through the MEDIA main menu

Action Function

Briefly press the func-

tion button  once.

At the start of the current

track. If the track has

been played f

or less than

3 seconds, it returns to

the start of the previous

track.

203

Infotainment System

Action Function

Press the function but-

ton  twice in a row.

If the track has been

played for more than 3

seconds, it ret

urns to the

start of the previous track.

If the first track is being

played, pressing the but-

ton goes back to the last

track on the data media

that is being played.

Briefly press the func-

tion button 

once.

To the next track. It

changes the last track to

the first track on the data

media that is being

played.

Press and hold function

button  .

Rewind.

Press and hold function

button  .

Fast forward.

Slide your finger hori-

zontally ov

er the screen.

Change to the previ-

ous/next track, with the

same playback times as

changing tracks with the

keys 

or  .

Selecting an album by cover

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 206

Selection by cover.

Clicking on the current cover

›

Fig. 205

will display all of the album covers available

in the activ

e Media sour

›

Fig. 206.

It is possible to browse through all the albums

by sliding the covers right or left or using the

bottom horizontal scroll bar.

The cover selection view closes after approx-

imately 5 seconds of inactivity and the Media

main menu is displayed again.

Selecting a track from a track list

Fig. 207

Media Mode: list of folders of a Media

sour

Fig. 208 Media Mode: list of tracks of a Media

sour

Open a list of tracks

●

Press the SELEC

function button on the

MEDIA main menu

›

Fig. 205

o open the

track list. The track that is playing is highligh-

ted

›››

Fig. 208.

204

Operating modes

●

Sear

ch the tr

ack list and pr

ess the tr

ack

you w

ant.

If there is track information available, the

track (on audio CDs) or the file name (MP3) is

displayed instead of Track + num.

Overview of the function buttons in the

track list

Function button: function

Open the Sources menu. Select anoth-

er Media source by pressing.

Indicates the media source being ex-

plored. If pressed, it goes to the root of

the device shown on the icon.

JUKEBOX

: Internal hard disk of the info-

tainment syst

em (SSD)

›››

page 209.

CD/DVD

: Internal CD and DVD drive

››

›

page 206.

SD CARD 1

, SD CARD 2 *: SD memory

card

›››

page 206

USB 1

, USB 2 *: External data storage de-

vice connected to the USB port 

››

›

page 207.

BT AUDIO

: External Media Player con-

nected via Bluetooth

›››

page 208.

AUX

: Audio source connected to the

AUX-IN socket

›››

page 208

WLAN

: External audio source connec-

ted by WLAN

›››

page 211.

Function button: function

Press the function button to open the top

folder of the Media source.



art playback of the first track.



Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on the

same memory l

evel as the track being

ayed at that moment. If in the Media

Settings menu the

Mix/Repeat including subfolders

option is

enabled, it also includes the subfolders

›

››

page 214.



Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are on the

same memory level as the track being

ayed at that moment. If in the Media

Settings menu the

Mix/Repeat including subfolders

option is

enabled, it also includes the subfolders

›

››

page 214.

To close the tracks list.

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.

Not available for the Media System Colour model.

Note

Tracks, folders and playlists can also be

selected by turning the setting button, and

they can be pl

ayed or opened by pressing

it.

Data bank view

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 209

Media Mode: data bank view

On the track list, click the Sho

w dat

abase vie

option. The content of the current Media

sour

ce will be list

ed by Pl

aylists

, Artists ,

Albums , Genr

, T

racks

and Videos

›››

Fig. 207.

When sel

ecting one of the f

ders Artists

Albums or T

itles

, a search button is displayed

in the upper right corner (magnifying gl

ass)

that all

ws sear

ching within the sel

ected cat-

egory

›››

page 171, Input window with on-

screen keypad.

To return to the folder view, press the

Show folder view

option on the SELEC

TION

menu.

205

Infotainment System

Insert or remove a CD or DVD

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 210

Slots for data storage devices in the

e compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating the

unit whil

e the v

ehicl

e is in motion. Insert or

change the dat

a st

orage device before mov-

ing off!

The CD and DVD drives can play audio CDs

and DVDs and audio data CDs and DVDs.

Insert a CD or DVD

●

Insert a CD or DVD into the slot

›››

Fig. 210

with the printed side facing up-

ds, until the equipment inserts it aut

omati-

cally.

Ejecting a CD or D

●

ess button 

●

The CD or DVD in the drive will be ejected

and must be r

emo

ed within appr

ximately

10 seconds.

If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, it

is automatically retracted for security rea-

sons without activating the CD mode.

Unreadable or defective CD or DVD

If the data on an inserted CD or DVD cannot

be read or a defective CD or DVD is inserted,

the corresponding warning appears on

screen.

Depending on the equipment, unreadable

CDs or DVDs are automatically ejected 3

times and reinserted to start another three

read attempts before this indication is dis-

played.

Note

●

Uneven road surfaces and str

ong vibra-

tions can cause playback to jump.

●

When the temperature inside the equip-

ment is too high, loading and playback of

CDs and DVDs is disabled.

●

If after inserting a number of different or

VDs and receiving the CD or DVD drive

error, every time, contact a specialised

workshop.

Inserting or ejecting a memory

card

Depending on the features and the country,

the vehicle may have one or two sl

ots for SD

cards.

Inserting a memory card

Insert the compatible memory card, with the

cut corner first and the contacts facing down,

into slot

›››

Fig. 210

›

Fig. 1

, until it

clicks int

o pl

ace

emo

ving a memory card

The inserted memory cards must be pre-

pared for removal.

●

From the main Media menu, press the

SETTINGS

button to open the Media Set-

tings menu or pr

ess the inf

ainment butt



   and then press Settings, to open

the System settings menu.

The DVD drive is only available for the Navi

System Plus model.

206

Operating modes

●

ess the R

emo

e saf

ely

function button. A

opdo

wn menu appears with the f

oll

wing

options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and

USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function

button disables it.

●

Press the inserted memory card. The mem-

ory card “jumps” to the eject position.

●

Remove the memory card.

External data storage device con-

nected to the USB port 

Depending on the features and the country,

the v

ehicl

e may hav

e one or tw

o USB con-

nections

›

››

page 244.

Where this manual refers to external data

storage devices, this means USB mass stor-

age devices containing supported audio files,

such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed and

played. Other files are ignored.

Further operation of the external data medi-

um (changing track, selecting tracks and

playback modes) is described in the appro-

priate chapters of this manual

›››

page 197.

Instructions and restrictions

Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other

media players depends on the unit.

The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt-

age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks larger than 32 GB must be

reformatted for the FAT32 file system in some

circumstances. You will find the necessary

software and information on the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions and

limitations regarding requirements for media

sources.

iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™

Depending on the country and equipment,

iPods™, iPads™ or iPhones™ can be connec-

ted via the device's own USB cable to the ve-

hicle’s USB port  and used as audio sour-

ces.

After connecting an iPod™, iPad™ or iPhone™,

the list views specific to the iPod™ are dis-

played at the top selection level ( Play-

lists,  Artists,  Albums,  Tracks,

 Podcasts, etc.).

Possible error messages after connecting

external data media

Error message

Cause and actions to

take

Source is not

supported.

It is not possible to pl

ay the

xternal data media or es-

tablish communication with

the adapt

er cable that is

used.

Check that the external data

media is connected and op-

erates correctly.

If possibl

e, update the exter-

nal data media software.

Device not re-

sponding.

Communication interrupted.

Check that the external data

media is connect

ed and op-

erates correctly.

Due t

o the large number of different data storage de-

vices and various iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ genera-

tions available, it is not possible to guarantee fault-

free operation of all functions described here.

Disconnecting

Dat

a media

epar

ed for disconnection.

●

From the main Media menu, press the SET-

TINGS button to open the Media Settings

menu or press the infotainment button







and then press Settings, to open

the

System settings

menu.

207

Infotainment System

●

ess the R

emo

e saf

ely

function button. A

opdo

wn menu appears with the f

oll

wing

options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and

USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function

button disables it.

●

Now the data storage device can be dis-

connected.

Note

●

Do not connect an external media player

at the same time to pl

ay music via Blue-

tooth

and via the USB port  with the In-

fotainment system, as this could cause

playback limitations.

●

If the external player is an Apple™ device,

it cannot be simultaneously connected by

USB and by Bluetooth

●

If a connected source is not recognized,

disconnect and reconnect it. If the data

cannot be played, the corresponding indi-

cation will be displayed.

External audio source connected to

the AUX-IN multimedia sock

et 

Depending on the equipment and country

ther

e may be an AUX-IN multimedia sock

›

page 244.

The connected external audio source cannot

be operated with the infotainment system's

controls.

Connecting an external audio source to

the AUX-IN multimedia socket

●

Connect the external audio source to the

AUX-IN multimedia socket.

●

Start playback on the external audio

source.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

function button and select AUX .

The pl

ayback v

olume

of the connect

ed e

ternal audio source should be adjusted to the

volume of the other audio sources

›››

page 174.

Information on operating an external au-

dio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-

media socket

Operation Effect

Selection of another au-

dio source from the Info-

tainment syst

em.

The external audio

source continues to run in

the background.

Stopping playback on

the external audio

source.

The inf

otainment system

remains in the AUX menu.

Remove the connector

from the AUX-IN multi-

media jack.

The infotainment syst

remains in the AUX menu.

Note

●

Please read and observe the manufac-

urer's instruction manual for the external

audio source.

●

Interference noise may be heard if the ex-

ternal audio source is powered from the 12-

volt power socket of the vehicle.

Connect an external audio source

via Bluetooth

In the Bluetooth

Audio mode

, audio fil

es that

e pl

aying on a de

vice connected by Blue-

tooth can be listened to on the infotainment

system.

Conditions

●

The Bluetooth

audio source must support

the A2DP Bluetooth

profile.

●

In the Bluetooth® Settings menu the

Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP)

function must be

on. Sel

ect

Telephone > Settings >

Bluetooth

ting Bluet

ooth

audio transfer

●

Activate Bluetooth

visibility on the external

Bluetooth

audio source.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

function button and select B

T audio

208

Operating modes

●

ess Sear

ch f

or ne

w de

vice

in order to con-

nect an e

ernal Bluet

ooth

audio sour

ce f

the first time

›››

page 234.

●

OR: Select a Bluetooth

external audio

source from the list.

●

Please refer to the instructions on the

screen of the Infotainment system and on the

Bluetooth

audio source regarding the rest of

the procedure.

You may need to manually start playback on

the Bluetooth

source.

When the Bluetooth

device is disconnected,

the infotainment system remains in Blue-

tooth

audio mode.

Controlling playback

The extent to which the Bluetooth

audio sys-

tem can be operated through the infotain-

ment system depends on the connected

Bluetooth

device.

Note

●

Due to the large number of possible Blue-

ooth

audio sources, it is not possible to

guarantee fault-free operation of all de-

scribed functions.

●

Always switch off the warning and serv-

ice tones on a connected Bluetooth

audio

source, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele-

phone, to prevent possible interference

noise and malfunctions.

●

To play music, do not link the external

media player simultaneously to Bluetooth

and the USB int

erface of the infotainment

system, as this can cause limitations during

playback.

●

The system response time may vary, de-

pending on the connected external play-

back device.

●

If the external player is an Apple™ device,

it cannot be simultaneously connected by

USB and by Bluetooth

Jukebox (SSD)

3 Only available for the model: Navi Syst

em Plus

Fig. 211

Manage Jukebox

The “jukebox” is located on the hard drive of

the Inf

ainment syst

em (SSD

Compr

essed audio fil

es (MP3 and WMA) and

some video files (Podcasts, AVIs, etc.) can be

imported from different data storage devices

to the jukebox and this used to play them.

The files will only be copied when the engine

is running. Copying copy-protected CDs and

DVDs is prohibited

Importing files

●

In Media mode, press the SETTINGS

func-

tion butt

on and then sel

ect Manage Juk

ebo

x .

●

Press the  IMPOR

function button.

●

Select the desired source from the Select

source menu.

The dat

a st

age de

vice is pr

epared. This op-

eration may take a few seconds.

●

Activate the checkboxes to the right of the

files or folders to be imported.

●

If Select all

is activated, all files and folders

on the dat

a st

age de

vice will be import

ed.

●

Press the  IMPORT

function button.

Depending on the sel

ection, all fil

es and f

ers will be import

ed with the indicated name

to the Jukebox.

Solid-State-Drive (SSD).

209

Infotainment System

If no track information is available, the audio

fil

es will be pl

aced in the f

oll

wing folders:

Audio data CD

■

Album

■

Unknown albums

■

Título.mp3

■

Artists

■

Unknown artists

■

Unknown albums

■

Título.mp3

Functions and progress display during the

copying operation

While copying, an animation is displayed

along with the progress percentage on the

import screen.

Audio data CD: It is not possible to copy and

play files at the same time.

●

Press the Cancel

function button to end the

import of the whol

e tr

ack that is curr

ently be-

ing import

ed.

●

o obtain information on the status of the

import, press the Information

function button.

●

Press the BACK  function button to close

the import scr

een with the pr

ogr

ess inf

orma-

tion.

●

When the fil

e import ends, a message will

appear.

Deleting files

●

In Media mode, press the SETTINGS

func-

tion butt

on and then sel

ect Manage Juk

ebo

x .

●

Press the DELETE  function button.

●

Activate the checkboxes to the right of the

fil

es or f

ders t

o be del

eted.

●

If Select all

is activated, all the files and

ders on the dat

a st

age device will be de-

leted.

●

Press the DELETE 

function button. The

fil

es and f

ders will be del

ed according to

the selection made.

●

When the files have been deleted, a mes-

sage will appear.

●

Press the BACK 

function button to close

the menu.

Opening st

ed audio and video fil

●

Change t

Jukebox (SSD) content.

When storing the tracks, they are stored un-

der different categories and lists according to

the information available.

The tracks saved can be checked and

opened from these lists according to different

categories.

Jukebox

●

Playlist

●

Artist

●

Album

●

Music genre

●

Title

●

Video

●

Non-playable files (an unsupported file has

been imported).

Note

●

If the Infotainment system cancels a

copying oper

ation, check the storage

space on the internal hard drive and check

the data storage device.

●

Due to copyright laws, before any

change in ownership of the Infotainment

system, all files stored on the jukebox must

be deleted.

●

There are several possible reasons why

files may be shown as inactive (grey): files

that cannot be imported (e.g. images), files

that are already stored in the Jukebox or

The name and extension of the file are exam-

ples.

210

Operating modes

files that take up more space than availa-

ble in the internal memory.

Connect an external audio source

via WLAN*

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

WLAN allows wirel

ess connection between an

external audio source and the Infotainment

system.

To use this connection, the device being con-

nected must have an app compatible with

the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi-

cation protocol.

Conditions

●

Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed

on the device.

●

Having the Enable WLAN connection op-

tion active

, which can be found in the wireless

connection configuration.

●

Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain-

ment system using a password generated by

the system. Pairing must be done from the

device to be connected.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer

●

Start the UPnP app or the app for the play-

back of the WLAN audio source.

●

In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE

function button and select WLAN .

●

Please refer to the instructions on the

scr

een of the Inf

ainment syst

em and on the

WLAN audio sour

ce regarding the rest of the

procedure.

Controlling playback

The extent to which the WLAN audio can be

controlled via the Infotainment system de-

pends on the connected WLAN device and

the app that is used.

Note

●

The Infotainment system does not pro-

vide an int

ernet connection, it only estab-

lishes a wireless connection between the

mobile device and said system.

●

Via the WLAN, only the connection be-

tween the device and the Infotainment sys-

tem can be guaranteed, its operation de-

pends on the application itself.

WLAN settings

3 Not available for model: Media Syst

em Colour

To access the WLAN settings the ignition must

be switched on.

●

Select the Media main menu by pressing

the infotainment key 

and then select the

Media context.

●

Press the SETTINGS

function button to open

the Media settings menu.

●

Press the WLAN function button, then the

Share connection over WLAN butt

on will

appear al

ong with inf

ormation about the use

of WLAN.

●

ess the function butt

on Share connec-

tion over WLAN, then you can Enable

WLAN connection and access the WLAN

network Configuration.

●

Press the Configuration function button

to configure the WLAN network.

Function button: function

Enable WLAN connection : To turn on/off the WLAN net-

work.

Security le

vel:

WPA2 encryption automatically

generates an 8 character network key.

Network key : Network key automatically gener-

ated. Press the function button to manually

change the netw

ork key. The network key must

have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum

of 63.

SSID

: Name of the WLAN network of the infotain-

ment system.

Do not send network name (SSID) : Activate the

checkbox to deactivate the visibilit

y of the WLAN

network.

To save the changes made to the configura-

tion of the mobil

e access point, pr

ess the

SAVE button.

211

Infotainment System

Video DVD mode

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 212

DVD main menu.

Fig. 213

DVD mode control menu.

Regional code of video DVD

Quit

e oft

en, the pl

ayback of D

VD video is

limit

ed to certain regions (for example, to the

US and Canada) by so-called region “co-

des”. These DVDs can only be played on

units that are coded for the same region.

The unit's DVD drive is configured to read the

regional code for the region in which the vehi-

cle was originally sold.

Starting the DVD mode

●

Insert a compatible DVD in the DVD drive.

The reading of DVD data may take a few sec-

onds.

The DVD's “intro” (short initial sequence) is

played. Next, the different DVD menus are

displayed.

Controlling a DVD menu

●

Briefly touch the screen to activate the

function buttons in the DVD mode main menu

›››

Fig. 212.

Function button: function

SOURCE Display and selection of the source.

DVD MENU

To display the control menu and re-

turn to the main DVD screen

›

››

Fig. 213.

Chapter display.

Displays play time duration and re-

maining play time.

Function button: function

 : Move the control menu window.

 : Minimise the control menu win-

dow.

 : Maximise the control menu win-

dow.

 : Close the control menu.

Use the arrow buttons to browse the

VD menu. Confirm the sel

ection by

essing OK

E Press to open the DVD main menu.





To move to the next or previous

chapter.



Playback stops. The  function but-

ton changes to  .



Playback is resumed. The  func-

tion button changes to  .

SETTINGS

This menu contains the Video (DVD)

settings.

Note

●

The visual appearance of the DVD film

menus and the menu options which it offers

are the r

esponsibility of the DVD manufac-

turer.

●

The difference in behaviour of some films

when using the same mode is the responsi-

bility of the DVD manufacturer.

212

Operating modes

●

You may not be able to play video D

VDs

which you have burned yourself.

●

The Infotainment system screen only dis-

plays the image when the vehicle is stop-

ped. Whilst in motion, the screen discon-

nects (the image), but the audio remains

active.

Video settings (DVD)

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

While in the DVD mod

e press the SETTINGS

function button and then select the Video set-

tings (D

VD) option.

Function button: function

Format : To select the screen format. If Automatic is

selected, the optimal format for the scr

een is set au-

tomatically.

Audio channel

: To select the language of the voice in-

structions.

Subtitles : To select the subtitle language.

Enter/change PIN for parental settings : Parental settings

password.

Child pr

otection

: To select the level of protection you

want to associate with DVD pl

ayback.

The options within the Video Settings (DVD)

menu may v

ary depending on the D

VD or the

chapt

er that is pl

aying.

The av

ailable audio channel languages and

subtitles depend on the DVD that is inserted.

All or part of the content of a video DVD can

be protected by a password (PIN) if the DVD

allows parental settings. In addition, you can

choose the restriction level based on age,

with 1 being the least restrictive (all audien-

ces) and 8 the most restrictive (adults).

Images

3 Not available for model: Media Syst

em Colour

Fig. 214 Images main menu.

Using the Images menu, image fil

es can be

vie

ed (e

.g. phot

os) individually or as a slide-

show.

The image files must be stored on a compati-

ble data storage device.

●

Press the Infotainment  button and then

select the Images context.

●

Press the SOURCE

function button to select

the sour

ce wher

e the pict

es in question ar

located.

Function button: function

SOURCE Selection of the source.

SELECTION Opens a list of image files.



The image viewed was obtained via

GPS l

ocalisation and upon pressing

this function button, the navigator

menu opens t

o start a route to this

destination.

 / 

Rotate the image view 90° left or

right, or by swiping your fingers

across the screen in a circul

ar direc-

tion.



Reset the view of the image.



To stop the playback of a slideshow.

The 

function button changes to

 .



To continue the playback of a slide-

show. The  function button

changes to  .





Change image PREVIOUS or NEXT,

or by sliding your finger horizontally

across the screen.

SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu.

213

Infotainment System

Enlarging or reducing the view

●

Slide 2 fingers across the screen, moving

them further apart or cl

oser t

ogether

equir

ements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu-

tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

Image settings

Open the Image settings menu

●

Press the SETTINGS function button in the

main Images menu.

Function button: function

Image view : To adjust the image view format.

Automatic: Images scale to the size of the

screen (the image may not be displayed com-

pletely).

Function button: function

Complete: The images are displayed fully on

the screen.

Display time : To adjust the display time of images

during a slideshow.

Repeat slideshow : The active slideshow is repeated

infinitely.

Media settings

●

Select the MEDIA main menu by pr

essing

the inf

ainment k

 and then select the

Media context.

●

Press the SETTINGS

function button to open

the Media settings menu.

Function button: function

Sound : Sound settings

›››

page 17

Manage Jukebox

: To import files to the jukebox or to

delete existing files

›››

page 209.

Mix/repeat including subfolders : Subfolders are inclu-

ded in the selected playback mode

››

›

page 197.

Bluetooth®

: Bluetooth

settings

›››

page 243

WLAN

: WLAN settings

›››

page 21

Function button: function

Video settings : Settings for playing DVD videos or

files.

Remove saf

ely

: To prepare external data media for ex-

traction or disconnection. See also

›››

page 206, In-

serting or ejecting a memory card and

›››

page 207, External data storage device con-

nected to the USB port .

Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of

traffic information stations) is active

›

››

page 194.

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.

Navigation

Intr

oduction

Fig. 215 Navigation

General information

A GPS (Gl

obal P

ositioning Syst

em) sat

ellit

system locates the current position of the ve-

hicle. The vehicle’s sensors measure the

Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.

214

Operating modes

distance travelled. The measurements are

compar

ed with the st

ed det

ail

ed map re-

sources, according to road indications stored

in them. Traffic reports, if any, will also be tak-

en into account in the route calculation (dy-

namic route guidance

›››

page 222). Using all

the data available, the Infotainment system

calculates the optimum route to the destina-

tion.

The destination is defined by entering an ad-

dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-

tion or hotel.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep-

resentations will guide you to your destina-

tion.

Depending on the country, some functions of

the infotainment system will not be available

on the screen when travelling higher than a

certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is

due to compliance with legislation.

CAUTION

The navigation announcements may be in-

accurate (e.g. due to out

-of-date data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re-

ceiv

e any dat

a fr

om GPS sat

ellit

es (tunnels,

garages), navigation can still continue using

the vehicle sensors.

Possible limitations in navigation

In areas that are not or are only partially digi-

tised (e.g. insufficient definition of one-way

streets and road categories), the Infotain-

ment system will still attempt to provide route

guidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-

tion data, it may not be possible to determine

the exact position of the vehicle. This may

mean that navigation is not as precise as usu-

al.

Navigation area and update of navigation

data

Road layouts change continuously. There-

fore, if the navigation data are not updated,

then errors or inaccuracies may occur.

SEAT recommends updating navigation data

on a regular basis.

Updating and using navigation da-

ta from an SD card

3 Only available for the model: Navi Syst

The SD card is factory fitted in slot 2 for SD

cards.

Navigation data that is currently valid for this

unit in order to allow all functions to be used

in full.

Updating navigation data

The current navigation data can be downloa-

ded in the int

ernet at www.seat.com and stor-

ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT

dealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet at

www.seat.com.

Using navigation data

●

Insert the memory card

›››

page 206.

●

Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains naviga-

tion data, the following message appears:

“The source contains a valid naviga-

tion database”. Navigation can be started.

Note

●

The inserted memory card must be pre-

par

ed before it is ejected

›››

page 206.

●

Navigation is not possible without the SD

card.

●

Do not remove the memory card while

the navigation data is in use. This could

damage the memory card!

●

The navigation memory card cannot be

used as a memory for other files.

●

SEAT recommends using only the original

SEAT cards. The use of other memory cards

could limit its operation.

215

Infotainment System

Updating and installing navigation

dat

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

The Infotainment system is equipped with an

int

ernal navigation data memory. The re-

quired navigation data are already installed

on the system.

The Infotainment system always requires the

navigation data that is currently valid for this

unit in order to allow all functions to be used

in full. Using an old version may lead to errors

during navigation.

Updating navigation data

To update navigation data visit our website:

www.seat.com.

The navigation data must be installed after

downloading. Navigation is not possible from

the memory card.

Installing navigation data

The installation process takes about 2 hours.

If the Infotainment system is switched off, the

installation process is paused and will auto-

matically resume when switched back on.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Insert the memory card containing the nav-

igation data

››

›

page 206.

●

Press the infotainment key  > Settings

> System information.

●

Press UPDATE to import the stored naviga-

tion data.

●

Follow the instructions displayed on the

screen.

Once installed, the memory card can be re-

moved. The memory card must be prepared

for removal

›››

page 206.

CAUTION

Do not remove the memory card while the

navigation data is being installed. The

memory card may be irr

eparably dam-

aged!

Note

●

The navigation memory card may not be

used as memory storage for other fil

es. The

Infotainment system will not recognise the

files saved on it.

●

SEAT recommends a CLASS 10

memory

card for the use of navigation data. The use

of other memory cards could limit its oper-

ation.

Navigation main menu

Fig. 216

Navigation main menu

Navigation functions can only be used if the

navigation dat

a f

or the ar

ea wher

e the v

ehi-

cle is driving is available in the infotainment

system.

The Navigation main menu allows you to se-

lect a new destination, call up a previously

used or stored destination and search for

points of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu

●

Press the Infotainment  button and then

select the Navigation context to open the

last menu that was open in navigation.

●

If the Navigation main menu is not dis-

played, select Navigation again until the

main Navigation menu is displayed.

The speed class of an SD card.

216

Operating modes

●

OR: Pr

ess the



function butt

on t

o return

menu by menu to the Navigation menu.

Navigation main menu function buttons

and indicators

Function button: function

The split screen is displayed

›››

page 221

Messages and function buttons on the map

display

›››

page 222.

NEW DEST : To enter a new destination

›››

page 21

ROUTE

: During route guidance

›››

page 218

MY DESTS.

: To activate or manage stored destina-

tions

›››

page 219

POI

: Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-

tions and restaurants) within a particular sear

ch area

›››

page 220.

VIEW

: To modify or activate or deactivate the split

screen and show POI

›››

Fig. 216

›››

page 221.

SETTINGS : Open the Navigation Settings

menu.

New destination (entering the des-

tination)

Fig. 217

Search screen.

●

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the

w destination function button.

●

Press the OP

TIONS

function button and se-

ect the desir

ed destination entry t

ype

(

Search,

Address, POI or On the map).

●

Using voice control*, if you say Town, street

and number, without pauses, and then the in-

struction “Start Route Guidance” a route to

the given destination will start.

Search for addresses and Points of Interest

using the keypad to enter them

›››

Fig. 217.

For cities, post codes and points of interest,

the full details must be entered. You can also

search for points of interest by names or cat-

egories. When necessary, enter the name of

the city to refine the search.

›››

Fig. 217

Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),

which allow you to mov

e within the text.

Steering

When narrowing down the destination ad-

dress,

please note that every entry restricts

the available range of subsequent selections.

To enter an address press the function but-

tons in the following order:

●

Country, City (or postcode), Centr

(starts the route to the centre of the indicated

city), Street, Number, Junction, LAST DES-

TINATIONS, START (starts route guidance to

the selected destination).

On the map

●

Select the destination on the map or enter

it using GPS coordinates and confirm with

Function button: function

Store : Store the point of interest in the destination

memory

›››

page 219

Edit

: Edit the destination or enter another one.

Route options : Setting route options, see Naviga-

tion Settings > Route options.

217

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point

of interest.

After starting route guidance

Fig. 218 Route calculation.

When starting route guidance, the route is

cal

cul

ed based on the dat

a that hav

e been

selected in the Route options menu.

Three alternative routes are proposed

›››

Fig. 218. These 3 routes correspond to the

selectable route options: Economical, Fast

and Short.

Blue route: Economic route.

Red route: Fastest route.

Orange route: Shortest route to the

destination, even if it results in longer

travelling time.

–

●

Select the desired route by pressing it.

The route criteria settings in the Route op-

tions menu are modified accordingly.

If a route is not selected, the route guidance

starts automatically after approx. one minute

according to the setting selected in Route

options.

Once the route has been calculated, the sys-

tem gives the first navigation announcement.

Up to 3 navigation announcements are given

before a turn.

●

Press the adjustment knob to listen to the

last audible navigation instruction.

The indicated distances depend to a great

extent on the type of road and the traffic

speed. On motorways, for example, naviga-

tion announcements are received much earli-

er than in urban traffic.

The corresponding navigation announce-

ments are also given on roads with several

lanes that split, and on roundabouts, for ex-

ample: “Leave the roundabout at the second

exit.”

A navigation announcement informs you

when you have reached your “destination”.

A navigation announcement informing you

that you have reached the “destination area”

is given if the exact destination cannot be

reached.

During dynamic route guidance, you re-

ceive information about reported traffic con-

gestion on the route. An additional navigation

announcement is given if the route is recalcu-

lated.

During a navigation announcement, you can

change its volume using the button .

For other announcement settings, select

Navigation > Settings > Navigation

announcements.

Note

●

If you miss a turning during route guid-

ance and are curr

ently unable to turn back,

keep on driving until the navigation system

offers a new route.

●

The quality of the announcements and

recommendations depends on the naviga-

tion data available and any reported traffic

problems.

Route

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the R

out

function button.

The R

out

e function button is only displayed

with r

out

e guidance activ

ed.

Function button: function

STOP GUIDANCE : Aborts current route guidance.

218

Operating modes

Function button: function

ENTER DESTINATION : To enter a new destination or a

new stopover

›

››

page 217.

CONGESTION AHEAD

: To exclude a section of the

route. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route func-

tion button and then CANCEL CONGESTION .

CHANGE ROUTE

: The map of the calculated rout

appears and by holding a finger on the route and

dragging the finger across said map, the route is

changed to the road(s) that you want and the new

route is then recalculated.

ROUTE DETAILS

: View route information.

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

My destinations (destination mem-

ory)

Fig. 219

List of saved routes.

The stored destinations can be selected from

the My destinations menu.

●

Press the My destinations

function button in

the main Navigation menu.

●

Select the desired function button.

ORE POSITION , ROUTES , DES

TINATIONS

LAS

T DES

TINATIONS OR HOME ADDRESS .

e position

●

By pr

essing the S

ORE POSITION

function

butt

on, the curr

ent position is st

ed as a

Flagged destination in the Destination

memory.

o save the stored position permanently as a

flagged destination, change the name of

the position in the destination memory. Oth-

erwise, the saved position is overwritten when

another flagged destination is saved.

●

Mark the Flagged destination in the

destination memory.

●

Press the Store

function button.

The name can be changed in the f

oll

wing

input windo

. Press the 

function button to

e the destination.

out

In the

Route mode, you can define various

destinations (final destination and stopovers).

The starting point of a route is always the

vehicle’s current position. The destination is

the end point of a route. Stopover destina-

tions are driven to before the destination.

●

In the Navigation main menu, press the

My Destinations

function button.

●

Press the ROUTES function button.

If you hav

e not st

ed any r

out

es or want to

create a new route, press the New route

func-

tion butt

on and then f

oll

w the instructions as

or a new destination, before pressing Store

essing on a st

ed r

out

e brings up the fol-

lowing function buttons:

Function button: function

Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance.

Function buttons and indications in the New

route or Edit menu

Function button or message: function or

meaning



Stopover.



Destination.



...

Estimated time of arrival.

219

Infotainment System

Function button or message: function or

meaning



...

Calculated distance to destination.



...

Estimated travelling time.



...

Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display the

function buttons



Delete destination.



Starting r

oute guidance direct to the se-

ected destination. The stages are omit

ted.



Opening the detailed view of the desti-

nation in question.

Available function buttons

New desti-

nation

Add a new destination.

Destina-

tions

Adding a new destination from My

destinations.

Storing To store the created route in the route

memory.

Start Start route guidance.

Calculate To update the calculated distance and

estimated arrival time.

Stop T

o stop active route guidance.

Available function buttons



Moving a stopover or a destination to

another position on the list. Press and

drag to mov

e the destination.

Only displayed with route guidance activated and

when a destination has been added to the tour.

Only displayed with r

oute guidance activated.

Last destinations

List of last destinations.

My destinations

●

Press the Options function button and se-

lect the desired function button.

Function button: function

Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-

ually and from imported vCards

››

›

page 224, Im-

porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites

: List of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : List of phone book contacts that have a

stored address (postal addr

ess).

Home address

Only one addr

ess or position can be st

as the home addr

ess at any one time

Pressing will start guidance to the stored

home address.

If a home address has not yet been stored,

an address can be assigned.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current position

as the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manually.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga-

tion settings > Manage memory menu.

Special destinations (POI)

Fig. 220

Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the memory

e divided int

o diff

ent cat

egories. Each

category of special destinations has a sym-

bol assigned to it.

In the Map settings menu, you can indicate

the special destinations that you want to

220

Operating modes

display on the map. Up to 10 categories can

be sel

ect

ed.

Sel

ecting a point of int

est on the map

Function button: function

There are several points of interest in the area.

Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-

terest.

The only point of interest in this zone. Press the

symbol to open the detailed view of the point of

interest.

Quick POI search

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the POIs

function button and the three main catego-

ries will appear

. Alt

ernativ

ely, ent

er the name

of the point of int

erest to be searched using

the new destination keypad, or press

Search nearby

on the map

›

abl

e on

page 221.

View

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the Vie

function button.

Function button: function



Map display in two dimensions (con-

ventional).

Function button: function



Map display in three dimensions (bird's

eye vie

w).

The places of interest and w

ell-known

buildings are also shown in det

ail and

in colour.



To display the destination on the map.



To display the route on the map.

Auto /

Day / Night

To switch between day and night for-

mat.

SPLIT

SCREEN

Show the split screen

›

››

page 221

POI Show special destinations.

Only displayed with route guidance activated.

Split screen

Fig. 221

Split screen displayed.

The split screen

›

Fig. 22

shows the in-

ormation det

ail

ed bel

●

Pressing the name displays a menu with the

following options:

Function button: function

Audio : Current audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current di-

rection and position of the vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,

POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings

up additional inf

ormation

FREQUENT ROUTES

: Information on the user's most

frequent rout

es.

Position

: current vehicle position in coordinates and

GPS status (satellite r

eception).

Only shown when route guidance is not active or

when pr

edictiv

e r

out

e guidance is activ

Press the 

function button to close the split

scr

een.

At any moment during navigation, pr

essing

inside the map will mak

e a pop-up menu ap-

pear with the f

oll

owing functions:

Function button: function

Clicking on the map : Shows the details of the selected

point, street name or coordinates

Only when you press on an icon on the map:

221

Infotainment System

Function button: function

POI : name of the point of interest (when only one

appears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you

press on the map on various POIs grouped to-

gether).

FAVOURITE : name of the favourite.

HOME ADDRESS : Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

Add stopover

: only when you have an active route.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but only

for the area around the point select

ed on the map.

Demo mode start

(only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 222

Messages and function buttons on

the map displ

ay.

Function buttons and messages on the

map displ

ay.

o activ

e function butt

ons  and , press

function button .

Function button: function



Current altitude indicator.



To centre the vehicle position on the map.



To centre the destination on the map. On-

ly displ

ayed if either Display destination

on map or

Display route on the map is se-

lected

›››

page 221.



To change the orientation of the map

(north-facing or direction of travel). Only

ailable in 2D mode.



Map scale. To change the scale, turn the

adjustment knob or move two fingers to-

gether or apart on the scr

een.



Selecting automatic scaling. If the func-

tion is active, the symbol is displayed in

blue.



Briefly increases the scale of the map

(zoom) The selected scale is displayed

again after a few seconds.



Mute or repeat the last announcement,

change the announcement volume.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-

ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are

displayed. Select Navigation > Settings >

Map > Show road signs.

Traffic bulletins and dynamic desti-

nation guidance (TRAFFIC)

Fig. 223

Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receives

affic r

eports (T

MC/T

MCpr

o) in the back-

ground, if a traffic information station is

tuned.

Traffic bulletins are displayed on the map

with symbols

›››

page 223, Traffic reports on

map (selection) and they are required dy-

namic destination guidance

›››

page 223,

Dynamic route guidance.

List of available traffic reports

●

Press the Infotainment  button and then

select the Traffic context.

222

Operating modes

Dynamic route guidance

In or

der f

or dynamic r

out

e guidance t

o func-

tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the

route options.

If a traffic report is received that affects the

route being travelled, an alternative route will

be searched for if the system calculates that

time can be saved.

If, on the other hand, the alternative route

does not save time, the route will continue

with the traffic jam. In both cases, an an-

nouncement will be made.

Shortly before reaching the announced traf-

fic jam, it is indicated again.

Avoiding a traffic jam by following the instruc-

tions of a traffic bulletin does not always save

time, for example, if alternative routes are

congested. The effectiveness of dynamic

navigation depends on the traffic bulletins

that are received.

The rest of the route that has to be travelled

can be manually excluded to force its recal-

culation

›››

page 218.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning



: Slow traffic



: Tr

affic jam

Symbol: Meaning



: Accident



: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)



: Slippery road surf

ace



: Danger



: Road works



: Strong wind



: Road cl

osed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic incidents that

do not aff

ect the cal

cul

ed r

oute calculated

are displayed in grey.

The length of a traffic jam on the calculated

route is shown by a red line.

Incidents that affect the calculated route and

that have led to the recalculation of the route

are shown in orange.

The position of a symbol indicates the start of

the traffic jam if it is precisely specified in the

traffic bulletin.

Predictive navigation

Fig. 224

Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, the

syst

em det

ects and st

es in the back

ground

routes that are frequently followed, without

them being active destination routes.

This function has no navigation announce-

ments unless the user requires them by press-

ing the right thumbwheel of the multifunction

steering wheel.

●

On the main screen of the Navigation menu,

in the pop-up window, press the

FREQUENT ROUTES

button. To display fre-

quently f

oll

ed r

outes press the

Show on map

button

›

Fig. 22

223

Infotainment System

Importing vCards (electronic busi-

ness car

ds)

Importing vCards to the destination mem-

ory

●

Insert the data storage device with the stor-

ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment

syst

›››

page 197.

●

In the Navigation main menu, press the

SETTINGS

function button.

●

In the Navigation settings menu, press

the Import destinations

function button.

●

Select the data carrier with the vCards

sav

ed in the list.

●

ess Import all vCar

ds fr

om this f

older

●

Confirm the import notice with the OK

function button.

Sav

ed vCar

ds will no

w be in the destinations

memory

›

page 219.

Note

Only one address per vCard can be impor-

ted. In the event any vCards hav

e multiple

addresses, only the main address will be

imported.

Navigation with images

Fig. 225

Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting route

guidance

●

Press the Infotainment  butt

on and then

sel

ect the

Images cont

xt.

●

Press the SOURCE

›

Fig. 225

function but

ton and select the data storage device where

the images are stored.

●

If the image displayed was taken using GPS

localisation, the  function button will appear.

Press to start guidance to a destination.

Road signs indication

The road sign indication must be active in the

Navigation settings menu

›

page 225

If ther

e are road signs stored in the navigation

data for the route you are driving on, the sys-

tem can display them on the map (e.g. a

speed limit).

Take into account the age of the navigation

data and the limitations of the navigation sys-

tem

›››

page 214!

Recognition of road signs

Some vehicles have a road sign recognition

camera. If the vehicle has road sign r

ecogni-

tion and it is active, road signs detected by

the system will be displayed on the map,

along with additional information.

Read and take into account the information

and indications of the road signs recognition

system

›››

page 78.

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigation

settings menu, an additional pop-up win-

w opens when you st

art r

out

e guidance

●

Pressing the Demo mode

function button

arts a “virt

ual r

out

e guidance” t

o the desti-

nation you have entered.

●

If you press the Normal

function button, a

“r

eal r

out

e guidance” st

arts.

The de

velopment and operation of virtual

route guidance is compatible with the

224

Operating modes

development and operation of real route

guidance

Virt

ual r

out

e guidance is r

epeated after

reaching the fictitious destination and re-

starts from the starting point, if it is not inter-

rupted beforehand.

When the starting point of the Demo mode is

manually set Navigation settings menu,

the virtual route guidance starts from that po-

sition.

A manually entered starting point is overwrit-

ten with the current location of the vehicle, if

the vehicle starts moving.

Note

Deactivate the Demo mode after use, oth-

erwise you will always have to sel

ect

whether to start a virtual route or normal

route before starting route guidance.

Navigation settings

●

In the Navigation main menu, pr

ess the

SETTINGS

function button.

Function button: function

Route options : To make the route calculation adjust-

ments.

Function button: function

Suggest 3 alternative routes : After starting route

guidance, 3 alternative rout

es are proposed

›››

page 218.

Route

: Route type selection.

Economical : Route calculation, taking econom-

ic aspects into account.

Fast : The fastest route to the destination.

Short : The shortest route to the destination,

even if it results in longer tr

avelling time.

Most frequent routes

: Information on the user's most

frequent routes.

Dynamic rout

: Dynamic route guidance activates

when a TMC is received

››

›

page 222.

Avoid motorways and highways

: Motorways will be

excluded from the rout

e calculation wherever

possible.

Avoid ferries and motorail trains

: Ferries and motorail

trains will not be taken into account f

or the route

calculation, wherever possible.

Avoid toll roads

: Toll roads will be excluded from

the route calculation, whene

ver possible.

Avoid tunnels

: Tunnels will be excluded from the

route calculation, whene

ver possible.

Avoid routes requiring toll stickers

: Mandatory toll

stickers (stickers certifying that the toll has been

paid) will be ex

cluded from the route calculation

whenever possible.

Function button: function

Show available toll stickers

: To mark the available

oll stickers on the list

( Avoid routes requiring toll stickers

must be active).

Routes requiring toll stickers will be taken into ac-

count in the route calculation if it is marked that

the toll sticker is available.

Include trailer : Calculate the route and arrival

time, depending on whether a trailer is being tow-

ed.

Map : To adjust the map display settings.

Show road signs : The road signs stored in the navi-

gation data for the road you are driving on ar

e dis-

played during route guidance

›››

page 224.

Lane guidance

: During route guidance, an addi-

tional indication is displayed to recommend a

lane when driving, and when t

urning on roads with

several lanes. Only if the data bank contains infor-

mation about the area that is being driven

through.

Show favourites

: The destinations saved as favour-

ites on the map are displayed ().

Sho

w POIs

Select categories for POIs : To select the POI cate-

gories shown on the map

›››

page 220

Show brand logos for POIs

: Displays logos of the

selected special destinations categories (e.g.

displ

ays logos of service stations).

Manage memory

: To make adjustments to the stored

destinations.

225

Infotainment System

Function button: function

Sort contacts : To select the sequential order of

agenda entries recorded with postal addresses,

see al

›››

page 219.

Define home address

: To assign or edit a home ad-

dress, see also

›››

page 220.

Import destinations (SD/USB) : To import digital busi-

ness cards (vCards) into the destination memory

››

›

page 224.

Delete user data

: To delete stored destinations (e.g.

Last destinations or the Destination

memory).

Navigation announcements : To change the navigation

announcements settings.

Volume : To adjust the volume of audible driving

recommendations.

Entertainment fading (nav

. announcements)

: Set the

volume of the active audio source during naviga-

tion announcements.

No navigation announcements during calls : During a

telephone conversation, audio driving recommen-

dations will not be giv

en.

Note: My POIs

: Audible warning when approaching

a special destination.

Speed limits : Shows the speed limits, depending on

the road, of the country that is being driven through.

Fuel options : To change fuel related settings.

Function button: function

Select preferred petrol station : The brand of the se-

lected service station is given priorit

y in special

destination search results.

Fuel warning

: The fuel warning is active.

If the fuel level reaches the reserve, an appropri-

ate warning is generated that enabl

es the service

station search.

Version information

: Information about stored naviga-

tion data.

Advanced settings : For making advanced changes to

the navigation settings.

Time display

: Indication  during route guidance.

ime of arrival

: The estimated time of arrival at

the destination is displayed.

Running time : The envisaged travelling time to

the destination is displayed.

Status line : View  during route guidance.

Destination : The calculated distance to the

destination is shown.

Next stopo

ver

: The calculated distance to the

next stopover is sho

wn.

Note: National border crossed

: Indication of the

speed limits of the country in question when

crossing a border.

Function button: function

Demo mode : When the Demo mode is active and

route guidance is started, a virt

ual guide to the en-

tered destination may be started

›››

page 224.

Define demo mode starting point

: If the Demo

mode is active and the vehicle is stopped, a fic-

titious starting point can be set for the virtual

route guidance.

Waypoints mode

: To start Offroad navigation.

This functionality will depend on the country.

Only available on model: Navi System Plus.

Navigation in Offroad

mode*

Intr

oduction

Offroad* navigation is a function for offroad

driving that pr

vides dir

ections in “

non-digi-

tised ar

eas” at low speeds.

Non-digitised areas are areas about which

the system does not have information for the

streets or terrain. It does not detect streets,

buildings or natural limits such as mountains

or rivers, although they may be shown on the

map.

Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

226

Operating modes

Offroad* navigation is not suitable for driving

on conv

entional r

oads as it does not det

ect

one-w

ay str

eets, motorway entries or similar.

Offroad Navigation Menu

Fig. 226 Offroad Navigation Menu start

Press the SETTINGS function butt

on in the

main Navigation menu.

●

In the menu, pr

ess the

aypoint mode

function butt

on.

●

The Offroad Navigation menu opens

›››

Fig. 226.

Function buttons in the Offroad Navigation

Function button: function

RECORD : Initiates the plotting of an Offroad tour.

Function button: function

MEMORY : Opens a list allowing the selection of a

stored Offroad tour

EXIT

: Ends Offroad navigation.

Recording an Offroad tour

Fig. 227 Recording an Offroad tour

An Offroad tour is formed by a series of stor-

ed w

aypoints

ting r

ecording

●

In the Offroad Navigation menu, in the pop-

up window press the RECORD

pop-up button.

●

In the pop-up window, the user is able to

ot the t

our with a giv

en destination or st

art

otting the route without giving a final desti-

nation.

●

Starts plotting the route.

The offroad markers can be recorded by in-

dicating a manual waypoint.

●

In the Offroad Navigation menu, press the

ADD WAYPOINT

function button. The tour way-

points defined manually ar

e sho

wn on the

map by a mark

Ending r

ecording

●

Press the STOP RECORDING

function button

in the main Offr

oad Navigation menu.

Managing st

ed Offr

oad t

ours

Fig. 228

Offroad Navigation menu, stored

ours

●

Press the MEMORY

function button in the

Offr

oad Navigation menu.

●

A list of st

ed Offr

oad t

ours opens, if there

are any.

227

Infotainment System

When a tour is selected, the following icons

will appear

›

Fig. 228

Export the t

our to an SD card.

Edit the name of the tour.

Delete the tour.

Load tour

Function button: function

IMPORT : allows the import of an Offroad route in

“.GPX” format.

Loading an Offroad tour

When the Offr

oad t

our is sel

ect

ed, pr

ess Play

 and the selected tour will be loaded onto

the Navigation system.

Creating an Offroad tour

Fig. 229

Offroad route guidance mode









Start route guidance

●

Loads the stored Offroad tour.

●

Starting off in a stored route is not detected

by the syst

em aut

omatically.

Set

Function button: function

Invert : Reverses the direction of the stored Offroad

tour.

Next point : Starts the Offroad tour from the nearest

point.

Start : Starts the complete Offroad tour.

When route guidance starts, the system

wit

ches t

o the map vie

Stopping route guidance

●

Press the OPTIONS

button on the screen

and then pr

ess St

op .

End w

aypoint navigation

●

ess the Exit function button in the Off-

oad Navigation menu

WARNING

Terrain features are disregarded during

route guidance Drive slo

wly and following

the instructions in order to perform the ma-

noeuvre as far as possible!

●

The general direction of travel is indica-

ed straight ahead by direction arrows in

the Infotainment System pop-up window

›››

Fig. 229

Note

If an Offroad tour is being recorded, this is

aut

omatically stored if Offroad navigation

is discontinued.

Vehicle Menu

Intr

oduction t

o using the V

ehicl

Press the Infotainment    butt

on and

then sel

ect the

Vehicle cont

xt to access

the main menu with the following options:

●

VIEW

●

RADIO or MEDIA (to control playback in ra-

dio or media mode)

●

PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)

●

SETTINGS

›››

page 92

With the function button VIEW

you can ac-

cess the f

oll

wing inf

ormation:

●

INS

TRUMENT PANEL

›››

page 229

●

SPORT*

›››

page 229

228

Operating modes

●

OFFRO

AD*

›

page 230

●

CONSUMERS

›

››

page 230

●

DRIVING DATA

›››

page 231

●

ECOTRAINER

›››

page 231

●

VEHICLE STATUS

›››

page 232

Instrument panel*

3 Valid for vehicles equipped with the SEAT Digi-

tal Cockpit

Fig. 230 Instrument panel

Press the Instrument panel button to choose

om the v

arious displ

ay options and cust

om-

ise the inf

ormation that appears in the SEAT

Digital Cockpit

›››

page 70.

Automatic View

Pre-set information depending on the Driving

mode.

Classic View

The needles are displayed at full length.

Customise the information that appears in

the digital cockpit. The user chooses which to

display, and in what order, by moving a finger

vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can be

memorised by existing the menu or keeping

the View

button pressed.

Sport*

Fig. 231

SPORT menu

Fig. 232 SPORT Menu Lap timer

●

Press the Infotainment button 







 and

then select the Vehicle context.

●

Press the VIEW

function button and select

SPOR

If the corr

esponding equipment is av

ail

able,

the following information appears in the

Sport option

›››

Fig. 231:

Instantaneous power expressed in kW

G forces

Turbo pressure, expressed in bar (“bar”),

kilopascals (“kPa”) or in pounds per

square inch (“psi”). Press the Settings

button to change the units of pressure

›››

page 173

Coolant temperature

Oil temperature

Only 3 of these items of information can be

displayed at the same time, but the user

229

Infotainment System

chooses which to display, and in what order,

by mo

ving the finger v

ertically o

er the dial

Press the NEXT

button to bring up the L

timer

menu that is described bel

›

Fig. 232:

Analogue lap timer

New timing is started by pressing on the

surface of the digital lap timer +.

Stop lap timer/Lap time.

The analogue lap timer's time is stopped

for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds, the ana-

logue lap timer shows the real time again.

Statistics/delete last lap time.

Offroad*

Fig. 233

Offroad CAR Menu.

●

Press the Infotainment button 







 and

then select the Vehicle context.

●

Press the VIEW

function button and select

OFFROAD.

If the corr

esponding equipment is av

ail

abl

the information that appears is the following:

Compass.

Turning angle of steered wheels.

Coolant temperature.

Lubricating oil temperature

Only 2 of these items of information can be

displayed at the same time, but the user

chooses which to display, and in what order,

by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Consumers

Fig. 234

Convenience consumers.

Access information about the vehicle’s main

conv

enience consumers. It is sho

wn via a

consumption indicat

or bar in l/h (gal/h)

This lap timer is independent of the one that

appears on the instrument panel

›››

page 81.

In the case of Gas (CNG) v

ehicles, the units are

in kg/h.

230

Operating modes

Driving data

Fig. 235

Driving data.

The on-board computer has 3 memories.

They can be used t

o displ

ay: dist

ance

, time

average speed, average consumption and

range.

1. Since start

Indication and storage of distance travelled

and consumption values between the ignition

being turned on and it being turned off.

2. Since refuelling

Display and storage of the values for the jour-

ney and the consumption. By refuelling, the

memory will be erased automatically.

3. Long-term

The memory records the values for a specific

number of partial trips, up to a total of 19

hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi-

nutes, or 1999.9 km (mi) or 9999 km (mi), de-

pending on the model of instrument panel.

When one of these values is reached (de-

pending on the version of the instrument pan-

el), the memory is automatically deleted and

starts counting again from 0.

Ecotrainer

Fig. 236 CAR Ecotrainer menu.

Fig. 237 Driving style symbols.

Open the ECOTRAINER Menu

●

While the vehicle is stopped, press the info-

ainment butt





  , followed by Vehi-

cle context.

●

Press the VIEW

function button and select

ECOTRAINER.

vides inf

ormation about your driving st

The information on driving style is only evalu-

ated and displayed when moving forward.

∅ ECO points: indication on driving style

Indicates driving style efficiency since start

on a scale of 0 to 100. The higher the value

displayed, the more efficient the driving style.

Press on the display for more information.

Statistics are shown for the last 30 minutes of

driving from the start. If 30 minutes have not

elapsed, the values of the last trip are shown

in grey.

231

Infotainment System

∅ l/100 km: Average fuel consumption

Sho

ws the av

age fuel consumption. The

alue is cal

culated using the kilometres trav-

elled since start as a reference. Press on the

display for more information. Statistics are

shown for the last 30 minutes of driving from

the start. If 30 minutes have not elapsed, the

values of the last trip are shown in grey.

Eco tips: Tips on how to save fuel

Press the ECO tips

button to get advice on

w t

o sav

e fuel. These tips can only be con-

sult

ed whil

e the vehicle is stopped.

Efficient driving style assessment

The representation uses different elements to

show driving style efficiency.

Indication

›››

Fig. 236: Meaning

To the left of the columns are different symbols

that provide information about the current driv-

ing st

yle

›››

table on page 232.

The white column is an indication of where the

efficiency graph starts (from left to right).

It shows the position of the evaluation that is

currently being performed.

Bars to illustrate acceleration.

The position of the car represents acceleration.

If the speed is const

ant, the car remains in the

central zone. If it accelerates or brakes, the car

moves backwards or forwards respectively.

Indication

›››

Fig. 236: Meaning

Columns representing driving style efficiency.

Horizontally, the columns represent r

etrospec-

tive driving efficiency, and move from left to

right approximately every 5 seconds. The high-

er the columns, the more efficient the driving

style.

The colour of the sky represents the average of

the last 3 minutes. The colour changes from

grey (less efficient) to blue (more efficient).

Symbols

›››

Fig. 237: Meaning

Thinking ahead. Sudden changes in accelera-

tion lower the efficiency of the driving styl

Gear recommendation.

Current speed has a negative impact on fuel

consumption.

Ecological driving style.

Vehicle status

Fig. 238

Standard representation: vehicle sta-

us.

Fig. 239 Standard representation: vehicle sta-

us.

Press the V

ehicl

e st

us button to access infor-

mation on the Vehicle status messages

and Start-Stop system.

232

Operating modes

The Vehicle status messages ar

e dis-

ayed

›

Fig. 238, in addition to being speci-

fied on the corresponding button.

According to the parties affected by these

messages, they will be shown in different col-

ours (depending on their importance) on the

vehicle's screen.

To access the Tyre Pressure Loss Indi-

cator, press the FORWARD

or BACK keys.

om this same menu, use the 

SET button

o st

e the t

e pressures.

Note

The values shown on the figures

›››

Fig. 234,

›

››

Fig. 235,

›››

Fig. 238 and

›››

Fig. 239 are

indicative and may vary depending on the

equipment.

Telephone

Gener

al inf

ormation

Fig. 240 Related video

Telephone functions can only be used if there

is a mobil

e phone connect

ed by Bluet

ooth t

the inf

otainment system

›››

page 235.

To do this, the phone must have the Blue-

tooth

function activated.

The instructions shown on the screen for the

telephone menus will depend on the mobile

telephone used.

Only use compatible Bluetooth

devices. For

further information on compatible Bluetooth

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or

check on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-

phone and of any accessories.

If you detect any operating issues between

your mobile telephone and the Infotainment

system, restart your mobile by switching it off

and on again.

Some functions and setup can only be per-

formed when the vehicle is stopped and are

not available on all mobile telephones.

You may experience poor reception or may

be cut off in areas where the signal is weak.

Most electronic devices are shielded against

HF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, the

electronic equipment may not be protected

from the HF signals of the telephone man-

agement system. This may cause interfer-

ence.

WARNING

General, mandatory, legal and country-

specific instructions and laws for the use of

mobile phones inside the vehicl

e must al-

ways be considered.

WARNING

Speaking by telephone and using the mo-

bile telephone management system whil

driving can distract you from the road and

cause an accident.

●

In areas of little coverage your call may

be cut off and you may not be able to make

even emergency calls.

WARNING

Mobile telephones may interfere with and

alter the correct operation of pacemakers

if they ar

e carried directly over them.

●

Maintain a minimum distance of at least

20 centimetres between the aerials of the

mobile telephone and the pacemaker.

●

Do not carry your switched-on mobile

telephone in your breast pocket directly

over the pacemaker.

●

If you suspect interference, switch off the

mobile telephone immediately.

CAUTION

High speeds, poor weather or road condi-

tions and the quality of reception can all

233

Infotainment System

affect the audio quality of a telephone con-

versation in the vehicle.

Note

●

estrictions on the use of devices using

Bluetooth

technol

ogy may apply in some

countries. For further information, contact

the local authorities.

●

If you wish to connect a device via Blue-

tooth

, consult the safety warnings in its in-

struction manual. Only use compatible

Bluetooth

devices.

●

Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-

cle may provoke noise in the speakers.

●

Some networks may not recognise all of

the language characters or offer all of the

services.

Places with special regulations

In the majority of cases, these places are

signpost

ed, but not al

ays cl

early. They in-

clude

, for example:

●

the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks

●

The lower decks of boats and ferries.

●

In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid

gas (such as propane or butane).

●

places where the air is laden with chemi-

cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal

powder.

●

all other places where the vehicle engine

must be switched off.

WARNING

Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a

risk of explosion! The mobile tel

ephone can

automatically connect to the mobile tele-

phone network again if it loses the Blue-

tooth

connection to the telephone man-

agement system.

CAUTION

In areas where special regulations apply or

the use of mobile telephones is prohibit

ed,

both the telephone and the telephone

management system must always be

switched off. Interference may be caused

with sensitive technical and medical equip-

ment, possibly resulting in a malfunction or

damage to the equipment.

Bluetooth

echnol

ogy all

ws a mobil

e tele-

phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-

phone management system. Prior pairing be-

tween the two is required for this purpose.

Some Bluetooth

mobile telephones connect

automatically when turning on the ignition if a

connection has been previously established.

Its Bluetooth

function must be activated for

this purpose, and there must be no Bluetooth

connection with other devices.

Bluetooth

connections are free.

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth

SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-

ephone management system, a data ex-

change takes place via one of the Bluetooth

profiles.

●

Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the

HFP can be used to manage calls through the

infotainment system.

●

Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows

audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It

may require connecting other profiles for

managing and controlling playback.

●

Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows

phone book contents to be downloaded from

the mobile telephone.

234

Operating modes

●

Message pr

ofil

e (MAP):

It all

ws short

messages (SMS) t

o be downloaded and

synchronised.

Note

The mobile telephone's button and warning

tones should be off. Where necessary, dis-

connect the headset fr

om the mobile tele-

phone you wish to connect to the system.

Pairing and connecting a mobile

telephone to the Infot

ainment sys-

tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone via

the Inf

ainment syst

em, it is necessary t

pair both de

vices once.

For your safety, pairing should be done when

the vehicle is stationary. In some countries it is

not possible to perform the pairing with the

vehicle running.

Conditions

●

The ignition must be switched on.

●

The Bluetooth

function of the mobile

phone and the Infotainment system must be

active and visible.

●

The keypad lock on the mobile telephone

must be deactivated.

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-

bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary to

enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone

●

Press the infotainment button    >

Phone > Find telephone > Search re-

sults.

OR:

●

Press the infotainment button    >

Phone > Settings > Select mobile

phone > Search results.

OR:

●

Press the infotainment button    >

Phone > Settings > Bluetooth > Find

devices> Search results.

OR:

●

Make the connection from the settings

menu of the mobile phone itself.

The name of your Infotainment system will be

displayed on the main Telephone screen and

you can edit this name via the Bluetooth

settings menu.

The search process can take up to 1 minute.

As soon as the search is completed, the

names of the Bluetooth

devices found are

displayed on-screen.

●

Select the Bluetooth

device you want to

connect. Additional data may need to be en-

tered.

●

Use your mobile telephone to enter and

confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-

play of the infotainment system.

●

If more Bluetooth

profile pairing requests

are received on the mobile telephone, make

sure to reply to them.

OR:

●

Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-

play of the Infotainment system with the one

shown on the mobile phone. If they match,

confirm on both devices.

Now, the infotainment system and the mobile

phone will be connected to each other.

When the pairing has been finalized correct-

ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The

phone book, call list and SMS messages stor-

ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once

Not available for the Media System Colour

model.

235

Infotainment System

the requests have been accepted in the mo-

bil

e phone

. Aft

er do

wnl

oading, the data will

be available on the Infotainment system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele-

phones

You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to

the Infotainment system, but the number of si-

multaneous connections varies:

●

Media System Colour: a phone connected

to the hands-free profile and the same or a

different one as Bluetooth

audio.

●

Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-

bile phones simultaneously connected to the

hands-free profile, and one of them as Blue-

tooth

audio.

●

Navi System Plus: two mobile phones simul-

taneously connected to the hands-free pro-

file and one of them or a third one connected

to the Bluetooth

audio.

When the Infotainment system is switched on,

it connects to the last connected mobile tele-

phone. If it is not possible to connect to this

mobile telephone, the system will try to con-

nect to the next mobile telephone on the list

of paired devices.

The maximum range of the connection is ap-

prox. 10 metres. The connection will be inter-

rupted if this distance is exceeded. The con-

nection is automatically re-established as

soon as the device is once again within Blue-

tooth

range.

If the maximum number of paired devices is

reached and you want to pair another one,

the system will automatically replace the

least recent one with it. If it is to replace an-

other one, the user must delete that one first.

Do do this:

●

Press the SETTINGS function button in the

telephone context.

●

Press the function button Bluetooth set-

tings > Paired devices.

●

In the list of linked devices, press the func-

tion button  after the mobile phone to be

deleted, and then press Delete to confirm

the process.

WARNING

Do not perform the pairing and connection

process while driving. This may cause an

accident!

Note

Check that there are no requests pending

acceptance in your mobile phone. If there

e, this could block some of the functions

in the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 241

Phone main menu.

Assign a user profile

The phonebook

, the call lists and the speed

dial butt

ons ar

e assigned t

o a user pr

ofile and

remain stored on the telephone management

system. This information will be available ev-

ery time the mobile telephone is connected.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi-

nutes for the data from the linked mobile

phone to be available in the system. The next

time that the mobile telephone is connected

the phonebook is updated automatically.

If the mobile phonebook has been modified

while connected, a manual update of the

phonebook data can be started from the

User profile settings menu.

Telephone management can store a maxi-

mum of 4 profiles for mobile phones. If you

236

Operating modes

wish to pair another mobile phone, the oldest

user pr

ofil

e will be r

epl

aced.

elephone management system function

buttons

●

Press the infotainment button    and

then select the Telephone context to access

the Telephone main menu.

Function button: function

Name of connected mobile tele-

phone. Press the icon to the left t

connect another mobile phone.

Speed-dial buttons, connected tel-

ephone contacts favourites.

To change to another telephone

connected to the hands-free profil

Only visible when there are two tele-

phones connected as hands-free.

DIAL NO.

Open the numeric keypad

›››

page 238.

CONTACTS

o open the phonebook of the con-

nected telephone.

Text mes-

sage

o open the SMS menu.

ACTIVATE

Activate the voice control of the

connected mobile phone (compati-

ble with Android and Apple devices).

CALLS

To open call lists of the connected

mobile telephone

›››

page 241.

Function button: function

SETTINGS

To open the Phone settings

menu.

Not available for the Media System Colour model.

Only valid for the Media System Colour model.

Instructions and symbols of the

phone management system

Fig. 242 Active call.

Fig. 243 Conference call.

Display: Meaning

›››

Fig. 24

Name of the mobile operator of the connec-

ted device.

Stored telephone number or name. If the

name stored in the phonebook has an as-

signed photo, it can be displayed: select

Telephone > Settings > User

profile > Show pictures for

contacts*.



To accept a call.



To end a call

OR:

To re

ject an incoming call.



To mute or to r

eactivate the ring tone during

an incoming call.



To mute the microphone during an active

call and to reactivate it.

237

Infotainment System

Display: Meaning

›››

Fig. 24



The active call is put on hold. While on hold

the listener will not hear the conversation. To

reactiv

ate it, press the call accept button .

To reject it, press the reject button .



Press to add a participant to the active call.



Connected mobile telephone charge status.



Strength of the signal received by the mo-

bil

e telephone.

Not available for the Media System Colour model.

Multipl

e call

The t

ephony management syst

em allows

the user to interact with up to three calls on

the screen.

Only one of the calls can be active.

Conference call

The user can merge several calls into a single

one by making a conference call by pressing

button 

. There must be a minimum of two

calls for this to work. Once the conference

call has started, the user can add up to 5 par-

ticipants.

Once the conference call is established, the

user can consult the list of participants by

pressing on the conference call image

›››

Fig. 243

Depending on the mobil

e de

vice

, the call

om a conf

erence call participant can be

hung up or excluded from the conference call

but kept on a separate call.

WARNING

Remember that the driver should not oper-

ate the mobile phone while driving.

Note

Multi-call and conference call functionali-

ties are subject to the services associated

with the user

's SIM card.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 244

Enter telephone number menu.

●

Press the DIAL NUMBER function button from

the T

ephone

main menu.

Ent

er t

elephone number

●

Enter a phone number with the keypad.

Press the  function button to make a call.

Select a contact from the list

●

Enter the first few letters of the contact. The

available entries appear in the phonebook.

●

Select the desired contact to make the call.

Enter the country code

●

Press the function button 0 for approx. 2

seconds to add the +.

Not available for the Media System Colour

model.

238

Operating modes

 Assist

ance call

●

ess the function butt

on t

o obt

ain help in

the event of breakdown.

 Information call

●

Press the function button to obtain informa-

tion on the SEAT brand and the additional

contracted services.

 Call mailbox

●

Press the function button to make the call.

●

OR: Press the  function button for about 2

seconds to make a call.

Note

●

Breakdown service and information call

can incur an additional cost on your tele-

phone bill.

●

The Roadside Assistance and Information

services might not work properly, for exam-

ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the

connected mobile telephone are in differ-

ent countries. If you are not able to use

these services contact an authorised SEAT

workshop.

Phonebook Menu (contacts)

Fig. 245

Contacts Menu.

Fig. 246

Search window.

Once the first pairing is made, it may take

some time until the phonebook dat

of the

pair

ed mobil

e ar

e av

ailable in the infotain-

ment system. Depending on the volume of

data that has to be transferred, the process

may take several minutes. It may be necessa-

ry to confirm the data transmission on the

mobile phone.

The phonebook can also be viewed during a

telephone conversation.

If the name saved in the phonebook has an

assigned photo, it can be displayed on the list

next to the name. To do this, the option

Show pictures for contacts

in the Phone set

tings

cont

xt must be enabl

ed and your mo-

bile phone must support this functionality

(check the compatibility list)

›››

page 242,

Phone settings.

In the Telephone main menu, press the

Contacts

function button to access the con-

acts list.

Sel

ect a cont

act fr

om the list

●

Sear

ch the list and press on the desired

contact to make the call.

●

OR: If the contact has several numbers, first

press on the contact and then press on the

desired number for making the call.

Search for a contact in the search window

●

Press the Search

function button

›

Fig. 2

to open the search window.

Depending on the device, only contacts in the

phone's memory are loaded.

239

Infotainment System

●

Ent

er the name of the cont

act you ar

e l

ook

ing for in the window

›››

Fig. 246. While the

characters are being entered, a contact is

displayed in the input field.

●

The number of matching results is dis-

played to the right of the input field. Press the

function button to go to the list.

●

Search the list and press on the desired

contact to make the call.

Opening the detailed view of a contact

●

Press the function button 

›››

Fig. 245 lo-

cated next to the entry on the contacts list.

All the telephone numbers are displayed in

the detailed view, and where applicable, the

address recorded for the contact in question.

Read contact name

●

Press the function button  on the detailed

list if you want the voice control system to

read the name of the contact

Call a contact

●

Press the desired telephone number on the

detailed list to make the call.

●

Press the  icon to edit the number before

calling.

Send SMS to a contact

●

Press the function button  on the detailed

list

1 )

Start route guidance to a contact's ad-

dress

If the contact’s address data has been saved,

route guidance can be started to the con-

tact's address.

●

Press address data in the detailed view to

start route guidance.

Note

If you edit a number before calling, it will

not be saved in the phonebook but only

used for the call.

Short messages (SMS) menu

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 247

Short messages (SMS) menu.

If the mobile phone connected to the HFP

ofil

e al

so supports the SMS pr

ofil

e, a new

function button will appear in the upper left

corner of your Telephone menu, which will al-

low you to receive, view and send SMS mes-

sages through the infotainment system.

Whether or not the aforementioned functions

work correctly will depend on the compatibil-

ity of the connected mobile phone.

SMS menu function buttons

●

Press the SMS

function button from the T

ephone

main menu.

Not available for the Media System Colour

model.

Valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.

240

Operating modes

Function button: function

New text

message

To write and send an SMS (includes

the possibility of accessing preset

text t

emplates).

Inbox To open the received SMS folder.

Outbox To open the outbox folder. SMS

messages that have not been sent

are stored her

Sent To open the sent SMS folder.

Drafts To select a message that has been

stored but not sent.

Send contact

det

ail

o send the detail

s of a contact

from the contact list.

Possible submenu function buttons

Function button: function

READ OUT

For the voice control system to

read the text of the SMS.

Options Open the Options menu.

eply with

template

To sel

ect a text template from a

list.

Delete current

text message

The SMS is deleted fr

om the

Inbox folder.

Telephone

number

The sender's telephone number

is displayed.

FORWARD To forw

ard an SMS.

REPLY To reply to an incoming SMS.

Function button: function

Enter number

To enter a telephone number or

to select a recipient from the

cont

act list.

Press the Recipients

function

button to select multiple recipi-

ents.

Recipients

To select multiple recipients

from the contact list.

Delete T

o delete an SMS.

Calls Menu (call lists)

Fig. 248

Call lists menu.

●

Press the Call

function button from the

ephone

main menu.

●

ess the FIL

TER

function button.

●

Select the desired call list: All call

Missed call

, Call

or R

eceived calls

If a telephone number is stored in the phone

book

, the sav

ed name is displ

ayed on the call

list inst

ead of the number

If a photo is assigned to the name stored in

the phonebook, it can be displayed on the

call list next to the name

›››

page 242.

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning



Missed calls : Missed and unanswered calls.



Calls

: Dialled numbers.



Received calls : Received calls.

Note

The availability of the call lists will depend

on the mobile phone used.

241

Infotainment System

Quick dial keys

Fig. 249

Quick access to the phone book.

The speed dial keys

›

Fig. 2

can be

assigned a t

ephone number fr

om the

phone book

If a phot

o is assigned to the name stored in

the phone book, it can be displayed on the

speed dial key

›››

page 242

All speed dial keys have to be manually edi-

ted and will be assigned to a user profile. Up

to 12 contacts can be added to the speed di-

al keys.

Assign the speed dial keys

●

In the main Telephone menu, press a free

speed dial key.

●

Select the desired contact from the list. If

the selected contact has several phone num-

bers, select the number you want.

Edit assigned speed dial keys

●

Press and hold an occupied speed dial key

in the Telephone main menu until the Con-

tacts menu opens.

●

Select the desired contact from the list. If

the selected contact has several phone num-

bers, select the number you want.

●

To close the Contacts menu without apply-

ing the changes, press the BACK

function

butt

on.

Del

e assigned speed dial k

eys

●

The phone numbers st

ored in the speed di-

al buttons can be deleted in the menu User

profile settings > Manage favourites

›››

page 243.

Make a call with a speed dial button

●

Briefly press an assigned speed dial key in

the Telephone main menu to call the tele-

phone number stored in it.

Note

The contacts stored in the speed dial keys

are NOT updated automatically. If a con-

act stored on a speed dial key is modified

on the mobile phone, the speed dial key

must be assigned again.

Phone settings

In the Telephone main menu, press the

SETTINGS

function button.

Function button: function

Private mode : Private mode can only be activated

during an active call. When private mode is disabl

(by default), the call’s audio is managed through the

vehicle. When private mode is activated, call audio is

managed through the mobile phone.

Select mobile phone

: From the list, select the mobile

phone to be connected to the hands-free profile with

the infotainment system.

OR: Press Find telephone to connect a new mobile

phone.

Bluetooth® : Opens the menu Bluetooth® set-

tings

›››

page 243

User profile

: Open the User profile settings

›››

page 243

Not available for the Media System Colour

model.

242

Operating modes

Note

Some telephones require a restart to down-

load the last added contacts again.

Bluetooth

settings

In the main Telephone menu, press the

SETTINGS function button and then press the

Bluetooth® function button.

Function button: function

Bluetooth® : Press to deactivate Bluetooth

. All active

connections are disconnected.

Visibility : Activating and deactivating Bluetooth

visi-

bility.

Visible : Bluetooth

visibility is active.

Hidden : Bluetooth

visibility is deactivated.

Bluetooth

visibilit

y must be active for external

pairing of a Bluetooth

device with the infotain-

ment system. When a Bluetooth

audio device

is active and playing, visibility is automatically

set to Hidden.

Forename

: Display or change the Bluetooth

name of

the infotainment system. This will be the name shown

to other Bluetooth

devices.

Paired devices : Viewing paired devices. To disconnect

and connect Bluetooth

devices and Bluetooth

pro-

files.

Function button: function

Find devices : Search for visible Bluetooth

devices

that are within range of the infot

ainment system. The

maximum range is approx. 10 meters.

Bluetooth® Audio (A2DP/AVRCP)

: If an external audio

source is to be connected to the infotainment system

via Bluetooth

, this function must be active

›››

page 208.

User profile settings

In the main T

ephone menu

, pr

ess the

SETTINGS function button and then press the

User pr

ofil

e function button.

Function button: function

Manage favourites : Edit the speed dial keys.

Occupied speed dial key: Press to delete the

stored number.

Free speed dial key: Press to save a phone

book number on the speed dial key.

Mailbo

x number

: To enter or change the voice mailbox

number.

Sort by : To set the order of appearance of the phone

book entries (Forname and Surname or vice versa).

Import contacts

: Press to import the phone book of the

connected telephone or to updat

e the imported

phone book.

Function button: function

Reminder: remember your mobile phone : If a Bluetooth

connection is active with a mobile phone, the mes-

sage “Do not forget your mobile phone”

appears when the ignition is s

witched off.

Show pictures for contacts

: If the contacts in the

phone book have been saved with a photo, it can be

displayed on the speed dial keys, call lists and

phone book.

Depending on the mobile phone.

Note

Some telephones require a restart to down-

load the last added contacts again.

243

Infotainment System

Multimedia

USB/AUX-IN input

Fig. 250

Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Fig. 251

Rear part of the centre console: USB

connect

ors.

Depending on the special characteristics and

the country, the v

ehicl

e may hav

e a

USB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be f

ound in the

orage compartment area of the centre

console

›››

Fig. 250.

Depending on the equipment and the coun-

try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-

tions exclusively for charging or as a power

socket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of

the console, between the front seats

›››

Fig. 251.

Connectivity Box* / Wireless

Charger*

Fig. 252 Related video

Fig. 253 In the centre console: pad for the mo-

bile phone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes different func-

tions that will help t

o use your mobil

e de

vice

They ar

e the “Wireless Charger” and the

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”.

The Wireless Charger only features the

“Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger”

The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devi-

ces with Qi

technology to be charged with-

out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

●

Place your mobile device in the middle of

the pad with the screen facing up

›››

Fig. 253

›››

Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-

bile phone wirelessly.

244

Operating modes

Make sure there are no objects between the

pad and the mobil

e phone

The mobil

e phone will st

art char

ging auto-

matically. For further information about

whether your mobile device uses Qi technol-

ogy, check your phone's user manual or visit

the SEAT website.

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”

The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you to

reduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoy

better reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended that

you pair the system and the mobile using

Bluetooth

and place it on the Connectivity

Box pad, for the best reception without hav-

ing to handle the mobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle's

external aerial:

●

Place your mobile device in the middle of

the pad with the screen facing up

›››

Fig. 253

›››

Mak

e sur

e ther

e ar

e no ob

jects between the

pad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically be

ready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING

●

The mobile phone may heat up due to the

wireless char

ging. Think about this before

you pick it up, and take care when removing

it.

●

There must be no metallic or other ob-

jects between the mobile phone and the

housing, to pre

vent the functionality of the

Connectivity Box from being affected.

Note

●

our mobile device must support the Qi

inductiv

e charging interface standard for

proper operation.

●

The charging time and the temperature

vary in accordance with the device used.

●

The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.

●

Qi technology does not allow you to

charge more than one mobile device simul-

taneously.

●

No improvement in reception can be

guaranteed if there is more than one mo-

bile phone on the pad.

●

You are advised to keep the engine run-

ning to guarantee proper wireless charg-

ing.

●

When a telephone with Qi technology is

connected by USB, it will be charged by the

means specified by the manufacturer.

245

Driving

t and driving

ting and st

opping the

engine

Ignition lock

Fig. 254

Ignition key positions.

Key positions

›

Fig. 254

Ignition off

. K

ey can be removed from the

vehicle.

Ignition is switched on. Preheating occurs

in diesel vehicles .

Starting the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel

●

Lock the steering wheel: remove the key

om the ignition and t

urn the wheel until it

ocks. Depending on the country, in v

ehicl

with automatic transmission, in order to re-

move the key, move the gear shift to the P po-

sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block-

ing key and release it.

●

Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into

the ignition and turn it at the same time as the

steering wheel in the direction indicated by

the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-

ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Start-Stop system*

If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop

system* switches off the engine, the ignition

remains switched on.

Automatic transmission: before leaving the

vehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch-

ed off and the selector lever is in position P.

WARNING

●

Always remov

e the key from the ignition

when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a

short period. This is especially important if

children or disabled people are left alone

in the vehicle. They could accidentally

start the engine or operate electrical

equipment, resulting in an accident.

●

The ignition key must NOT be removed

from the lock until the vehicle comes to a

standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be

immediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Note

●

If it is difficult t

o turn the ignition key to

the position

, move the steering wheel to

both sides to release the steering l

ock.

●

If the vehicle battery is disconnected and

reconnected, the key must remain in the

position

for around 5 seconds before

starting up.

●

Vehicl

es with automatic transmission,de-

pending on the country, after switching off

the ignition, you can only remove the igni-

tion key if the selector lever is in position

“P” (parking lock). Next, the selector lever

is locked.

246

Start and driving

Ignition and start button*

Fig. 255

In the lower part of the centre con-

sol

e: st

art butt

on.

The engine can be started with a start button

(Pr

ess & Driv

e). T

o do so

, ther

e must be a valid

key inside the vehicle in the area of the front

or rear seats, or on the centre console.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access

›››

page 100 system, the engine can also be

started with the key in the luggage compart-

ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting the

vehicle activates the electronic lock on the

steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually

If you only want to switch on the ignition

(without starting the engine), briefly press the

start button once without pressing the brake

pedal or the clutch pedal

›››

The start button text S

T ENGINE S

flash-

es lik

e a heartbeat when the syst

em is r

eady

or the ignition t

o be turned on or off.

Automatic ignition disconnection

If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key

with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni-

tion does not switch off automatically. The ig-

nition is switched off by pressing the lock but-

ton on the remote control  or by pressing

the sensor surface on the door lever

›››

Fig. 100.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on

vehicles with the Start-Stop system

The ignition is switched off automatically

when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-

matic engine shutdown is active, if:

●

The driver's seat belt is not fastened,

●

the driver does not step on any pedal,

●

the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if

the dipped beam  is on, the side light re-

mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is

enough charge in the battery). If the driver

locks the vehicle or manually turns off the

light, the side light goes out.

Engine restart feature

If no key is detected inside the vehicle after

the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-

onds to restart it. A warning will display on the

dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to

start the engine without a valid key inside the

vehicle.

WARNING

When switching on the ignition, do not

press the brake or clut

ch pedal, otherwise

the engine could start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-

out due care, this may cause accidents and

serious injury.

●

Never l

eave any key inside the vehicle

when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-

authorised person could lock the vehicle,

start the engine or connect the ignition and

operate any of the electrical equipment.

Note

●

Before leaving the vehicl

e, always dis-

connect the ignition and, if appropriate,

take into account the instructions on the

screen of the dash panel.

●

If the vehicle is stationary for a long time

with the engine off and the ignition on, the

vehicle battery might be discharged and it

might not be possible to start the engine.

247

Driving

●

In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until

the warning light



›››

page 248 goes off

before starting the engine.

●

If during the STOP phase you press the

START ENGINE STOP

button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.

●

If the indication is displ

ayed on the in-

strument panel display “Start-Stop system

deactivated: Start the engine manually”,

the START ENGINE STOP

button will blink.

Starting the engine

Before starting the engine

●

Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the

gear l

er in neutr

al, pr

ess the clutch pedal

and keep it it in this position until the engine

starts.

●

Vehicles with automatic transmission: put

the lever in position P or N.

Vehicles with ignition locks

●

Turn the key to position

›››

Fig. 254

. Pre-

heating occurs in diesel v

ehicl



●

eep turning the key to position

›››

Fig. 254

without stepping on the accel-

●

Once the engine st

arts, r

elease the key.

When it is released, the key returns to position

●

If the engine does not st

art, st

op and w

ait

or ar

ound 1 minute to try again.

Vehicles with start buttons

●

Press and hold the brake pedal until the en-

gine starts.

●

Press the starter button

›››

Fig. 255; do not

press the accelerator. There needs to be a

valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to

start. After starting the engine, the lighting of

the START ENGINE STOP

button changes to

eady lighting, indicating that the engine has

art

ed.

●

Once the engine st

arts, r

elease the start-up

button.

●

If the engine does not start, stop and wait

for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,

perform an emergency start

›››

page 250.

Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer

than usual to start on cold days. During pre-

heating, the warning lamp  remains lit. To

avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-

tery, do not use any other major electrical

equipment while the glow plugs are pre-

heating.

The preheating time depends on the coolant

and exterior temperatures. With the engine at

operating temperature, or at outside temper-

atures above +8°C, the warning lamp  will

light up for about one second. This means

that the engine starts immediately.

Starting a diesel engine after having run

out of fuel

If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it

may take longer than normal (up to one mi-

nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.

This is because the fuel system must elimi-

nate air first.

WARNING

Do not keep the engine running in confined

spaces, as there is a danger of poisoning.

●

The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-

oxide

, an odourless and colourless poison-

ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-

ness and death.

WARNING

Do not get out of the vehicle with the en-

gine running, especially if a gear is engag-

ed. The vehicle could then suddenly mov

or something strange could happen that

would cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING

Never use cold start sprays, they could ex-

plode or cause the engine to run at high

revs. Doing this risks injury.

CAUTION

●

The starter motor or the engine may be

damaged if you try t

o start the engine while

248

Start and driving

driving or if you restart it immediately after

switching it off.

●

When the engine is cold, you shoul

avoid high engine speeds, driving at full

throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk

of engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm-up the engine by running the

engine with the v

ehicle stationary. Star

t off

immediately, driving gently. This helps the

engine reach operating temperature faster

and reduces emissions.

Note

●

Electrical components with a high power

consumption are s

witched off temporarily

when the engine starts.

●

When starting with a cold engine, noise

levels may briefly increase. This is quite

normal, and no cause for concern.

●

When the outside temperature is below

+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some

smoke may appear under the vehicle when

the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

●

In vehicles with a natural gas engine

(CNG), by default, the engine starts with

gas, with the exception of the following ca-

ses:

–

Coolant temperature below -10°C.

–

After refuelling CNG.

Turning off the engine

●

Bring the vehicle to a full stop

›››

●

With manual transmission, press the clutch

all the way down. If the vehicle is aut

omatic,

set the selector lever to the P position.

●

Apply the electronic parking brake.

●

Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key to

position

›››

Fig. 254

●

Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly press the

start-up button

›

››

Fig. 255.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not switch off after briefly

pressing the starter button, an emergency

disconnect will be required:

●

Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-

onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-

ond

››

›

in Ignition and start button* on

page 2

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehi-

cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-

ol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-

jury.

●

The airbags and belt tensioners do not

work when the ignition is switched off.

●

The brake servo does not work with the

engine off. Therefore, you need to press the

break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

●

Power steering does not w

ork when the

engine is not running. You need more

strength to steer when the engine is switch-

ed off.

●

If the ignition is switched off, the steering

column could be locked, making it impossi-

ble to control the vehicle.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the

steering could suddenly lock, making it im-

possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-

dent!

WARNING

Always take the key with you when you

leave the vehicle

. This is particularly impor-

tant if there are children in the vehicle, as

they might otherwise be able to start the

engine or use power-operated equipment

(e.g. the electric windows), which could

cause injuries.

CAUTION

●

If the vehicle is stopped and the Star

Stop system* switches off the engine, the

ignition remains switched on. Make sure

that the ignition is switched off before leav-

ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could

discharge.

●

If the engine has been driven at high

speed for a prolonged period of time, it

may overheat when turned off. To avoid en-

gine damage, allow the engine to run for

249

Driving

approximately two minutes in neutral be-

fore switching it off

Note

After the engine is switched off the radiator

an may run on for up to 10 minutes, e

ven if

the ignition is switched off. It is also possi-

ble that the fan turns itself on once more if

the coolant temperature increases due to

the heat accumulated in the engine com-

partment or due to its prolonged exposure

to solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-

thorised persons fr

om driving the v

ehicl

Inside the k

ey there is a chip that deactivates

the electronic immobiliser automatically

when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated

again automatically as soon as you pull the

key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with

the “Keyless Access” system, the key has to

be outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in-

strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle

cannot be started.

The engine can only be started using a genu-

ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Note

A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-

ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 256

On the right of the steering column:

emer

gency st

art.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,

an emer

gency st

art

-up will be r

equir

ed. The

relevant message will appear in the dash

panel display. This may happen when, for ex-

ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

●

Immediately after pushing the starter but-

ton, keep the key next to the right trim of the

steering column

›››

Fig. 256, as close as pos-

sible to the Kessy logo.

●

The ignition connects and the engine starts

automatically.

Instructions for the driver on the in-

strument panel display

Press the clutch

This message appears on v

ehicl

es with a

manual gearbo

x if the driv

er tries t

o start the

engine without having the clutch pedal

pressed. The engine will only start if you press

the clutch pedal.

Press the brake

This message appears on vehicles with an

automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start

the engine without having the brake pedal

pressed.

Select N or P

This message appears if you try to start or

stop the engine when the selector lever of the

automatic gearbox is not in position P or N.

The engine can only be started and stopped

in those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle can

move; doors can only close in po-

sition P.

For safety reasons, this driver message ap-

pears and an audible warning sounds if the

selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not

in position P after you switch off the ignition.

Move the selector lever to the P position, oth-

erwise the vehicle could move.

250

Start and driving

Gear change: selector lever in the

drive position!

This driv

er message is displ

ayed when the

sel

ect

or l

ever is not in the position P when the

driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzing

sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po-

sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Ignition is switched on

This driver message is displayed and a buz-

zer is sounded when the driver door is

opened with the ignition switched on.

“My Beat” function

For vehicles with a convenience key there is

the “My Beat” function. This f

eat

e pr

vides

an additional indication of the vehicle ignition

system.

When entering the vehicle, the start button

›››

Fig. 255 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine start

button flashes. With the ignition is switched

off, the start button goes off after a few sec-

onds.

With the engine running, the start button light

stays on, indicating that the engine is running.

The time elapsed between the moment the

user starts the engine with the start button

button and the lighting changes from flashing

to fixed will depend on specific engine size

characteristics. When the start button is used

to stop the engine, the button starts flashing

again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the

“My Beat” function also offers additional in-

formation:

●

When the engine stops during the Stop

phase, the light of the start button button

stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains

active even though the engine is off.

●

When the engine cannot be started again

with the Start-Stop system,

›››

page 251, and

needs to be started manually, the start but-

ton flashes to indicate this situation.

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-

gine shutdown is active.



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has been

disconnected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-

ment panel display

Start-Stop system deactivated.

Start the engine manually

This indication for the driver shows that the

art-Stop system cannot start the engine

again.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Function

not available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take

the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-

paired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel

and r

educe CO

emissions.

In St

art

-St

op mode

, the engine will automati-

cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is

stopping. The ignition remains switched on.

The engine automatically switches back on

when required.

251

Driving

In this scenario, the light of the  







button stays lit

When the ignition is s

wit

ched on, the St

art

op function is automatically activated.

In the Easy Connect system you can find

more information about the Start-Stop sys-

tem: press the button    > Vehicle >

View > Vehicle status.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

●

When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put

it into neutral and release the clutch pedal.

The engine will switch off. The warning lamp

 will light up. The engine can be stopped

before stopping completely (approximately 7

km/h).

●

When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-

gine will start up again. The warning lamp will

switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

●

Brake until it is stopped, and keep your foot

on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold*

system so that the vehicle remains braked.

The engine will switch off. The warning lamp

 will appear in the display. The engine can

be stopped before stopping completely (ap-

proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the ve-

hicle's gearbox).

●

When you take your foot off the brake ped-

al the engine will start up again. The warning

lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Auto

Hold* system, when the system is active, the

engine will not start if you remove your foot

from the brake pedal. The car starts when

you press the accelerator pedal.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop

mode

●

The driver door must be closed.

●

The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

●

The bonnet must be closed.

●

The engine has reached operating temper-

ature.

●

The reverse gear must not be engaged.

●

The vehicle must not be on a very steep

slope.

The engine does not turn off for various

reasons

Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri-

fies whether certain conditions are met. The

engine does not switch off, in the following

situations for example:

●

The engine has not yet reached the re-

quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.

●

The temperature selected on the climate

control has not been reached.

●

The interior temperature is very high/low.

●

Defrost function button activated

›››

page 155.

●

The parking aid* is switched on.

●

The battery is very low.

●

The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-

ing turned.

●

If there is a danger of misting.

●

After engaging reverse gear.

●

In case of a very steep gradient.

 is shown on the instrument panel display,

as well as on the driver information system*

.

The engine starts by itself

When stopped, the normal system mode may

be interrupted in the following situations. The

engine restarts by itself without involvement

from the driver.

●

The interior temperature differs from the

temperature selected on the climate control.

●

Defrost function button activated

›››

page 155.

●

The brake has been pressed several times

consecutively.

Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.

252

Start and driving

●

The batt

ery is t

oo l

●

High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto-

matic gearbox

The engine stops when the selector lever is in

the positions P, D, N and S

in addition to

when in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lev-

er in P, the engine will also remain switched

off when you take your foot off the brake

pedal. In order to start the engine up again

the accelerator must be pressed, or another

gear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-

ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the engine

from accidentally starting when passing

through R.

Additional information about vehicles with

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will

start up again in certain operating conditions

if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle

ahead drives off again.

WARNING

●

Never switch the engine off until the v

ehi-

cle is stationary. The operation of the brake

and steering will not be fully guaranteed.

More force will be needed to turn the steer-

ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an

accident and even serious injuries.

●

To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-

Stop system is switched off when working

in the engine compartment

›››

page 254.

CAUTION

The Start-Stop system must always be

switched off when driving through flooded

eas

›››

page 269.

Note

●

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,

you can contr

ol whether the engine should

switch off or not by reducing or increasing

the brake force applied. While the vehicle

remains stopped, the engine will not stop if

the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic

jams with frequent stopping and starting

for example. As soon as strong pressure is

applied to the brake pedal, the engine will

stop.

●

When stopped, the brake pedal must be

kept pr

essed to ensure that the vehicle

does not move.

●

If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-

box, it can be directly started up again by

immediately pressing the clutch pedal.

●

With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is

placed in position D, N or S after engaging

reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards

direction must be reached for the system to

be in a status to stop the engine.

Except in the CUPRA model. In this case, when

you place the selector le

ver in the S position or in

the Tiptronic mode, the Start/Stop system will

prevent the engine from switching off.

253

Driving

Manually connecting and discon-

necting the St

-St

op syst

Fig. 257

Centre console: Start-stop system

butt

on.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can

wit

ch it off manually.

●

o manually s

wit

ch on/off the Start-Stop

system, press the  button

›››

Fig. 257.

The button symbol  remains lit up yellow

when the system is switched off.

Note

The system switches on every time the en-

gine is turned off voluntarily.

Manual gearbox

Changing gears

Fig. 258

Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed

manual gearbo

The position of the gears is indicated on the

gearbo

x l

›

››

Fig. 258.

●

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot

right down.

●

Move the gearbox lever to the required po-

sition.

●

Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is

stopped.

●

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot

right down.

●

With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it

downwards, move it to the left as far as it will

go and then forwards to select reverse

›››

Fig. 258

●

Release the clutch.

Changing do

wn gears

Whil

e driving, changing do

wn a gear must al

ays be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-

rectly below and when the engine speed is

not too high

›››

. Changing down while by-

passing one or v

arious gears at high speeds

or at high engine speeds can damage the

clut

ch and the gearbo

x, e

en if the clutch

pedal remains depressed

›››

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will

start to mov

e as soon as a gear is engaged

and the clutch released. This also happens

if the electronic parking brake is switched

on.

●

Never engage reverse gear when the ve-

hicle is moving.

WARNING

If the gear is changed down inappropriate-

ly by selecting a gear that is too low

, you

may lose control of the vehicle, causing an

accident and serious injuries.

254

Start and driving

CAUTION

When travelling at high speeds or at high

engine speeds, selecting a gear that is too

low can cause consider

able damage to the

clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-

cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held

and it does not engage.

CAUTION

To prevent damage and avoid premature

wear, please observe the f

ollowing:

●

Do not rest your hand on the gear lever

while driving. The pressure applied by your

hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector

forks.

●

Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-

al; although the pressure may seem insig-

nificant, it can cause the premature wear of

the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you

do not need to change gear.

●

Always ensure that the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped before engaging the re-

verse gear.

●

Always press the clutch to the floor when

changing gears.

●

Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on

hills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-

omatic gearbo

Intr

oduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-

ly controlled manual gearbox. Tor

que be-

tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-

mitted via two independent clutches. They

replace the torque converter found on con-

ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for

smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-

hicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver to

change gears manually

›››

page 257,

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*.

Control lamps



It lights up green

The brake is not pressed.

To select a gear range, pr

ess the brake pedal.



Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged.

The vehicle is prev

ented from moving forwards. En-

gage the selector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Fig. 259

Selector lever lock.

The selector lever position is shown when the

corr

esponding sign lights up

. With the sel

ec-

or l

ever in the manual gearbox positions M, D

and S, the engaged gear is also shown on the

display.



– Parking lock

When the lever is put in this position, the drive

wheels are locked. The lever must only be put

in P when the vehicle is stationary

›››

o put the l

er in

P or take it out of P , the

locking button must be pressed and held and

the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.



– Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when

the vehicle is stationary and the engine is

idling

›››

255

Driving

To move the lever to position R, the l

ock but

on must be pr

essed and hel

d while pressing

the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse

lights come on when the lever is in the R posi-

tion with the ignition on.



– Neutral

With the lever in this position, the gear is in

neutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever from

N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at

speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)

›››



– P

ermanent f

orw

d driv

e position

The lever in the D/S position enables the

gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or

sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S,

move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever

again will select normal mode D. The selec-

ted driving mode is shown on the instrument

panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the

best gear ratio. This depends on the engine

load, the road speed and the dynamic gear

control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for a

sporty driving style. This setting makes use of

the engine's maximum power output. When

accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea-

ble.

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun-

tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch

tiptronic mode

›››

page 257, to adapt the

gears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lock

In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range

from being engaged, and prevents the vehi-

cle from moving off accidentally.

To release the gear lever lock, press and hold

the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the

same time, press the lever lock in the direc-

tion of the arrow

›››

Fig. 259.

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is

in positions P or N the following indication will

be shown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrake

while selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly

through position N (e.g. when shifting from R

to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to

“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if

it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-

gages automatically if the brake pedal is not

pressed and the lever is in position N for more

than about one second at a speed of less

than 5 km/h (3 mph).

Safety interlock for ignition key

Once the ignition has been turned off, the key

may be removed only if the gear selector is in

position P. While the key is not in the ignition,

the selector lever is locked in position P.

WARNING

●

Take care not to pr

ess the accelerator

pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-

hicle could start moving immediately (in

some cases even if the parking brake is en-

gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.

●

Never move the lever to R or P when driv-

ing. Failure to follow this instruction could

result in an accident or failure.

●

With lever in any position (except P), the

foot brake must be pushed down whenever

the engine is running. This is because an

automatic gearbox still transmits power

even at idling speed.

●

While you are selecting a gear and the

vehicle is stopped with the engine running,

do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident.

●

As a driver you should never leave your

vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is

engaged. Switch on the electronic parking

brake and select the parking lock (P).

Note

●

If the lever is mov

ed accidentally to N

when driving, release the accelerator and

let the engine speed drop to idling before

selecting gear range D or S again.

●

Should the power supply to the lever be

interrupted in position P, it will not be

256

Start and driving

possible to move the lever. If this should

happen the manual release can be used

›››

page 262.

Note

●

If the l

ever lock does not engage

, there is

a fault. The transmission is interrupted to

prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov-

ing. Follow the procedure below in order for

the lever lock to engage again:

–

With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again.

–

With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the lever to posi-

tion P or N and subsequently engage a

gear.

●

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-

cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-

ceed to the next mode:

–

When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may not

have the gear range correctly engag-

ed. Press the brake pedal and engage

the gear range again.

–

If the vehicle still does not move in the

required direction, there is a system

malfunction. Seek specialist assistance

and have the system checked.

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*

Fig. 260

Lever in the Tiptronic position

Fig. 261

Steering wheel: automatic transmis-

sion l

ers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option to

change gears manually.

When you change t

o the T

iptr

onic pr

amme, the vehicle remains in the currently

selected gear. This is possible as long as the

system is not changing gear automatically

due to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector lever

It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,

both when the vehicle is stopped and while

driving.

●

Starting from the D/S position, move the

lever to the right. The instrument panel will

show whether the lever is in manual or Tip-

tronic mode (e.g. M4).

●

Push the lever forwards

or backwards

–

to move up or down a gear

›

Fig. 260

●

o exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the

left.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel

paddles*

The gearshift paddles can be used when the

selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic)

positions.

●

Press the gearshift paddle

to select a

higher gear

›

Fig. 261

●

ess the gearshift paddle

–

to select a

er gear

●

o exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-

hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-

proximately 1 second or move the lever to the

left.

257

Driving

If the paddles are not operated for some time

and the l

er is not in the T

iptr

onic selection

position, it will automatically exit from Tip-

tronic mode.

CAUTION

●

When accelerating, if a higher gear is not

selected, it will aut

omatically change

shortly before reaching the maximum per-

mitted RPM.

●

Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-

tem will not change until it detects that the

engine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-

cally as the v

ehicl

e mo

es.

The engine can only st

art with the selector

lever in position P or N. At low temperatures,

below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can only

start with the selector lever in position P.

Driving down hills

Under certain circumstances it may be ad-

vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-

lect the gear manually according to driving

conditions

›››

Stop/Park

On l

el gr

ound, just use the l

ever to engage

position P. On slopes you should first apply

the parking brake and then set the lever to P.

This makes it easier to remove the lever from

position P when starting.

If the driver door is opened and the lever is

not in position P, the vehicle could move. The

following warning is displayed on the instru-

ment panel:  Gear change: selector

lever in the drive position!. Addi-

tionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhill

Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,

apply the electronic parking brake

›››

Do not accel

e whil

e a r

ange of gears is

engaged to prevent the car from rolling

downhill

›››

ting off uphill with the Aut

o Hol

d func-

tion

●

Once you hav

e engaged a gear, take your

foot off the brake pedal and gently press the

accelerator.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold

function

●

Pull on the electronic parking brake button.

●

Once you have engaged a gear, gently

press the accelerator and pull on the elec-

tronic parking brake button.

Back-up programme

If all the positions of the lever are shown over

a light background on the instrument panel

display, there is a system fault and the auto-

matic gearbox will operate in with the backup

programme. It is still possible to drive the ve-

hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se-

lected range of gears. Driving in reverse

gear may not be possible.

Kick-down

The kick-down system provides maximum ac-

celeration when the gear selector lever is in

the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right

down, the automatic gearbox will shift down

to a lower gear, depending on road speed

and engine speed. This takes advantage of

the maximum acceleration of the vehicle

›››

The upshift t

o the ne

xt higher gear is del

ayed

until the engine r

eaches maximum rpm.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Selec-

tor lever positions on page 256

●

Never allow the brake to rub and do not

use the brake pedal too often or for long

258

Start and driving

periods, as the brakes can overheat. This

reduces the braking power

, increases the

braking distance or even causes a brake

system fault.

●

If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-

cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or

parking brake.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-

pery or w

et, the kick-down feat

ure could

cause the driving wheels to spin, which

could result in skidding.

CAUTION

●

If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do

not att

empt to stop it from rolling by de-

pressing the accelerator when a gear has

been selected. This could cause overheat-

ing and damage the automatic gearbox.

●

If you allow the vehicle to roll with the

lever in position N and the engine off, the

automatic gearbox will be damaged by

lack of lubrication.

●

In certain driving situations or traffic con-

ditions, the gears could overheat and be

damaged! If the warning lamp  lights up,

stop the vehicle as soon as you can and

wait for the gearbox to cool

›

››

page 261.

●

If the gearbox operates with the backup

programme, take the vehicle to a special-

ised workshop and have the fault repaired

without delay.

Launch-control program

3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of more

than 125 kW, and petrol of more than 140 kW

The Launch-control programme enables

maximum acceleration from a standstill.

Condition: the engine must have reached op-

erating temperature and the steering wheel

must not be turned.

The engine speed for Launch-control is differ-

ent on petrol and diesel engines.

To use the Launch-control you must discon-

nect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the

Easy Connect system menu

›››

page 92. The

warning lamp  will stay switched on or will

flash slowly depending on whether or not the

vehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-

tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and

the corresponding te

xt message Stability

control deactivated (temporary) appears

on the instrument panel to indicate the deac-

tivation status.

●

With the engine running, switch off traction

control (ASR)

›››

page 298

●

Press the brake pedal with your left foot

and hold it down for at least one second.

●

Turn the selector lever to position S or Tip-

tronic, or else select the sport driving mode

from the SEAT Drive Profile*

›››

page 264.

●

With your right foot, press the accelerator

down to the full throttle or kick-down position.

The engine speed will stabilise at about

3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about

2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

●

Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The

vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING

●

Always adapt your driving style t

o the

traffic conditions.

●

Only use the Launch control programme

when road and traffic conditions permit,

Vehicles without a driver information system:

the warning lamp flashes slo

wly. Vehicles with a

driver information system: the warning lamp re-

mains on.

259

Driving

and make sure your manner of driving and

accelerating the vehicle does not incon-

enience or endanger other road users.

●

Make sure that the ESC remains switched

on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC

are deactivated, the wheels may start to

spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk

of accident!

●

After moving off, the ESC “sport” mode

should be deactivated by briefly pressing

the   button.

Note

●

After using the Launch control pro-

amme, the temperature in the gearbox

may have increased considerably. In this

case, the programme could be disabled for

several minutes. The programme can be

used again after the cooling phase.

●

Accelerating with the launch control pro-

gramme places a heavy load on all parts of

the vehicle. This can result in increased

wear and tear.

Downhill assistant*

Downhill speed control is activated when the

er is in the

D/S

position and the brake is

applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag-

ed.

The assistant attempts to maintain the speed

at which the vehicle was travelling when the

brake was applied, within logical limits. It may

be necessary to correct the speed by press-

ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as far

as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep

slopes you have to switch to tiptronic mode

and change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take

advantage of engine braking and take the

load off the brake system.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as

soon as the road levels out again or you press

the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*

›››

page 270, downhill speed control is acti-

vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING

The downhill speed control cannot defy the

laws of physics. Therefore

, speed cannot

be maintained constant in all situations. Al-

ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certain

dist

ances without using the accel

which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-

ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.

Activation of the inertia mode

Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less

than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130

km / h (12 and 80 mph).

●

Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru-

ment cluster , the engaged gear and cur-

rent consumption will disappear and the

word Inertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage and

the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of

the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the

engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode

●

Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertia

mode, simply remove your foot from the ac-

celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged

section with less energy) and inertia discon-

nection (= shorter section without the need

for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption

and emission balance.

If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile

›››

page 264, the inertia mode can be activa-

ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. In

Eco mode, it is activated whenever the oper-

ating conditions are met, regardless of the

260

Start and driving

smoothness with which the foot is removed

om the accel

WARNING

●

If the inertia mode has been switched on,

tak

e into account, when approaching an

obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-

ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!

●

When using inertia mode while travelling

down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:

risk of accident!

●

If other users drive your vehicle, warn

them about inertia mode.

Note

●

The driver message Inertia is only dis-

played with the current consumption. In in-

tia mode the gear will no longer be dis-

played (for example “D” or “E” will appear

instead of “D7” or “E7”).

●

The inertia mode will be automatically

disconnected on gradients steeper than

15%.

●

In the case of the TDI, TGI and 2.0l TSI en-

gines, the inertia mode will only work in the

Eco driving mode.

Indications on the instrument panel

displ

Clutch

 Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and coul

d be

damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to

cool with the engine at idling speed and the

selector lever in position P. When the warning

lamp and the driver message switch off, have

the fault corrected by a specialised work-

shop without delay. If they do not turn off, do

not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-

tance.

Faults in the gearbox

 Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle

and place the lever in the posi-

tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-

ing. Seek specialist assistance.

 Gearbox: System fault! You may

continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised

workshop without delay.

 Gearbox: System fault! You can

continue driving with restric-

tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop

and have the fault repaired.



Gearbox: System fault! You can

continue driving in D until

switching off the engine

Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special-

ist assistance.

 Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your

driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When

the warning lamp switches off, you can con-

tinue driving in a normal manner.

 Gearbox: press the brake and en-

gage a gear again.

If the warning was caused by the tempera-

ture of the gearbox, this driver message will

be displayed when the gearbox has cooled

again.

261

Driving

Manual release of the selector lev-

Fig. 262

Gear selector lever: manual release

om the parking position.

In the event of a power failure when starting

.g. dischar

ged batt

ery), the l

ver will remain

locked in position P. To move it to position N to

move the vehicle, there is an emergency re-

lease device under the centre console, on the

right side. Releasing the selector lever re-

quires a certain degree of practical skill.

Removing the cover from the selector lev-

●

Apply the electronic parking brake 

›››

●

Carefully pull the corners of the selector

er boot and twist it up

ards over the lever

handle.

Releasing the selector lever

●

Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press

the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed

down

›››

Fig. 262.

●

Press the lock button on the selector lev-

er and move it to position N.

●

After completing the emergency release,

reattach the selector lever boot to the gear-

box console.

WARNING

Do not move the lever from position P if the

parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you

still think the car could mov

e, press the

brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could

move in an unforeseen way and cause an

accident or serious injury.

Gear-change recommenda-

tion

Sel

ecting the optimal gear

Fig. 263

Instrument panel: gear-change indi-

cat

or (manual gearbo

x).

Depending on the equipment on the instru-

ment panel scr

een, a r

ecommendation is

sho

wn with the gear that shoul

d be engaged

o optimise consumption.

On vehicles with automatic transmission, the

lever must be in Tiptronic mode

›››

page 257.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-

mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be

displayed.

262

Start and driving

Display Meaning



Optimum gear.

  

Changing to a higher gear is rec-

ommended.

  

Changing to a lower gear is rec-

ommended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” of

the particulate filter

When the e

xhaust system detects that the

particulate filter is close to saturation, this

system’s self-cleaning function recommends

the optimal gear for that function

›››

page 330.

WARNING

The gear change recommendation is an

auxiliary function and in no case should be

a substitute for car

eful driving.

●

Responsibility for selecting the correct

gear, depending on the circumstances,

rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environment

Selecting the correct gear can help to save

fuel.

Note

The recommended gear indication turns off

when the clutch pedal is pressed or when

the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi-

tion.

Steering

Information relating to diff

erent ve-

hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adapts

electronically to the speed of the car

, torque

and steering angle.

Even if the power steering fails or the engine

is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate

the steering wheel as long as the key remains

in the ignition lock, but more force must be

applied.

Progressive steering

Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may or

may not incorporate a progressive steering

system.

In city traffic you do not need to turn so much

on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressive

steering transmits, for example, in bends, a

sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy-

namic driving sensation.

Steering assist

This help assists the driver in critical situa-

tions. It recommends turning the st

eering

wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre

(counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid

skidding

›››

WARNING

Steering assist helps the driver in critical

situations. The driver is the person who has

to control the v

ehicle's steering at all times.

Control lamp



It lights up red

Faulty steering.

Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as

possible and in a saf

e manner.

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have

the fault repaired as soon as possible.



It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation.

Drive carefully to a specialised workshop t

o have the

steering checked.

If the warning light does not come on again after re-

starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is

not necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and r

connected.

Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).

263

Driving



It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed.

When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-

tions.

OR:

The steering column does not unlock or lock.

Remove the k

ey from the ignition switch and recon-

nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru-

ment panel display.

Do not continue driving if the steering column re-

mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek

specialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a few

seconds when the ignition is s

wit

ched on. It

shoul

d go out once the engine is st

art

ed.

WARNING

Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-

es.

●

If the warning lamps and the correspond-

ing messages are ignored, the vehicle may

all in traffic, causing serious damage or

accidents and injuries.

●

Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity

and in a safe place.

SEAT Driving modes (SEAT

Driv

e Pr

ofil

e)*

Intr

oduction

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to

choose between the Eco, Normal, Sport and

Individual profiles and modes, which modi-

fy the behaviour of various v

ehicle functions,

providing different driving experiences. In the

FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped with

dynamic chassis control (DCC), the Comfort

profile is also available.

In the Leon Cupra model the four profiles are

Comfort, Sport, Cupra and Individual.

The Individual profile can be configured

according to personal preferences. The other

profiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-

hicl

, SEAT Driv

e Pr

ofil

e can operate on the

following functions:

Engine

Depending on the profile selected, the engine

responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac-

celerator being pressed. When Eco mode is

selected, the Start-stop function is activated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the

gear change timing is changed to put the

changes at higher or lower revolutions. Eco

mode activates the Inertia function, thereby

reducing consumption. The rest of the driving

modes will activate the inertia use function

when the selector lever is not in the S posi-

tion, depending on how the accelerator ped-

al is released

›››

page 260. When the vehicle

is turned on again, the function is activated

by default to reduce consumption.

With a manual gearbox, the Eco mode

changes the gear changes recommenda-

tions to facilitate more efficient driving.

Dynamic chassis control (DCC)

DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb-

ers to the condition of the road and current

driving conditions, according to the pre-set

programme.

In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-

ing message is displayed on the instrument

In the Leon Cupra model, the Eco mode can be

selected through the Individual

profile by setting

the engine characteristic to Eco.

264

Start and driving

screen Fault: shock absorber regula-

tion

eering

er st

eering becomes more robust in

Sport mode to enable a sportier driving style.

In the Leon Cupra the power steering be-

comes more robust in Cupra mode.

Air conditioning

In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate

in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-

sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

The ACC’s acceleration and braking mode

varies according to the driving profile

›››

page 276.

Electronic self-locking differential

The self-locking differential adapts its behav-

iour depending on the driving profile chosen.

Normal mode or Cupra mode can be selec-

ted to prioritise improved traction in sport

driving.

Setting the driving profile

Fig. 264

Centre console: MODE button. You

can sel

ect fr

om Normal

, Sport, Eco

, Comf

ort

and Individual.

Fig. 265 Centre console: Cupra Drive Profile

butt

on. Y

ou can sel

ect fr

om Comf

ort, Sport, Cu-

pra and Individual

You can select the required mode either by

epeat

edly pr

essing sel

ection butt

›››

Fig. 264,

›››

Fig. 265, or on the touch

screen, in the menu that opens when the

above button is pressed.

An icon on the touch screen provides infor-

mation about the active mode.

Button  lights up when the active mode is

different to Normal.

In the Cupra model, the button stays on only

when the Cupra profile is active.

Driving pro-

file

Characteristics



aces the vehicle in a low state

of consumption, facilitating a

fuel-saving driving styl

e that is

respectful to the environment.



Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi-

ence, suitable for e

veryday use.



Sport

Provides a complete dynamic

perf

ormance in the v

ehicl

, ena-

bling the user a mor

e sporty driv-

ing style.

Only for Cupra models: It repre-

sents the vehicle

's default be-

haviour, suitable for dynamic

driving.

Applies to the Leon Cupra model.

265

Driving

Driving pro-

file

Characteristics



Convenience

It permits more r

elaxed and

comfortable driving, for e

xample

for long motorway journeys. Its

main characteristic is the soft

suspension setting (DCC).



Cupra

It gives the vehicle a decidedly

sportier nature, and makes f

maximum performance.



Individual

It allows you to personalise the

configur

ation. The functions that

can be adjusted depend on the

equipment fitted in the vehicl

Not available for Cupra models (

Eco

mode is sel

ec-

ed in the

Individual

ofil

e).

Only f

or models fitted with adaptive suspension

(DCC) and Cupra models.

Only for Cupra models.

Kick-down*

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-

celeration

›››

page 258.

If eco mode has been selected in SEAT Drive

Profile*, and the accelerator is pressed be-

yond a hard point, the engine power is auto-

matically controlled to give your vehicle max-

imum acceleration.

WARNING

When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-

tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could

cause an accident.

Note

●

When the engine is switched off it will

store the driving pr

ofile that was selected

when the ignition was turned off. When re-

started, the engine and the gearbox will

start in their Normal mode. To return the en-

gine and gear to your desired mode, rese-

lect the corresponding driving profile.

●

Your speed and driving style must always

be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-

fic conditions.

●

The Eco profile is not recommended when

towing a vehicle.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-in

w components.

Running-in the engine

A ne

w engine must be driv

en thr

ough a run-in

period during its first 1500 kil

ometres (1000

miles). During its first few hours of running, the

internal friction in the engine is greater than

later on when all the moving parts have bed-

ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km

(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-

formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it

should be driven at a moderate speed (espe-

cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce

engine wear and increase its useful life. Never

drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always

engage a lower gear when the engine works

“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or

600 miles, please note:

●

Do not use full throttle.

●

Do not force the engine above two thirds of

its maximum speed.

●

Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600

to 1000 miles), gradually increase power

until reaching the maximum speed and high

engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads

●

Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres

›››

page 347.

●

Information about brakes

›››

page 290.

266

Start and driving

For the sake of the environment

If the engine is run in gently, the life of the

engine will be increased and the engine oil

consumption reduced.

Four-wheel drive (4Drive)

3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

On four-wheel drive model

s, the engine pow-

er is distributed to all four wheels

General notes

On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine

power is distributed to all four wheels. The

distribution of power is controlled automati-

cally according to your driving style and the

road conditions. Also see

›››

page 296.

The four-wheel drive is specially designed to

complement the superior engine power. This

combination gives the vehicle exceptional

handling and performance capabilities, both

on normal roads and in more difficult condi-

tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-

haps especially for this reason), it is important

to observe certain safety points

›››

Wint

er t

Thanks t

o f

our-wheel drive, your vehicle will

have plenty of traction in winter conditions,

even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,

we still recommend that winter tyres or all-

season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to

give even better braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains are mandatory,

this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive

›››

page 351.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four

tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-

ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying

tread depths

›››

page 347.

Off-roader?

If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: it

does not have enough ground clearance to

be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid

rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as

possible.

WARNING

●

Even with four-wheel drive

, you should al-

ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-

tions. Do not let the extra safety features

tempt you into taking any risks when driv-

ing. Risk of accident!

●

The braking capability of your vehicle is

limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no

different from a car without four-wheel

drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast

on firm or slippery roads just because the

vehicle still has good acceleration in these

conditions. Risk of accident!

●

On wet roads bear in mind that the front

wheel

s may start to “aquaplane” and lose

contact with the road if the car is driven too

fast. If this should happen, there will be no

sudden increase in engine speed to warn

the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel

drive car. For this reason you should always

choose a driving speed suitable for the

road conditions. Risk of accident!

Economical and environmentally

friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution

and w

ear t

o the engine

, br

es and tyres all

depend largely on driving style. Consumption

can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-

cient driving type. The following section gives

you some tips on lessening the impact on the

environment and reducing your operating

costs at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT

Depending on vehicle equipment, the active

cylinder management (ACT

) may deacti-

vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-

ing situation does not require too much pow-

er. The number of active cylinders can be

seen on the instrument panel display.

›››

page 72.

267

Driving

Foresight when driving

If you think ahead when driving, you will need

o br

e l

ess and thus accel

erate less. Take

advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-

ever possible, with a gear engaged. This

takes advantage of the engine braking effect,

reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-

sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.

Changing gear to save energy

An effective way of saving is to change in ad-

vance to a higher gear.

Manual transmission: shift up from first to

second gear as soon as possible. Choosing

the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the

highest possible gear appropriate for the

driving situation (the engine should continue

functioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-

ally and without reaching the “kick-down”

position.

Avoid driving at high speed

Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,

whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-

sion of harmful gases and noise pollution

multiply as speed is increased. Driving at

moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling time

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is

automatically reduced. In vehicles without

the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off

the engine, for example, at level crossings

and at traffic lights that remain red for long

periods of time. When an engine has reached

operating temperature, and depending on

the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off

for a minimum of about 5 seconds already

saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-

ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm up

when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-

tant emissions are also especially high during

this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best

to drive off immediately after starting the en-

gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenance

Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even

before the engine is started. A well-serviced

engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel

efficiency as well as maximum reliability and

an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced

engine can consume up to 10% more fuel

than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

The engine and catalytic converter need to

reach their optimal operating temperature

in order to minimise fuel consumption and

emissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionate

amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-

ing temperature after about four kilometres

(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return

to a normal level.

Check tyre pressure

Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the

correct pressures

›››

page 348 to save fuel. If

the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-

tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater

rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-

ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as

they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-

crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable

make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-

ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero-

dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-

move it when not needed. At speeds of

100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%

of fuel.

268

Start and driving

Save electrical energy

The engine driv

es the alt

ernat

, ther

eby

generating electricity. This implies that any

increase in power consumption also increa-

ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch

off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices

that use a lot of electricity includes the blow-

er at a high setting, the rear window heating

or the seat heating*

›››

page 228.

Note

●

If you have the Start-St

op system, it is

recommended that it should not be discon-

nected.

●

It is recommended that you close the

windows when driving at more than

60 km/h (37 mph).

●

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the

plate slip. This causes wear and can dam-

age the clutch plate.

●

Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the

brake. The fuel consumption will be lower

and you will prevent the clutch plate from

being damaged.

●

Use the engine brake on downhills by

changing to the gear that is best suited for

the gradient. Fuel consumption will be

“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on

flooded roads, take the f

ollowing into ac-

count:

●

The water should never come above the

lower edge of the bodywork.

●

Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING

After driving through flooded zones, brak-

ing effectiveness can decrease if the brak

discs or pads are damp

›››

page 290.

CAUTION

●

Driving through flooded areas may dam-

age vehicl

e components such as the en-

gine, transmission or electrical system.

●

Whenever driving through water, the

Start-Stop system* must be switched off

›››

page 251.

Note

●

Check the depth of the water before en-

ering the flooded zone.

●

Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,

or stop the engine.

●

Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-

tion cause waves that could exceed your

vehicle's critical height.

●

Avoid driving through salt water (corr

sion)

›››

page 359.

Trips abroad

●

With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured

that lead-free petrol is avail

able throughout

the journey

›››

page 324, Fuel types. Seek

information about service station networks

selling unleaded fuel.

●

In some countries, it is possible that your

vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may

not be av

ailable or the technical services

may only be able to make limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will provide

information about the technical preparation

that your vehicle requires and also about

necessary maintenance and repair possibili-

ties.

CAUTION

SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-

age to the vehicle due to the use of a l

ower

quality fuel, an inadequate service or the

non-availability of genuine spare parts.

269

Driving

Driver assistance systems

Cruise contr

ol syst

(CCS)*

ed video

Fig. 266 Dash panel

Control lamp



It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and

active.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Contr

ol system (CCS) is

swit

ched on and active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition is

wit

ched on and shoul

d t

urn off aft

er approxi-

mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for

the function check.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Introduction

Fig. 267

Instrument panel display: GRA status

indications.

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to

maint

ain the set speed fr

om 20 km/h (

mph).

The CSS only r

educes v

ehicle speed by

ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking

the vehicle

›››

us displ

GRA st

›››

Fig. 267

CCS temporarily switched off. The set

speed is displayed in small or darkened

figures.

System error. Contact a specialised

workshop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory is

empty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed is

displayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS mode

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch

pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-

cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

If the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-

cle speed downhill, brake and change down

a gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarily

disabled by pressing the brake.

Automatic off

The GRA disconnects automatically or is

temporarily interrupted:

●

If the system detects a fault that could af-

fect the working order of the CCS.

●

If you press and maintain the accelerator

pedal for a certain time, driving faster than

the stored speed.

●

If the dynamic driving control systems inter-

vene, ASR, ESC, etc.

270

Driver assistance systems

●

If the br

e pedal is pr

essed.

●

If the airbag is trigger

ed.

●

If the l

ever is taken out of the D/S position.

WARNING

Use of GRA could cause accidents and se-

vere injuries if it is not possible to driv

e at a

constant speed maintaining the safety dis-

tance.

●

Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-

tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-

cient, on steep roads, with several bends or

in slippery circumstances or on flooded

roads.

●

Never use the CCS when driving off-road

or on unpaved roads.

●

Adapt your speed and the distance to the

vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-

er, the condition of the road and the traffic

situation.

●

To avoid unexpected operation of the

cruise control system, turn it off every time

you finish using it.

●

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is

too high for other conditions.

●

If driving down a steep gradient, the GRA

cannot maintain a constant speed. The

speed can increase. In this case, brake and

change down a gear.

Operating the cruise control

Fig. 268

On the turn signal lever: controls for

oper

ating the GRA.

Connecting

●

Move the control

›

Fig. 268

to .

If no speed has been pr

ogr

ammed, the sys-

em will not contr

ol it.

Activ

ating the cruise control

●

Press button

›››

Fig. 268

in area 

.

The curr

ent speed is st

ed and the cruise

contr

ol is activated.

Temporarily interrupting

●

Move the control

›››

Fig. 268

to 



 or

ep on the br

The cruise control system is switched off tem-

porarily. The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control

●

Press button

›››

Fig. 268

in area 

.

Cruise contr

ol is activ

ed at the st

ored

speed.

Adjusting the speed

While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be

adjusted with button

›››

Fig. 268

●

To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)

briefly pr

ess butt

›

Fig. 268

in the area







●

o incr

ease the speed without interruption,

keep button

›››

Fig. 268

pressed down in

the ar

ea 





●

o reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)

briefly press button

›››

Fig. 268

in the area

.

●

To reduce the speed without interruption,

eep butt

›

Fig. 268

pressed down in

the ar

ea .

The v

ehicl

e adapts the curr

ent speed by ac-

cel

erating or stopping accelerating. The vehi-

cle does not brake actively.

Switching off

●

Move control

›››

Fig. 268

to .

The syst

em is disconnect

ed and the memo-

rised speed is del

ed.

Driving

Emergency brake assistance

syst

em (Fr

ont Assist)*

Intr

oduction

Fig. 269 On the instrument panel display: ad-

ance w

arning indications.

The objective of the system is to prevent

head-on collisions against ob

jects that may

be in the v

ehicl

’

s path or minimise the con-

sequences of such impacts.

Depending on several factors and how criti-

cal the situation is, the system operates in a

staggered manner. First it warns the driver,

and if the driver’s reaction does not occur or

is insufficient, it activates independent emer-

gency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisions

with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same

lane travelling in the same direction, or with

pedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path. It

may not activate in other hazard situations

›››

ont Assist is activ

e betw

een 4 km/h (2.5

mph) and 250 km/h (

156 mph). Depending

on a r

ange of conditions, some of the func-

tions described below are omitted to optimize

the behaviour of the system.

Front Assist is a driving assistance function

that can never replace the driver’s atten-

tion.

Safety distance warning

If the system detects that you are driving too

close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the

driver with this indication on the instrument

panel display .

The timing of the warning varies depending

on driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision with

the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by

means of an audible warning and an indica-

tion on the instrument panel display

›››

Fig. 269.

The warning moment varies depending on

the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At

the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a

possible emergency braking

›››

Critical warning

If the driv

er f

ail

s t

o r

eact to the advance

warning, the system may actively intervene

in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn

the driver of the imminent danger of a colli-

sion.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the critical

warning, the system may initiate independ-

ent emergency braking by progressively in-

creasing the braking in accordance with how

critical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assistance sys-

tem

The system may detect that the driver is not

braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In

this case, it will increase the braking intensity.

The system cannot prevent a collision, al-

though it can significantly minimise the con-

sequences by reducing the speed and the

force of the impact.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning lamps on page 90.

WARNING

Front Assist cannot change the laws of

physics or replace the driver in terms of

272

Driver assistance systems

keeping control of the vehicle and reacting

to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING

Following a Front Assist emergency warn-

ing, pay immediat

e attention to the situa-

tion and try t

o avoid the collision as appli-

cable.

●

If the Front Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly

intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.

Have the system checked by a specialised

workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership.

●

Always adapt your speed and distance

away from the vehicle in front of you at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-

dents and serious injuries.

●

In complex driving situations, Front Assist

may issue warnings and intervene in brak-

ing unnecessarily.

●

If the operation of the Front Assist is im-

paired by dirt or because the radar sensor

has lost its settings, the system may issue

unnecessary warnings and intervene inop-

portunely in the braking.

●

The Front Assist does not react to animals

or vehicles crossing your path or ap-

proaching head-on down the same lane.

●

The Front Assist does not react to pedes-

trians walking head-on in the same l

ane.

●

The driver must always be ready to take

over the control of the vehicle.

Note

●

When Fr

ont Assist is connected, the indi-

cations of other functions on the screen

may be hidden.

●

When the Front Assist causes a br

aking,

the brake pedal is “harder”.

●

Automatic interventions by the Front As-

sist on the brakes may be interrupted by

pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving

the wheel.

●

The Front Assist may brake the vehicle

until it stops completely. However, the

brake system does not halt the vehicle per-

manently. Use the foot brake!

●

If the Front Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes

several times unnecessarily), switch it off.

Radar sensors

Fig. 270

On the front bumper: radar sensors.

A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper

›

Fig. 270

The r

adar sensor

's visibilit

y may be impair

by dirt, or by envir

onmental influences such

as rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assist

does not work. The instrument panel displays

the following message: Front Assist: No

sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor

›››

When the r

adar sensor begins t

o oper

operly again, the Front Assist will be availa-

ble again. The message will disappear from

the screen.

Front Assist operation may be affected by a

strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-

cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g.

guard rails or sheets used in road works).

273

Driving

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor shoul

d not be co

ed with adhesiv

es,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, Front Assist operation may be affected.

SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership

for this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the feeling that the radar sensor

is damaged or has lost its settings, discon-

nect the Front Assist. This will avoid possi-

ble danger

ous situations caused by the in-

adequate operation of the system. If this

occurs have it adjusted.

●

The sensor may not be adjusted correct-

ly if it receives an impact. This may com-

promise the system's efficacy or discon-

nect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front that is larger than the space for the

registration plate, or a registration plate

that is curved or warped can cause the ra-

dar to malfunction.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and

the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-

icer spray.

Operation of the emergency brake

assist

ance syst

em (Fr

ont Assist)

Fig. 271

On the instrument panel display: Front

Assist deactiv

ed indication.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-

tion is s

wit

ched on.

When the Fr

ont Assist is s

wit

ched off, so too

are the advance warning and the distance

warning functions.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist

activated. Exceptions

›››

page 275, Deacti-

vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol-

lowing situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off

With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist

can be deactivated or activated as follows:

●

Select the corresponding menu option us-

ing the button for the driver assistance sys-

tems

›››

page 89.

●

OR: using the Easy Connect system with

the button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS

> Driver assistance

›››

page 92.

When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-

cation 

›››

Fig. 271 will be shown on the in-

strument panel.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning

(advance warning)

The advance warning can be activated or

deactivated in the Easy Connect system us-

ing button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS

> Driver assistance

›››

page 92.

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping advance warning

active.

Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys-

tem the advance warning function may be

adapted in the following modes:

●

Advance

●

Medium

●

Delayed

●

Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in

“Medium” mode.

274

Driver assistance systems

Switching distance warning on and off

The dist

ance w

arning can be activ

ed or

deactiv

ated in the Easy Connect system us-

ing button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS

> Driver assistance

›››

page 92.

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distance

warning active.

Deactivating Front Assist tempora-

rily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist

shoul

d be deactiv

ed due t

o the syst

em's

limitations:

●

When the vehicle is to be towed.

●

If the vehicle is on a test bed.

●

When the radar sensor is damaged.

●

If the radar sensor receives a violent im-

pact.

●

If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

●

If the radar sensor is temporarily covered

by an accessory.

●

When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto

transportation.

System limitations

Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to

the system. Thus, in certain circumstances,

some of the r

eactions may be inappropriate

from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention

in order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the

Front Assist not to react or to do so too

late:

●

In the first few instants of driving after

switching on the ignition, due to the system’s

initial auto-calibration.

●

If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-

aged.

●

If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

●

On taking tight bends or complex paths.

●

Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

●

If the ASR has been disconnected or the

ESC activated in Sport

mode

›››

page 298.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or

sheets used in road works.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

In case of snow or heavy rain.

●

In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-

bikes.

●

Misaligned vehicles.

●

Vehicles crossing the other's path.

●

Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-

tion.

●

Loads and accessories of other vehicles

that protrude over the sides, backwards or

over the top.

275

Driving

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-

ol*

Intr

oduction

Fig. 272 Related video

Fig. 273

Detection area.

The ACC is an e

ension of the v

ehicl

’s

cruise control function (GRA)

›››

It all

ws the driv

er t

o set a cruise speed be-

een 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130

mph), and select the desired distance from

the previous in front.

The ACC adapts the cruising speed of the

vehicle, keeping a safe distance away from

the vehicle in front, if there is one, depending

on speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, the

ACC reduces speed until it is the same as

that of the vehicle ahead and maintains the

set distance between the vehicles. If the vehi-

cle ahead accelerates, the ACC also accel-

erates the vehicle, going no higher than the

programmed target speed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic

gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until

it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it

stops.

The distance programmed should be in-

creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt

ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent

to the system. In other words, in certain cir-

cumstances the driver will have to adjust the

speed and the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen will

warn you to intervene by applying the brake

and a warning tone will be heard

›››

page 277.

WARNING

The ACC’s technology cannot overcome

the system's inherent limitations or change

the laws of physics. If used negligently or

involuntarily, it may cause serious acci-

dents and injuries. The system is not a re-

acement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-

tions.

●

Do not use ACC in poor visibility, or on

roads that are steep, with lots of curves or

slippery.

●

Never use ACC when driving off-road or

on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-

signed for use on paved roads only.

●

ACC does not react when approaching a

fixed obstacle, such as the end of a traffic

jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-

ped at the traffic lights.

●

The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-

destrian monitoring system is available.

The system does not react to animals or

vehicles crossing your path or approaching

head-on down the same lane.

●

If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-

ciently, brake the vehicle immediately.

●

If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-

ted, the ACC system could automatically

switch off. Switch off the system when

starting off.

●

If the vehicle continues to move involun-

tarily after a driver intervention prompt,

brake the vehicle.

276

Driver assistance systems

●

If the instrument panel screen displays a

driver int

ervention prompt, adjust the dis-

tance.

●

The driver should be ready to accelerate

or brake at all times.

Note

●

If the ACC does not w

ork as described in

this chapter, do not use it until it has been

checked by a specialised w

orkshop. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

Maximum speed with the ACC activated

is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).

●

When the ACC is switched on, strange

noises may be heard during braking,

caused by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument panel

displ

ay and contr

ol l

amps



The speed reduction by the ACC

to maintain the distance from the

ehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver int

ervention

prompt.



ACC is not currently available

While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engine

and start it again. Perform a visual check of the radar

sensor

›

››

Fig. 275. If it is still unavailable, refer to a

specialised workshop to have the system inspected.

The symbol on the instrument panels with colour

display is in colour.



The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed

speed remains constant.



If the symbol is white: the ACC is

active.

A vehicle in fr

ont has been detected. The ACC ad-

justs speed and distance from the vehicle in fr

ont.



If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-

tive (Standby)

The system is swit

ched on, but is not adjusting.



The lamp lights up green

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check cert

ain functions. They will s

witch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Status display

Fig. 274

On the instrument panel display:



ACC inactiv

e (St

andby).



ACC activ

Indications on the display

›

Fig. 27

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-

tive and is not regulating your speed.

277

Driving

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is

not activ

e and is not r

egul

ating your dis-

ance

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active

and is regulating your speed.

Distance level 2 set by the driver.

ACC is active and is regulating your dis-

tance based on speed.

Speed programmed with the ACC

Note

When the ACC is connected, the indica-

tions on the instrument panel screen may

be concealed by warnings from other func-

tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensors

Fig. 275 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper

›

Fig. 275

The r

adar sensor

's visibilit

y may be impair

by dirt, or by envir

onmental influences such

as rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruise

control (ACC) does not work. The instrument

panel displays the following message: ACC:

No sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor

›››

When the r

adar sensor begins t

o oper

operly, the ACC will become available. The

message on the screen will switch off and the

ACC may be reactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong

radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for

example, in a closed car park or due to the

presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails

or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar

sensor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, ACC operation may be affected. In this

scenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar

sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the ACC. This way you can

avoid possible damage. If this occurs have

it adjust

ed.

●

The sensor may not be adjusted correct-

ly if it receives an impact. This may com-

promise the system's efficacy or discon-

nect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT

recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for

this purpose.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front that is larger than the space for the

registration plate, or a registration plate

that is curved or warped can cause the ra-

dar to malfunction.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and

the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-

icer spray.

278

Driver assistance systems

ACC operation

Fig. 276

On the left of the steering column: op-

ating the ACC with the thir

d l

er.

Fig. 277

On the left of the steering column: op-

ating the ACC with the thir

d l

er.

When the ACC is connected, the green con-

ol l

amp



will light up on the instrument

panel, and the pr

ogrammed speed and ACC

status will be displayed

›››

Fig. 274.

What ACC settings are possible?

●

Connecting and activating the ACC

›››

page 279.

●

Setting your speed

›››

page 279.

●

Setting your distance

›››

page 279.

●

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

›››

page 280.

●

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey

›››

page 280.

●

Adjusting the driving profile

›››

page 280.

●

Conditions in which the ACC does not re-

act

›››

page 280.

Connecting and activating the ACC

To connect and activate the ACC, the posi-

tion of the gearbox lever, the vehicle speed

and the position of the third level of the ACC

must all be taken into account.

●

With manual transmission, the gear lever

must be in any gear except first. With auto-

matic transmission, the gear lever must be in

position D or S. Speed must be higher than

30 km/h (18 mph) approx.

●

To activate the ACC, move the third lever to

position 

›››

Fig. 276

. At this time, the

ACC is not activ

e and ther

e is no pr

ogr

am-

med speed.

●

xt, press button 

›››

Fig. 277

e the l

er to position 

›››

Fig. 276

. At this moment the ACC is ac-

tivated and the current speed and distance

e pr

ogr

ammed. The pict

e in the box will

change to Active mode

›››

Fig. 274 .

While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at a

set speed and distance from the vehicle

ahead. Both speed and distance can be

changed at any time.

Setting speed

●

To set the speed, move the third lever up

or down

–

to the desired speed

›

Fig. 27

. The speed adjustment is made

at 10 km/h (6 mph) int

erv

●

If you wish t

o incr

ease speed by intervals of

1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position



›››

Fig. 276

, or to decrease it press

butt

on 

›

Fig. 27

The set speed can be changed when the v

hicl

e is st

opped or during driving.

Setting your dist

ance l

evel

●

To increase or reduce the distance, press

button

to the right or left

›

Fig. 27

The instrument panel display modifies the se-

lected distance

›››

Fig. 274

. There are 5

dist

ance l

s to choose from. SEAT recom-

mends level 3. The set distance can be

changed when the vehicle is stopped or while

driving

›››

279

Driving

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

●

To disconnect the ACC move the lever to

position  (fix

ed)

›

Fig. 276

. An ACC de-

activated message appears and the func-

tion is t

ally deactiv

ed.

If you do not wish t

o disconnect the ACC, just

to switch it temporarily to inactive mode

(Standby), move the third lever to position



or press the brake pedal.

It will al

so s

wit

ch t

o inactiv

e mode (Standby)

if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is

opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey

In wet road conditions, you should always set

a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in

front than when driving in dry conditions

›››

In the Easy Connect syst

em, you can pr

e-se-

ect the dist

ance l

evel when connecting the

ACC to: Very short, Short, Medium, Long and

Very long using button    > Vehicle >

SETTINGS > Driver assistance

›››

page 92.

Changing the driving profile

In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving

profile selected can have an influence on the

ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour

›››

page 264.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-

haviour of the ACC can also be affected if

any of the following drive profiles are selec-

ted in the Easy Connect system:

●

Normal

●

Sport

●

Eco

●

Convenience

In this case you must access the ACC set-

tings using button    > Vehicle >

SETTINGS > Driver assistance > ACC

›››

page 92.

The following conditions may lead the

ACC not to react:

●

If the accelerator is pressed.

●

If there is no gear engaged.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages

 ACC not available

●

The system cannot continue to guarantee

safe vehicle detection and is deactivated.

The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged.

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop

and have the fault repaired.

 ACC and Front Assist: currently

not available. No sensor vision

●

This message is displayed if the radar sen-

sor's visibility is impaired by leaves, snow,

dense fog or dirt. Clean the sensor

›››

Fig. 275.

 ACC: currently not available.

Gradient too steep

●

The maximum road slope has been excee-

ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be

guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched

on.

 ACC: only available in D, S or M

●

Select the D/S or M position on the selector

lever.

 ACC: parking brake applied

●

The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake

is applied. The ACC is available once again

after the parking brake is released.

 ACC: currently not available. In-

tervention of stability control

●

The indication is displayed when the elec-

tronic stability control (ESC) intervenes. In this

case, the ACC is automatically switched off.

280

Driver assistance systems

 ACC: Take action!

●

The indication is displayed if, when the ve-

hicl

e st

arts up on a hill with a slight sl

ope

, the

ehicle rolls back even although the ACC is

activated. Apply the brake to stop the vehicle

from moving/colliding with another vehicle.

 ACC: speed limit

●

The indication is displayed in vehicles with

manual gearboxes if the current speed is too

low for the ACC mode. The speed limiter

switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h

(12 mph).

 ACC: available as of the 2nd gear

●

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear

(manual gearbox).

 ACC: engine speed

●

This indication is displayed if, when the

ACC accelerates or brakes, the driver does

not shift up or down a gear in time, which

means exceeding or not reaching the permit-

ted RPM. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzer

warning is heard.

 ACC: clutch applied

●

Vehicles with manual transmission: pressing

the clutch pedal for longer exits cruise con-

trol.

Door open

●

Vehicles with automatic transmission: the

ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle

stationary and the door open.

WARNING

There is a danger of rear collision when the

distance to the vehicle in fr

ont is reduced

and the speed difference between both ve-

hicles is so great that a speed reduction by

the ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brake

immediately!

●

The ACC may not be able to detect all

situations properly.

●

Stepping on the accelerator may cause

the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver

braking will have priority over intervention

by the speed control or adaptive cruise

control.

●

Always be ready to use the brakes!

●

Observe country-specific provisions gov-

erning obligatory minimum distances be-

tween vehicles.

●

It is dangerous to activate control and re-

sume the programmed speed if the road,

traffic or weather conditions do not permit

this. Risk of accident!

Note

●

The programmed speed is erased once

the ignition or the ACC are s

witched off.

●

When the traction control system (ASR) is

deactivat

ed during acceleration or else the

ESC is activated in Sport* Mode

(

›››

page 92), the ACC switches off auto-

matically.

●

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,

the engine switches off during the ACC

stopping phase and restarts for moving off.

Function to prevent overtaking on

the right

Fig. 278 On the instrument panel display: ACC

activ

, v

ehicl

e det

ected in an outer lane.

The ACC has a function to prevent overtaking

on the right.

If another v

ehicl

e is driving mor

e sl

wly to the

left of the vehicle, it is shown on the display

›››

Fig. 278.

281

Driving

The system brakes the vehicle to avoid over-

aking on the right, and will av

oid o

ert

aking

based on speed. The driver can interrupt the

intervention of the ACC by pressing the ac-

celerator. At low speeds the function is inac-

tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in

city traffic.

Deactivating the ACC temporarily

in certain situations

In the following situations the ACC should be

deactiv

ed due t

o the syst

em's limit

ations

›››

●

When overtaking, on closed curves or

mount

ain r

oads, r

oundabouts, slip r

oads or

oadwork sections, preventing the system

from accelerating to reach the programmed

speed.

●

When going through a tunnel, as operation

could be affected.

●

When other vehicles are going slower in the

left lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be

overtaken on the right.

●

In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi-

cle in front may not be detected.

WARNING

If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-

tions described, serious accidents and inju-

ries may occur.

●

Always switch off the ACC in critical sit

uations.

Note

If you do not switch off the ACC in the

orementioned situations, you may com-

mit a legal off

ence.

Special driving recommendations

Fig. 279 

Vehicle on a bend.



Motorcyclist

ahead, out of r

ange of the radar sensor.

Fig. 280  Vehicle changing lanes.  One

vehicle t

urning and another stationary.

The ACC has certain limitations inherent to

the syst

em. Cert

ain r

eactions, under cert

ain

cir

cumstances, may be unexpected or come

late from the driver's point of view. So pay at-

tention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following situations require maximum at-

tention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase

(only with automatic transmission)

After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin

driving when the vehicle in front moves off

›››

282

Driver assistance systems

Overtaking

When the t

urn signal lights up bef

e the v

hicl

e starts to overtake, the ACC accelerates

the vehicle automatically and thus reduces

the distance from the vehicle in front.

When the vehicle moves to the overtaking

lane, if the ACC does not detect another ve-

hicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the

programmed speed.

System acceleration can be interrupted at

any time by pressing the brake or moving the

third lever to position 

›››

Fig. 276

Driving thr

ough a bend

When ent

ering or l

eaving some curv

es, the

adar sensor may cease to sense the vehicle

driving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in the

adjacent lane

›››

Fig. 279 . The vehicle may

brake unnecessarily or stop reacting to the

vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to

intervene by accelerating or interrupting

braking by applying the brake or pushing the

third lever to position 

›››

Fig. 276

Driving in t

unnel

When driving thr

ough t

unnel

s the radar sen-

sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-

nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehicles

The radar sensor can only detect narrow ve-

hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align-

ment when they enter its range

›››

Fig. 279 .

In these cases, you should brake as necessa-

ry.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-

ries

Special loads and accessories of other vehi-

cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or

over the top may be out of the ACC's range.

SEAT recommends disconnecting it.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lanes a short distance

away from your own can only be detected

when they are within range of the sensors. As

a consequence, the ACC will take longer to

react

›››

Fig. 280 . Brake yourself as neces-

sary.

Stationary vehicles

The ACC does not detect stationary objects

while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged

vehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or

moves over and there is a stationary vehicle

in front of it, the ACC will not react to it

›››

Fig. 280 . Brake yourself as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite direction

and vehicles crossing your path

The ACC does not react to vehicles ap-

proaching from the opposite direction or ve-

hicles crossing your path.

Metal objects

Metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used

in road works, can confuse the radar sensor

and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radar

sensor operates

If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to

heavy rain snow or mud, the ACC is deactiva-

ted temporarily. A message will be displayed

stating this. If necessary, clean the radar sen-

sor

›››

Fig. 275.

When the radar sensor begins to operate

properly, the ACC will become available. The

message will turn off and the ACC may be

reactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong

radar reverse reflection, for example in a

closed car park. SEAT recommends discon-

necting it.

Trailer mode

When driving with trailer the ACC controls

less dynamically.

283

Driving

Overheated brakes

If the br

es o

erheat, f

or example on long

and steep descents, the ACC may be deacti-

vated temporarily. A message will be dis-

played stating this. In this case, adaptive

cruise control cannot be activated.

Cruise control may be reactivated once the

brake temperature has dropped. The mes-

sage will disappear. If the message ACC not

available remains on for quite a long time it

means that there is a fault. Contact a speci-

alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership.

WARNING

If you do not pay attention to the Press

the brake message, the vehicle may mov

and crash into the vehicle ahead. Before

driving off again, check that the road is

clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-

stacles on the road. This could cause an

accident and serious injuries. If necessary,

apply the brake.

Lane Assist*

Intr

oduction

Fig. 281 On the windscreen: field of vision of

the L

ane Assist syst

em.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,

the L

ane Assist syst

em det

ects the possibl

lines dividing the l

anes. When the vehicle in-

voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has

detected, the system notifies the driver with a

corrective steering movement. The purpose is

not only to warn the driver, but also to keep

the vehicle inside the lane. This movement

can be over-regulated at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signals

activated, given that the Lane Assist system

understands that a lane change is required.

Control lamp





It lights up yellow

Lane Assist system active but not available.

The system cannot accurately recogniz

e the lane.

See page 286, The lane assist system is active

but it is not available (the control lamp is lit up

yellow).





It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.



 or





It lights up yellow

Error in the lane departure warning system. Take the

vehicle to a specialised workshop t

o repair the fault.

Some control and warning lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check cert

ain functions. They will s

witch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning lamps on page 90.

284

Driver assistance systems

Indications on the instrument panel

displ

Fig. 282 On the instrument panel display: In-

dication on the L

ane Assist syst

em displ

ay (e

ampl

e 1).

Fig. 283

On the instrument panel display: Indi-

cation on the L

ane Assist syst

em displ

ay (e

ampl

e 2).

Status display

Fig. 282 : The syst

em is activ

, but not

ail

able, either because the minimum

speed has not been reached or because

the lane lines are not recognised.

Fig. 282 : The system is active and

available, both lane lines are recognised.

The steering angle is not being correc-

ted at this moment.

–

Fig. 283 : The system is operational,

the highlighted line

indicates that

ther

e w

as a risk of inv

olunt

arily cr

ossing

the lane line and that the steering is be-

ing adjusted to correct the angle.

Fig. 283 : The two highlighted lines

and

light up simultaneously when

both l

ane lines ar

e r

ecognised and the

ane Assist function is activ

ated.

Operating mode

Steering wheel vibration

The f

oll

wing sit

uations can cause vibr

ation

in the steering wheel and require the driver to

take active control of driving:

●

When the steering angle assist value re-

quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is higher

than the system’s maximum operating value.

●

If the system ceases to display the lane

lines while assisting with steering.

Switching the Lane Assist system on or off

●

Select the corresponding menu option us-

ing the button for the driver assistance sys-

tems

›››

page 89.

●

OR: by using the Easy Connect system with

button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS >

Driver assistance

›››

page 92.

–

285

Driving

Lane Assist with lane centring guide

The Lane Centring Guide function is int

en-

ded t

o k

eep the v

ehicl

e in the centre of the

lane.

If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly off

centre in the lane, the system adapts to driver

preferences.

●

The Lane Centring Guide function is ac-

tivated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys-

tem using the button    > Vehicle >

SETTINGS

›››

page 92.

Automatic deactivation: the Lane Assist sys-

tem can be automatically deactivated if

there is a system malfunction. The control

lamp disappears.

Hands-Off Function

In the absence of steering wheel activity the

system alerts the driver with acoustic signals

and a text message on the dash panel asking

to actively take over the steering.

If the driver does not react to this, the system

also alerts the driver with a little shaking mo-

tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle has

it, activates the Emergency Assist function

›››

page 288.

In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the

adaptive lane guidance function will be disa-

bled after the corresponding warnings to the

driver.

The lane assist system is active but it is not

available (the control lamp is lit up yellow)

●

When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38

mph).

●

When the Lane Assist system does not de-

tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-

ple, in the event warnings indicating road

works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections.

●

When the radius of a curve is too small.

●

When no road markings can be seen.

●

When the distance to the next marking to

too great.

●

When the system does not detect any clear

and active steering movement during a long

period of time.

●

Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic

driving styles.

●

If a turn signal is activated.

●

With the stability control system (ESC) in

Sport mode or switched off.

Switching off the Lane Assist system in the

following situations

Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,

switch it off in the following situations:

●

When more attention is required of the driv-

●

When driving in a sporty style

●

In unfavourable weather conditions

●

On roads in poor condition

●

In areas of road works

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the Lane As-

sist system cannot change the limits im-

posed by the laws of physics and by the

very natur

e of the system. Careless or un-

controlled use of the Lane Assist system

may cause accidents and injury. The sys-

tem is not a replacement for driver aware-

ness.

●

Always adapt your speed and the dis-

tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of

the road and the traffic situation.

●

Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel so it can be turned at any time.

●

The Lane Assist system does not detect

all road markings. The road surfaces, road

structures or objects in poor condition can

be incorrectly detected as road markings

under certain circumstances by the Lane

Assist system. In such situations, switch the

Lane Assist system off immediately.

●

Please observe the indications on the in-

strument panel and act as is necessary.

●

Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-

roundings.

●

When the area of vision of the camera

becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the

Lane Assist system function can be affec-

ted.

286

Driver assistance systems

CAUTION

In order to avoid influencing the operation

of the system, the following points must be

aken into account:

●

Regularly clean the area of vision of the

camera and keep it in a clean state, without

snow or ice

›››

Fig. 281.

●

Do not cover the area of vision of the

camera.

●

Check that the area of vision of the wind-

screen camera is not damaged.

Note

●

The lane departure w

arning system has

been exclusively developed for driving on

paved roads only.

●

If the Lane Assist system does not work as

described in this chapter, do not use it and

contact a specialised workshop.

●

If there is a fault in the system, have it

checked by a specialised workshop.

Traffic Jam Assist

Description and oper

ation

Fig. 284 Related video

Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the

car within its l

ane and t

o mo

e in conv

oy in

case of traffic congestion or slow traffic.

Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of

Lane Assist

›››

page 284 and combines Lane

Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)

›››

page 276. Therefore, it is essential

that you read these two chapters carefully

and note the limitations of the systems and

the information about them.

Operation of Traffic Jam Assist

At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic

Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis-

tance preset by the driver with respect to the

vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane

›››

o do this, the syst

em aut

omatically contr

the accelerator, brakes and steering, and

slows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces-

sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that

has stopped. It automatically moves off again

when the vehicle ahead moves.

Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on

motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never

use it in city traffic.

Technical requirements for using Traffic

Jam Assist

●

Lane assist must be activated: button

   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Driver

assistance > Lane assist system

›››

page 92.

●

Adaptive lane guidance must be activated:

button    > Vehicle > SETTINGS >

Driver assistance > Lane assist sys-

tem

●

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be

connected and active

›››

page 279.

●

The speed must be below 60 km/h

(38 mph).

Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane

Assist control light turns yellow)

●

If any of the conditions mentioned on

page 287, Technical requirements for us-

ing Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met.

●

If any of the conditions required for opera-

tion of the Lane Assist are not met

›››

page 284.

287

Driving

●

If any of the conditions necessary f

or the

adaptiv

e cruise contr

ol (ACC) t

o w

ork are no

longer fulfilled

›››

page 276.

Situations where traffic jam assist has to

be disconnected

Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic

Jam Assist must always be switched off in the

following situations:

●

When more attention is required by the

driver.

●

When driving in a very sporty style.

●

In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case

of snow or heavy rain.

●

When driving on roads in poor condition.

●

In sections with roadworks.

●

In city journeys.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

Traffic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of

physics; it only works within the limits of the

syst

em. Accidents and severe injury may

occur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negli-

gently or involuntarily. The system is not a

replacement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-

ditions.

●

Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour-

neys.

●

Do not use T

raffic Jam Assist if there is

poor visibility, for example, in case of snow,

ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slip-

pery sections or flooded roads.

●

Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or

on roads where the surface is not firm. Traf-

fic Jam Assist has been designed for use on

paved roads only.

●

Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peo-

ple or animals or vehicles crossing your

path or that approach you head-on down

the same lane.

●

If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce

speed sufficiently, brake the vehicle imme-

diately by applying the pedal.

●

If the vehicle continues to move when you

wish it to stop after a driver intervention

prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the

pedal.

●

If driver intervention is requested on the

dash panel display, immediately resume

control of the vehicle.

●

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times

to be ready to intervene in the steering at

any time. The driver is always responsible

for keeping the vehicle in its own lane.

●

Always be prepared to take charge of

driving (accelerating or braking) yourself.

Note

●

If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de-

scribed in this chapter

, stop using it and

contact a specialised workshop.

●

If the system is faulty, take it to a special-

ised workshop and have it checked.

Emergency Assist

Description and operation

Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-

activit

y by the driv

er and can aut

omatically

eep the car within the l

ane and stop it alto-

gether if necessary. This way the system can

actively help avoid an accident.

Emergency Assist is an additional function of

Lane Assist

›››

page 284 and combines Lane

Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)

›››

page 276. Therefore, it is essential

that you read these two chapters carefully

and note the limitations of the systems and

the information about them.

Operation of Emergency Assist

Emergency Assist detects when the driver

ceases to perform any activity and repeated-

ly requests that he/she regain active control

of the vehicle, through the use of optical and

288

Driver assistance systems

acoustic warnings and by applying the

es.

If the driv

er continues t

o do nothing, the sys-

em automatically takes over the accelerator,

brakes and steering in order to brake the ve-

hicle and keep it in its lane

›››

. When the

emer

gency assist

ant is activ

ely r

egul

ating,

the hazard lights turn on

›››

page 124.

If the remaining braking distance is sufficient,

if necessary the system slows down the vehi-

cle until it stops completely and automati-

cally switches on the electronic parking

brake

›››

page 292.

Connecting and disconnecting Emergen-

cy Assist

The Emergency Assist is switched on auto-

matically when the Lane Assist is switched on

›››

page 284.

Technical requirements for using the Emer-

gency Assist

●

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be

switched on

›››

page 276.

●

The Lane Assist must be switched on

›››

page 284.

●

The selector lever must be in the D/S posi-

tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate.

●

The system must have detected a lane

separation line on both sides of the vehicle

›››

Fig. 283.

The following conditions may cause the

Emergency Assist not to react or to switch

off automatically:

●

If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves

the steering wheel.

●

If any of the conditions mentioned in

›››

page 289, Technical requirements for

using the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.

●

If any of the conditions required for opera-

tion of the Lane Assist are not met

›››

page 284.

●

If any of the conditions necessary for the

adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no

longer fulfilled

›››

page 276.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the Emergency Assist cannot overcome the

limits imposed by the l

aws of physics; it on-

ly works within the limits of the system. The

driver is responsible for driving the vehicle.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to

the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit

the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-

ditions.

●

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times

to be ready to intervene in the steering at

any time.

●

The Emergency Assist alone cannot al-

ways avoid accidents or serious injuries.

●

If the operation of the Emergency Assist

is impaired, for example if the radar sensor

of the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the

Lane Assist camera are cov

ered or have

lost their settings, the system may inter-

vene inopportunely in braking or in steer-

ing.

●

The Emergency Assist does not react to

people or animal or vehicles crossing your

path or which approach you head-on in the

same lane.

WARNING

If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-

unely, serious accidents and injuries may

occur.

●

If the Emergency Assist does not operat

properly, switch off the Lane Assist

›››

page 284. Doing so will also switch off

the Emergency Assist.

●

Have the system checked by a special-

ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership for this.

Note

●

Automatic interventions by the Emergen-

cy Assist on the br

akes may be interrupted

by pressing the accelerator or brake or by

moving the wheel.

●

Hazard warning lights that come on auto-

matically can be switched off by pressing

the accelerator or the break, moving the

steering wheel or pressing the hazard

warning light switch.

289

Driving

●

If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may

decelerate the v

ehicle until it comes to a

complete stop.

●

When the Emergency Assist is activated,

it is only available again after the ignition

has been switched off and back on again.

Braking and parking

aking syst

Contr

ol l

amps



It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low

›››

page 339 or fault in the

brake system.

 Do not carry on driving!



It lights up red

Electronic parking brake

›››

page 292;

OR hand

brake applied

›››

page 293.

The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-

leased.



It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.

Contact a specialised workshop immediately.

WARNING

●

If the brake warning lamp

 does not go

out or if it lights up when driving, the brake

fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there

is a risk of an accident

›››

page 339, Brake

fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.

Obtain technical assistance.

●

If the brake warning lamp lights up  to-

gether with the ABS lamp  this could be

due to an ABS fault. When this function

fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under

certain circumstances, the r

ear of the vehi-

cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-

trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.

●

If the  lamp lights up, alone or accom-

panied by a warning message on the in-

strument panel display, please go immedi-

ately to a specialised workshop to check

the brake pads and to replace them if they

are worn.

Information about the brakes

New brake pads

or the first 200 t

o 300 km (

100 t

o 200

mil

es), new brake pads have not yet reached

their maximum braking capacity, and need to

be “run in” first. However, you can compen-

sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by

applying more pressure on the brake pedal.

Avoid overloading the brakes while running

them in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads depends

a great deal on how you drive and the condi-

tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a

particular problem in urban traffic and short

stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking force

and the environmental conditions (e.g.

290

Braking and parking

temperature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be

oduced when br

aking.

et r

oads or r

oad salt

In certain situations (for example, on driving

through flooded areas, in severe downpours

or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-

tion could be delayed if the discs and pads

are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the

brakes should be “dried” by pressing the

brake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipers

activated, the brake pads will briefly touch

the brake discs. This takes place, although

unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals

to improve the response time of the brakes

when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be

temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for

some distance without using the brakes when

there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The

layer of salt that accumulates on the discs

and pads can be removed by gently apply-

ing the brakes a few times.

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for corrosion to

form on the discs and dirt to build up on the

brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently

or the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust

has formed on the disks, it is advisable to

clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly

a few times at a moderately high speed

›››

ault in the br

e syst

If the br

ake pedal travel should ever increase

suddenly, this may mean that one of the two

brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to

the nearest specialised workshop and have

the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-

member that you will have to apply more

pressure on the brake pedal and allow for

longer stopping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if

the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid

level is monitored electronically.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure you

apply to the brake pedal. It works only when

the engine is running.

WARNING

Any anomaly in the brake system can in-

crease the braking distance, with the r

sulting risk of an accident.

●

New brake pads and discs must be run in

and do not have the correct friction during

the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced

braking capacity may be offset by pressing

on the brake pedal a little harder.

●

If you are driving on roads which have

been salted, br

aking effectiveness may be

decreased.

●

Brakes can overheat if used excessively

on slopes. Before driving down a long steep

slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and

change down into a lower gear or range.

Therefore, using the engine brake relieves

the brakes.

●

Gentle continuous braking causes the

brakes to overheat and the braking dis-

tance will increase. Apply and then release

the brakes alternately.

●

Apply the brakes heavily to clean the

brake system only in a suitable traffic situa-

tion. Do not put other road users in danger:

there is risk of causing an accident.

●

Ensure the vehicle does not move while in

neutral, when the engine is stopped. The

braking distance is increased considerably

when the brake servo is not active.

●

If the brake is subjected to high stresses,

vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-

tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of

the brakes.

●

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers

could restrict the airflow to the brakes and

cause them to overheat. Before purchasing

accessories please read the relevant in-

structions.

291

Driving

CAUTION

●

Never let the brak

es “drag” by leaving

your foot on the pedal when it is not neces-

sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-

sulting in longer stopping distances and

greater wear.

●

Before driving down a long, steep gradi-

ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-

lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine

braking and relieves the brakes. If you still

have to use the brakes, it is better to brake

firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes

continuously.

Note

●

If the brake servo is out of action, for e

ample when the car is being towed, you will

have to press the brake pedal considerably

harder than normal to make up for the lack

of servo assistance.

●

If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-

cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel

covers, it is important that the flow of air to

the front wheels is not obstructed, other-

wise the brakes can overheat.

Electronic parking brake*

Fig. 285

In the lower part of the centre con-

sol

e: el

ectr

onic parking br

e button

The electronic parking brake replaces the

handbr

Applying the el

ectr

onic parking brake

The electronic parking brake can be activa-

ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,

even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-

vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-

cle.

●

Pull and hold the 

›››

Fig. 285 button.

●

The parking brake is activated when the

control light of button

›››

Fig. 285 (arrow) is

on and the red  control lamp on the instru-

ment panel is always on.

●

Release the button.

Disconnecting the electronic parking

brake

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Press the button 

›››

Fig. 285. At the same

time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the

engine is running, press the accelerator pedal

slightly.

●

The control lamp of button

›››

Fig. 285 (ar-

row) and the red  control lamp on the in-

strument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park-

ing brake upon moving off

The electronic parking brake is automatically

switched off when starting if, after the driver's

door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-

tened, any of the following situations take

place:

●

In vehicles with automatic transmission: a

gear range is engaged or the vehicle is

switched to another one and the accelerator

pedal is lightly pressed.

●

In vehicles with manual transmission: the

clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting

off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-

ed.

●

To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are

exceptions that allow the automatic parking

brake to be released without the driver's seat

belt being fastened.

292

Braking and parking

The parking brake can be prevented from be-

ing aut

omatically r

eased by continuously

pulling up the



›››

Fig. 285 switch when

starting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-

nected until the  button is released. This

can facilitate starting off when a heavy load

is towed

›››

page 308.

Automatic activation of the electronic

parking brake when exiting the vehicle in-

correctly

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the

electronic parking brake is activated auto-

matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly

if:

●

The selector lever is in the D/S or R position

or in the Tiptronic selector gate.

●

AND: the vehicle is stationary.

●

AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency brake function

Only use the emergency brake function if you

are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot

brake

›››

●

Pull and hold the 

›

Fig. 285

butt

on in

this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At

the same time, an acoustic warning can be

heard.

●

To stop the braking process, release the 

button or press the accelerator.

WARNING

The improper use of the electronic parking

brake can cause accidents and serious in-

jury.

●

Never use the el

ectronic parking brake to

stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.

Braking distances can be considerably lon-

ger, since, under certain circumstances,

only the rear wheels brake. Always use the

foot brake.

●

Never accelerate from the engine when a

gear range or a gear is engaged and the

engine is running. The vehicle could move,

even if the electronic parking brake is acti-

vated.

CAUTION

To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally

moving when parking it, first apply the

electronic parking brak

e and then remove

your foot from the brake pedal.

Note

●

In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re-

easing the clutch and accelerating at the

same time automatically disconnects the

electronic parking brake.

●

If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be

possibl

e to disconnect the electronic park-

ing brake. Use the jump-start

›››

page 47.

●

When the electronic parking brake is ap-

plied or released, noises may be heard.

●

The system performs automatic and au-

dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-

cle if some time elapses without the elec-

tronic parking brake being used.

Handbrake

Fig. 286

Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly to

ent the v

ehicl

e from accidentally moving.

Apply the handbrake when you leave your

vehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake

–

Pull the handbrake lever up

›››

Fig. 286.

293

Driving

Releasing the handbrake

–

Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-

ease knob in the dir

ection of the arr

›

››

Fig. 286 and guide the handbrake lever

down fully

›››

ays pull the handbr

all the way up, to

avoid driving off while the brake is on

›››

If you driv

e f

ast

er than 6 km/h (

4 mph) with

the handbr

ake on, the following message*

will appear on the instrument panel: HAND-

BRAKE ON. You will also hear an audible

warning.

WARNING

●

Never use the handbrake t

o stop the vehi-

cle when it is in motion. The braking dis-

tance is considerably longer, because

braking is only applied to the rear wheels.

Risk of accident!

●

Failure to fully lower the handbrake lever

can affect the operation of the system, and

can also cause heating and wear of the

rear brakes.

CAUTION

Always apply the handbrake before you

leave the vehicle

. In addition, engage first

or rear gear in the gradient function, or set

the selection lever to P.

Auto Hold Function

Fig. 287

In the lower part of the centre con-

sol

e: Aut

o Hol

d function butt

on.

The control lamp on button 

›

Fig. 287

mains on while the Auto Hold function is con-

nected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-

sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-

ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-

od of time with the engine running, for exam-

ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at

traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-

tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au-

tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling

when stationary without pressing the brake

pedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationary

and the brake pedal has been released, the

Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-

er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the accelerator

pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-

ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.

The vehicle moves according to the slope of

the road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-

ditions required by the Auto Hold function is

impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's

control light goes out

›››

Fig. 287. The elec-

tronic parking brake connects automatically,

if necessary, to park the vehicle safely

›››

Conditions f

or k

eeping the v

ehicl

e st

ation-

ary with the Auto Hold function

●

The driver door must be closed.

●

The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

●

The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on and

off

Pulse button 

›››

. The control lamp on

the butt

on goes out when the Aut

o Hol

d func-

tion is s

wit

ched off.

294

Braking and parking

Automatically engaging and disengaging

the Aut

o Hol

d function

If the Aut

o Hol

d function w

as switched on with

the  button before disconnecting the igni-

tion, the function will remain on after the

ignition is re-connected.

If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,

it will automatically remain off next time the

ignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function connects automat-

ically if the following conditions are met

(all points must be met at the same time

›››

The v

ehicl

e is k

ept

ationary with the

brake pedal on a flat surface or on a

slope.

The engine rotates “correctly”.

The Auto Hold function is automatically

turned off if the following conditions are

met:

If any of the conditions mentioned on

›››

page 294, Conditions for keeping

the vehicle stationary with the Au-

to Hold function are no longer met.

If the engine is running irregularly or an

anomaly is detected.

If the engine is turned off or stalls.

Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac-

celerator are pressed at the same time.

Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is

pressed

Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres

has only minimal contact with the

ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula-

tion.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into

the Auto Hold function cannot defy the

laws of physics; it only works within the lim-

its of the syst

em. The greater convenience

provided by the Auto Hold function should

never tempt you to take any risk that may

compromise safety.

●

Never leave the vehicle running and with

the Auto Hold function switched on.

●

The Auto Hold function cannot always

keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-

hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on

slippery or frozen surfaces.

Note

Before entering a car wash, always switch

off the Auto Hold function, because if the

electronic parking br

ake is automatically

connected, it may cause damage.

Hill driving assistant

3 Valid for vehicles without the Auto Hold func-

tion

The hill driving assistant helps the driver to

ve off and upward on a hill, both forwards

and backwards, when the vehicle is station-

ary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-

proximately two seconds after the foot is tak-

en off the brake pedal, to prevent the vehicle

from moving when it is started. During these 2

seconds, the driver has enough time to re-

lease the clutch pedal and accelerate with-

out the vehicle moving and without having to

use the handbrake, making start-up easier,

more comfortable and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

●

being on a ramp or hill/slope,

●

driver door closed,

●

vehicle completely stationary,

●

engine running and foot on the brake,

●

having a gear engaged or being in neutral

for a manual gearbox, or with the selector

ever at positions D/S or R for an automatic

gearbox.

WARNING

●

If you do not start the vehicle immediat

ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal,

the vehicle may roll back under certain

295

Driving

conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use

the hand brake immediately.

●

If the engine stall

s, depress the brake

pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

●

When following a line of traffic uphill, if

you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling

back when starting off, hold the brake ped-

al down for a few seconds before starting

off.

Note

The Official Service or a specialist work-

shop can t

ell you if your vehicle is equip-

ped with this system.

Stabilisation and brake as-

sist

ance syst

ems

Contr

ol l

amps



It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by

the system.

The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the

ABS fails, the l

amp also lights up.



Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.



It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode

›››

page 298.



It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when the

ignition is switched on and should turn off af-

ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time

taken for the function check.

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The ESC helps t

o impr

e saf

ety. It reduces

the tendency to skid and improves the stabili-

ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC

detects critical handling situations, such as

vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin

on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle

by braking individual wheels or by reducing

the engine torque. The warning lamp will

flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is

intervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system

(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the

traction control system (ASR), electronic dif-

ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control

(XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by

changing the torque.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin

is desirable

›››

page 298.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-

der braking until the vehicle has reached a

virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the

vehicle even when the brakes are on full.

Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not

pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal

pulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi-

fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-

verely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

The brake assist system can reduce the re-

quired braking distance. The braking force is

automatically boosted if you press the brake

pedal quickly in an emergency. You must

keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-

ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)

In the event of wheelspin, the traction control

system reduces the engine torque to match

the amount of grip available. This helps the

car to start moving, accelerate or climb a

gradient.

296

Braking and parking

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

When the EDL det

ects wheel

spin, it br

the spinning wheel and dir

ects the power to

the other driven wheel. This function is active

up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel

from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-

cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-

hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on

again automatically when the brake has

cooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*

If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control

the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.

When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the

vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-

matically brake the towing vehicle within the

limits of the system and mitigate the sway.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available

in all countries

›››

page 314.

Electronic engine torque management

(XDS)

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-

tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher

speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the

wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-

ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.

This may mean that in certain situations the

torque delivered to the inner wheel is too

high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other

hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower

drive torque than it could transmit. This can

cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this

case the front axle, which results in under-

steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effect

via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside

wheel and counter the excess driving torque

of that wheel. This means that the requested

trajectory is much more precise.

XDS works in combination with the ESC and is

always active, even when ASR is disconnec-

ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-

connected.

Multi-collision brake

In an accident, the multi-collision brake can

help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of

skidding during the accident and causing

other collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, side

or rear accidents, when the airbag control

unit records its activation level and the acci-

dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h

(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the

vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-

aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-

board network

The following actions control automatic brak-

ing during the accident:

●

When the driver presses the accelerator,

the automatic braking does not take place.

●

When the braking pressure through press-

ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-

tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake

automatically.

●

Multi-collision braking will not be available

if ESC is malfunctioning.

WARNING

Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet

ground can result in loss of vehicl

e control

and serious injury to the driver and passen-

gers.

●

The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-

ic torque control system cannot exceed the

limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al-

ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or

slippery roads. If you notice the systems

cutting in, you should reduce your speed

immediately to suit the road and traffic

conditions. Do not be encouraged to take

risks by the presence of more safety sys-

tems. If you do, an accident may occur.

●

Please remember that the accident risk

always increases if you drive fast, espe-

cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if

you follow too close behind the vehicle in

front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,

EDS and the electronic torque control sys-

tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-

dents!

297

Driving

●

Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-

aces (for example, icy or snow-covered).

Despite the control systems, the driven

wheels could spin, affecting the stability of

the vehicle: risk of accident!

Note

●

The ABS and ASR will only oper

ate cor-

rectly if the f

our wheels have identical

tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius

of the tyres can cause the system to re-

duce engine power when this is not desired.

●

The regulating processes of the systems

can make noises due to their operation.

●

If the warning lamp  or  lights up,

there could be a fault

›››

page 89.

●

Any modifications made to the vehicle

(for example, to the engine, brake system,

running gear or to the combination of

wheels and tyres) may affect the operation

of the ABS, ASR and EDS.

Connecting and disconnecting the

ESC and ASR

Fig. 288

Centre console: Button for switching

on/off the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically when

the engine is st

art

ed, and only w

orks when

the engine is running and includes the ABS,

EDS and ASR syst

ems.

The ASR function shoul

d only be switched off

in situations in which traction is insufficient.

Depending on the finishes and versions, there

is the possibility of disconnecting only the

ASR or activating the ESC in “Sport” mode.

Disconnecting and connecting the ASR

●

The ASR can be disconnected and connec-

ted using the Easy Connect system

›››

page 92. In vehicles with a driver informa-

tion system* the corresponding indication will

be displayed.

When the ASR is disconnected, the control

warning light  lights up on the instrument

cluster.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in

“Sport” mode

●

In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be discon-

nected and connected using the Easy Con-

nect system

›››

page 92. In vehicles with a

driver information system* the corresponding

indication will be displayed.

When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter-

ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,

and the anti-slip regulation (ASR

) interven-

tions are limited. In addition, the  control

lamp lights up on the instrument panel.

Disconnection of the ESC*

In some versions of the model, besides the

traction control system (ASR), the electronic

stability programme (ESC) can also be

switched off.

●

Press the  button

›››

Fig. 288 for approxi-

mately 1 second to switch to ESC Sport

mode.

In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the ASR is dis-

connected completely

››

›

298

Braking and parking

●

ess the butt



›

Fig. 288 for approxi-

mately 3 seconds to switch off the Electronic

Stability programme (ESC), including the ASR

function. The  control lamp lights up and the

ESC OFF message is displayed permanently

on the instrument panel display.

●

The ASR and ESC function are reconnected

by pressing the button 

›››

Fig. 288.

●

OR: Activate or deactivate the ESC Sport or

ESC in the Easy Connect system

›››

page 92.

The  control lamp and the ESC OFF text on

the instrument panel switch off.

WARNING

The ESC Sport mode should be activated

only when traffic conditions and the ability

of the driver allo

w it. Danger of skidding!

●

With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising

function will be limited to allow for a sporti-

er drive. The driving wheels could spin and

the vehicle could skid.

●

If the ESC is deactivated, the vehicle sta-

bilisation function is not available.

Note

●

If the ASR is disconnected or the Sport

mode is selected, cruise contr

ol* will be

switched off.

●

In ESC OFF mode, the ESC will be tempo-

rarily reactivated to assist the driver during

braking and will then switch back to pas-

sive mode when the brake pedal is re-

leased (depending on the model version).

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-

ments should be observed.

Always not

e the following points when park-

ing the vehicle:

●

Park the vehicle on a suitable surface

›››

●

Set the parking brake

›

page 293

or con-

nect the el

ectronic parking brake

›››

page 292.

●

For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-

tor lever to position P.

●

Switch the engine off and remove the key

from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel

slightly to engage the steering lock.

●

With a manual gearbox, engage first gear

on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse

gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.

●

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with

you.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines

Before switching off the engine, rotate the

steering wheel so that if the vehicle should

move, it will be held by the kerb.

●

On slopes, turn the front wheels so that

they are against the edge of the kerb.

●

Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of

the road.

WARNING

●

Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot

xhaust system could ignite inflammable

materials, such as dry grass, low bushes,

spilt fuel or flammable materials.

●

Do not leave passengers inside a closed

vehicle, they may not be able to open

doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the

possibility of a rescue.

●

Children should not be left alone in the

vehicle. They could tamper with the hand-

brake or the gears, which could cause the

vehicle to move without control.

●

Depending on weather conditions, it may

become extremely hot or cold inside the

vehicle. This can be fatal.

Note

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the

key can only be removed fr

om the ignition

when the lever is in position P.

299

Driving

Help with parking and ma-

noeuvring

arking aid parking and ma-

noeuvring (P

arkPil

ot)

Intr

oduction

Fig. 289 Related video

These assist systems help you when parking

and manoeuvring:

–

Park assist plus. It is an assist

ant that giv

a visual and audio w

arning of obst

acl

es de-

tected in front and behind the vehicle

›››

page 301.

–

Rear parking aid. An audio assistant that

warns about obstacles detected behind the

vehicle

›››

page 304.

WARNING

●

Always pay attention, by looking dir

ectly,

to traffic and the area around the vehicle.

Assistance systems are not a replacement

for driver awareness. Responsibility always

lies with the driver.

●

The sensors have blind spots in which ob-

stacl

es and people are not detected. Pay

special attention to children and animals.

●

Always keep visual control of the sur-

roundings: use the mirrors for additional

help.

CAUTION

Parking distance warning system functions

can be aff

ected by different f

actors that

can cause damage:

●

Under certain circumstances, the system

does not detect or display certain objects:

–

Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees.

–

Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.

–

Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-

der snow.

●

Certain surfaces of objects and gar-

ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-

sors' signals. The system cannot detect

these objects or people wearing such

clothes correctly.

●

Sensor signals may be affected by exter-

nal sound sources. This may prevent them

from detecting people or objects.

●

If the system warns you of the proximity

of a low obstacle, please note that after

being detected by the system, the obstacle

in question may disappear from the meas-

urement sensors as the vehicle mo

ves clos-

er, and the system will no longer warn of its

presence. In certain circumstances, ob-

jects such as high kerbs that could damage

the underside of the vehicle are not detec-

ted.

●

If the parking distance warning system is

ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-

ble damage.

●

Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,

wheel arch and vehicle underbody can

modify the orientation of the sensors. This

can affect the parking aid function. Have

the function checked by a specialised

workshop.

●

A number plate or number plate holder

with dimensions that exceed the space for

the number plate, or a cured or deformed

number plate can cause false detections or

a loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note

●

The display on the Easy Connect screen

shows a slight time delay.

●

In cer

tain situations, the system can give

a warning even though there is no obstacle

in the detected area;

–

rough or cobbled surfaces or with long

grass,

300

Help with parking and manoeuvring

–

external ultrasound sources, such as

other v

ehicles equipped with

ultrasound systems,

–

downpours, heavy snow, hail or dense

exhaust gases,

–

if the number plate is not perfectly se-

cured to the bumper surface,

–

in gradient changes.

●

In order to guarantee good operation,

keep the sensors clean, free of snow and

ice, and do not cover them with stickers or

other objects.

●

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-

ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,

unless you do so very briefly, and always

keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.

●

Fitting certain accessories to the front of

the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-

vertising, may interfere with the operation

of the Park Assist.

●

We recommend that you practice park-

ing in an area without traffic.

●

The volume and tone of the signals and

indications can be changed

›››

page 305.

●

In vehicles without an infotainment sys-

tem, these parameters can be modified in a

SEAT Official Service or in a specialised

workshop.

●

Please observe information on towing a

trailer

›››

page 305.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 290

Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-

nect syst

em scr

een.

Parking aid plus assists the driv

er by giving

visual and audio w

arnings about obst

acl

det

ected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an

obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible

signals and in the Easy Connect system

›››

Fig. 290.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi-

ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve-

hicle or behind it by choosing different

sounds.

The approximate measurement range of the

sensors is:

1.20 m

0.60 m

60 m

As you appr

oach the obst

acl

e, the frequency

of the audible signals will increase. The signal

will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:

Stop!

If separation is maintained, the warning vol-

ume reduces after about 4 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 291

Centre console: parking aid button.

Manually connecting and disconnecting

the parking aid

●

Press the  butt

once

301

Driving

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-

ay (the audibl

e sounds r

emain activ

●

ess a button on the main menu of the fac-

tory-assembled infotainment system.

●

OR press the BACK  function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid

●

Select reverse gear.

●

OR: If you drive forward at a speed of less

than 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter an

obstacle, it is detected when it is approx. less

than 95 cm. away. If the automatic connec-

tion is activated, a reduced display is shown

›››

Fig. 292.

●

OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-

tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx

depending on whether or not an obstacle is

detected)

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

●

Move the selector lever to position P.

●

OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) or

faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-

ing Aid

●

Press the  function button.

Change from reduced view to full view

●

Select reverse gear.

●

OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.

●

OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-

tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx

depending on whether or not an obstacle is

detected).

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear

View Camera “RVC”)

●

Select reverse gear.

●

OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and

the button symbol will light up when the sys-

tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 292

Miniature indication of automatic ac-

tiv

ation.

When the parking aid plus connects aut

matically, a diagr

am of the v

ehicl

e and the

segments will appear on the l

eft of the dis-

play

›››

Fig. 292.

It only operates every time the speed is re-

duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first

time.

If it is switched off using the  button, one of

the following actions must be taken for it to

reactivate automatically:

●

Switch off the ignition and switch it on

again.

●

OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)

approx.

●

OR: move the lever into position P and pack

again.

●

OR: switch the automatic activation on and

off in the Easy Connect system.

The automatic activation of the parking aid

can be switched on and off in the Easy Con-

nect system

›››

page 92:

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Select: infotainment button    > Ve-

hicle > SETTINGS > Parking and ma-

noeuvring.

●

Select Automatic activation. If the box

is checked , the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible sound

warning will only be given when obstacles in

front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-

prox.

302

Help with parking and manoeuvring

CAUTION

The automatic connection of the Parking

Aid only works when you are driving slowly.

If driving st

yle is not adapted to the circum-

stances, an accident and serious injury or

damage may be caused.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 293

Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-

nect syst

em scr

een.

The optical indication of the segments works

as f

oll

ws:

Whit

e segments:

the obstacle is more

than approx. 30 cm away from the path

or in the direction opposite to travel.

They are also displayed when the elec-

tronic parking brake is activated.

–

Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on

the vehicle’s path and are at a distance

of less than approx. 30 cm away.

Red segments: obstacles are less than

approx. 30 cm away.

With the Media System Plus, Navi System or

Navi System Plus, yellow lines show the ex-

pected trajectory based on turns of the steer-

ing wheel.

If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,

the corresponding audible warning will

sound.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,

the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In

the collision zone, the obstacles are repre-

sented in red, including those out of the path.

Stop the vehicle!

›››

in Introduction on

page 300,

›

in Introduction on

page 300 !

Setting the indications and audio

signal

The indications and audio signal settings are

in Easy Connect*

›

page 92

Aut

omatic activation

 on –  off.

–

Front volume*

Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*

Sound tone in the front area.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Sound tone in the rear area.

Adjust volume

When the parking aid is switched on, the vol-

ume of the audio source will be reduced, de-

pending on the selected option.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on the

instrument panel in P

arking assist, ther

e is a

ault.

If the f

ault doesn'

t disappear before discon-

necting the ignition, it will not be indicated

next time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in

the areas

and

are displayed

›

Fig. 290

. If a fr

ont sensor is faulty, only the

obstacles in the areas

and

will be dis-

ayed. Symbol  is displ

ayed.

303

Driving

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-

alised w

orkshop t

o hav

e the f

ault r

epaired.

Trailer mode

On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch,

when the trailer is connected, the rear sen-

sors will not activ

ate when reverse gear is en-

gaged or button  is pressed. Therefore, any

objects behind or to the side of the vehicle

will not be indicated on the screen and no

audio signals will sound.

The screen will only display objects detected

at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will

be hidden.

Manoeuvre braking function*

3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency br

aking function is used to

minimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking

Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring

function activates emergency braking when it

detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that

could cause a collision, driving forwards or in

reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is

activated automatically. For the system to

operate, manoeuvring speed must be be-

tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6

mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and

10 km/h (betw

een 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking while

manoeuvring function will be inactive in the

same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once

the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s

position is changed, the function will be ac-

tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.

The manoeuvre braking function is set in the

Easy Connect system with button    >

Vehicle > SETTINGS > Parking and ma-

noeuvring.

●

 on – permits the use of the braking while

manoeuvring function.

●

 off – does not permit the use of the

braking whil

e manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency

braking

●

When the function is deactivated with the

Manoeuvre braking button that appears on

the Parking assist scr

een of the Easy Con-

nect system.

●

Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or

bonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible assistant

that warns of obstacles l

ocated behind the

vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rear

bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you

are alerted by audible warnings and visually

on the Easy Connect system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are

not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and

the like, as this could affect the system's op-

eration. Cleaning instructions

›››

page 360.

The approximate measurement range of the

rear sensors is:

0.60 m

1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequency

of the audible signals will increase. The signal

will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:

Stop!

›››

in Introduction on page 300,

›

in Introduction on page 300!

If the separ

ation is maint

ained, the w

arning

olume is r

educed after about 4 seconds.

Side area:

Central area:

304

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection

●

Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection

●

Place the selector l

evel in position P, N or D

(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-

verse (for manual gearboxes).

Setting the indications and audio signals

The indications and audio signal settings are

in Easy Connect*

›››

page 92.

●

Rear volume*: volume in the rear area.

●

Rear sound settings/treble*: sound

tone in the r

ear area.

●

Lower volume: when the parking aid is

switched on, the volume of the audio source

will be reduced, depending on the selected

option.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on the

instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a

fault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-

necting the ignition, it will not be indicated

next time the parking aid is connected.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-

alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing device

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket

device from the factory, when the trailer is

connected, the parking aid will not be activa-

ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Reverse Assist (Rear View

Camera)*

Operating and safety warnings

Fig. 294 Related video

WARNING

●

The reverse assist does not make it possi-

e to precisely calculate the distance from

obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-

tem's own limits, hence its negligent use

may cause serious accidents and injuries if

used without due care. The driver should be

aware of his/her surroundings at all times

to ensure safe driving.

●

The camera lens expands and distorts

the field of view and displays the objects

on the screen in a way that is different from

reality. Distance perception is also distor-

ted.

●

Due to the screen resolution or light con-

ditions, some it

ems may be blurry or not

displayed at all. Take care with thin posts,

fences, railings or trees that might not be

seen on the screen and could damage the

vehicle.

●

The reverse assist has blind spots where

it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the

vehicle's surrounding area at all times.

●

Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice

and snow, and do not cover it.

●

The system is not a replacement for driv-

er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-

noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area

at all times.

●

Do not be distracted from the traffic by

looking at the screen.

●

The images are only two-dimensional.

Protruding objects or holes in the road, for

example, are more difficult to detect or

may not be seen at all.

●

Vehicle load modifies the representation

of the guide lines

›››

Fig. 296. The width rep-

resented by the lines decreases with vehi-

cle load. Pay special attention to the sur-

roundings when the inside of the vehicle of

the luggage compartment are loaded.

●

In the following situations, objects or oth-

er vehicles appear to be further away or

closer than they actually are. Pay special

attention:

305

Driving

–

If moving from a flat surface t

o a slope

and vice-versa.

–

If the vehicle is heavily loaded.

–

When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface or

that protrude from it. These objects

may be outside the camera angle when

reversing.

Note

●

It is impor

tant to tak

e great care and pay

special attention if the driver is not familiar

with the system.

●

Reverse assist will not be available if the

rear lid is open.

Usage instructions

Fig. 295 In the rear bumper: location of the re-

erse assist camer

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver

when r

erse parking or manoeuvring

›

Fig. 295

The camera image is viewed together with

orientation lines projected on the Infotain-

ment system screen. Part of the bumper can

be seen at the bottom, which can be used by

the driver as a reference point.

Rear assist settings

Rear assist offers the user the possibility to

change the image's brightness, contrast and

colour settings.

To change these settings:

●

Stop the vehicle in a safe place without

switching off the ignition or the infotainment

system.

●

Apply the parking brake.

●

Select reverse gear.

●

Press the  function button displayed on

the screen.

●

Make the desired adjustments on the menu

by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by

moving the scroll button.

Requirements for parking and manoeu-

vring with the rear assist

The system should not be used in the follow-

ing cases:

●

If the image displayed is not very reliable or

is distorted, or if the lens is dirty.

●

If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete.

●

If the vehicle is heavily loaded.

●

If the position of the camera has changed

after a rear-end collision. Have the system

checked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, the

orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-

ommends practising in a place without too

much traffic or in a car park when there are

good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of

snow and ice:

●

Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-

based glass cleaning product and clean the

lens with a dry cloth.

●

Remove snow using a small brush.

●

Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION

●

Do not use abrasive cleaning products t

clean the camera lens.

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove

ice or snow from the camera lens, as it

could be damaged.

306

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking and manoeuvring with re-

erse assist

Fig. 296

Display on the Easy Connect system

scr

een: guide lines.

Meaning of the orientation lines

›

Fig. 296

eral lines: extension of the vehicle

(approximately in its total width) on the

road.

End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behind

the vehicle on the road.

Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind the

vehicle on the road.

Horizontal red line: a safe distance of

approx. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle

on the road.

Switching the system on and off

●

Reverse assist is connected by a contact

when engaging r

erse gear

●

The syst

em switches off 8 seconds after

disengaging reverse gear and immediately

after removing the contact.

●

The camera will stop transmitting images

above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-

verse engaged.

In combination with the parking aid plus sys-

tem

›››

page 301, the camera image will no

longer be displayed when reverse gear is dis-

engaged, and the system will display the op-

tical information provided by the parking aid

system.

It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im-

age:

●

By pressing one of the Infotainment system

buttons on the display.

●

OR: by clicking on the miniature vehicle

shown on the screen.

If you wish to display the rear assist image

again:

●

Disengage and re-engage reverse gear.

●

OR: Press the RVC function button

Parking manoeuvre

●

Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-

lect reverse gear.

●

Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel

so that the side lines lead towards the park-

ing space.

●

Guide the vehicle into the parking space so

that the side lines run parallel to it.

The RVC button will only be displayed when re-

verse gear is engaged.

307

Driving

Towing bracket device*

ail

er mode

Intr

oduction

Take into account country-specific regula-

tions about driving with a trailer and the use

of a towing br

acket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily for

carrying people, although it can also be used

to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding

technical equipment. This additional load has

an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption

and vehicle performance and in some cases

can reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force from

the vehicle, and thus more concentration

from the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both

the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit-

ted on the coupling device

The maximum technically permitted vertical

load of the trailer’s drawbar on the hitch of

the towing device is 80 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing

bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the

Start-Stop system operates as normal. No

special characteristics need to be tak

en into

account.

If the system does not recognise the trailer or

the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by

SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-

nected by pressing the corresponding button

in the lower part of the centre console before

driving with the trailer, and it should remain

off for the rest of the journey

›››

ehicl

es with driving pr

ofil

e sel

ection

If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use

of the Eco driving profile is not recommen-

ded. You are advised to select another of the

available driving profiles before beginning to

drive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If

you do not load the trailer up to the maximum

permitted trailer weight, you can then climb

correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only

applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above

sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-

gine performance and the ability to climb

slopes, the tow load decreases proportional-

ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-

bination must be reduced by 10% for every

1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate

the trailer with the maximum authorised

drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing

bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-

it.

WARNING

Never use the trailer to transport people,

since it would put their life in danger and is

also pr

ohibited.

WARNING

Undue use of the towing bracket may

cause injury and accidents.

●

Only use the towing bracket if it is in a

perfect state of repair and is pr

operly se-

cured.

●

Never modify or repair the towing bracket

in any way.

●

In order to reduce the danger of injury in

the event of rear-end collisions and to

avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists

when parking the vehicle, cover or remove

the tow hook when you are not using a trail-

er.

●

Never fit a towing bracket “with weight

distribution” or “load compensation”. The

vehicle has not been designed for this type

of towing bracket. The towing bracket

could fail and the trailer could be released

from the vehicle.

308

Towing bracket device*

WARNING

Driving with a trailer and transporting

heavy or large objects can affect driving

operties and even cause an accident.

●

Always secure the load properly using

belts or straps that are suitable and in

good condition.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

Trailers with a high centre of gravity are

more likely to overturn than those with a

low one.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Take great care when overtaking.

●

Reduce speed immediately if you notice

that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.

●

Never drive at more than 80 km/h

(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more

than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-

cumstances). This also applies in countries

where driving at higher speeds is permit-

ted. Take into account the speed limit for

vehicles with trailers in the corresponding

country, as it could be less than the speed

limit for vehicles without a trailer.

●

Never attempt to “straighten” the towing

vehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNING

If the towing bracket has been retrofitted

by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start

-Stop

system must be disconnected manually

whenever driving with a trailer

. Otherwise

the brake system could be damaged and

could consequently cause a serious acci-

dent or injury.

●

Always disconnect the Start-Stop system

manually when using a towing bracket that

has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note

●

Bef

ore hitching or unhitching a tr

ailer, al-

ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm

›››

page 100. Otherwise, the tilt sensor

could cause the alarm to go off.

●

Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's

first 1000 km

›››

page 266.

●

SEAT recommends that, if possible, the

tow hook be removed or covered when it is

not going to be used. In the event of a rear-

end collision, the damage to the vehicle

could be greater if the tow hook is fitted.

●

Some retrofitted towing brackets cover

the rear towing eye. In these cases, the

towing eye should not be used for tow-

starting or for towing other vehicles. For

this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-

ted with a towing bracket, always keep the

tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-fitted with a t

owing

bracket meet all the technical and legal re-

quirements for driving with a trailer

›››

page 315.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing

bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for

the maximum authorised load of the trailer

that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing

bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and

the trailer and must be properly secured to

the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing

bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for

this vehicle. Always check and take into ac-

count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-

structions. Never fit a towing bracket “with

weight distribution” or “load compensation”.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumper

Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to

the area where the bumper is mounted. The

towing bracket should not impair the bum-

per's function. Do not make modifications or

repairs to the exhaust system or the brake

system. Make regular checks to ensure that

the towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling system

Driving with a trailer increases the load on the

engine and cooling system. The cooling sys-

tem should have sufficient coolant and be

309

Driving

prepared for the additional effort involved in

driving with a tr

ail

ailer brakes

If the trailer has its own brake system, please

take the relevant legal requirements into ac-

count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-

tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cable

Always use a cable between the vehicle and

the trailer

›››

page 310.

Trailer tail lights

The trailer's rear lights should comply with

the statutory safety regulations

›››

page 310.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly

to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not

sure that the trailer's electrical connection is

correct, have it checked by a specialised

workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership for this.

Exterior mirrors

If you cannot see the area behind the trailer

with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,

additional mirrors will have to be installed in

accordance with the regulations of the coun-

try in question. The exterior mirrors should be

adjusted before you start driving and must

provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Never exceed the values indicated!

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts

Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

WARNING

If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is

not the right one, the trailer could become

det

ached from the vehicle and cause seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

●

If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor

rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic

system may be damaged.

●

If the trailer absorbs excessive electric

current, the vehicle's electronic system

may be damaged.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem directly to the electrical connections

of the tail lights or any other power sour-

ces. Only use the connections intended for

providing electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 297 Schematic representation: assign-

ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock

et.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

310

Towing bracket device*

Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailer

The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole po

wer

socket for the connection between the trailer

and the vehicle. With the engine running,

electrical devices on the trailer receive power

from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin

10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has been

connected, the consumers on the trailer will

receive electricity through this connection

(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.

This powers, for example, the trailer's interior

lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in

a caravan only receive electrical power if the

engine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,

you cannot connect the ground wires of pin

3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you

will need to use an adapter cable. In this case

the function corresponding to pin 10 will not

be available.

Tow cable

The tow rope must always be securely fixed

to the towing vehicle and loose enough so

that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.

However

, make sure that the cable does not

rub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lights

Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure

they are working correctly and that they

comply with the relevant safety regulations.

Make sure that the maximum permissible

power that can be absorbed by the trailer is

not exceeded

›››

page 310.

Include in the anti-theft alarm

The trailer is included in the anti-theft system

if the following conditions are met:

●

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an

anti-theft alarm and towing bracket.

●

If the trailer is electrically connected to the

towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-

et.

●

If the electrical systems of the vehicle and

trailer are in perfect condition and have no

faults or damage.

●

If the vehicle is locked with the key and the

anti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-

gered if the electrical connection with the

trailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always

turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt

sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lights

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED

rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-

theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does

not go off when the electrical connection

with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with

light-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected when

hitching the trailer, this will automatically

switch to the Normal profile. If the system

cannot detect the attached trailer or if the

towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-

to repair shop other than SEAT, you must

manually select the Normal profile before

you start driving with a trailer attached. To re-

connect the Eco profile once the trailer has

been unhitched, switch the ignition off and

back on once.

WARNING

If the cables are improperly or incorrectly

connected, it may lead to an ex

cessive

amount of current supplied to the trailer,

which can cause abnormalities in the entire

vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-

dents and serious injuries.

311

Driving

●

Ensure that any repairs that need to be

carried out on the electrical syst

em are

carried out by a specialised workshop.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem directly to the electrical connections

of the tail lights or any other power sour-

ces.

WARNING

Contact between the pins of the trailer

wer socket can cause short cir

cuits,

overloading of the electrical system or fail-

ure of the lighting system, and consequent-

ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.

●

Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-

er socket to each other.

●

Make sure any work on bent pins is car-

ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION

Do not leave the trailer connected to the

vehicle when parked; place it on its suppor

wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or

falls due, for example, to a variation of the

load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will

be placed on the towing bracket and the

trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer

can be damaged.

Note

●

In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-

tems of the vehicle or tr

ailer, as well as in

the anti-theft alarm system, have them in-

spected by a specialised workshop.

●

If the trail

er accessories consume energy

through the power socket to the trailer and

the engine is turned off, the battery will dis-

charge.

●

If the vehicle battery is running low, the

electrical connection with the trailer will be

automatically cut.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailer

eight and v

tical l

oad on the coupling

vice

The technically permissible maximum trailer

weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow

›››

. The vertical load on the coupling is ex-

ert

ed v

ertically fr

om abo

e on the hook of the

towing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailer

weight and vertical load on the coupling de-

vice contained in the type plate of the towing

bracket are experimental values only. The

correct figures for your specific model, which

may be lower than these figures, are given in

the vehicle documentation. The information in

the vehicle documentation takes precedence

at all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-

mends making the most of the maximum ver-

tical load technically permissible on the

coupling device

›››

page 308. An insufficient

vertical load has a negative influence on the

behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on the

rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-

pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towing

vehicle and trailer

The gross combination weight is the actual

weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual

weight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified into

distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-

taining information from a specialised work-

shop regarding which type of trailer is most

suitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loading

The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer

must be balanced. In order to do this, the

load must be as close as possible to the max-

imum vertical load technically permissible on

the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-

tributed between the back and front of the

trailer:

●

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy

objects are as near to the axle as possible or

above it.

●

Secure the trailer load properly.

312

Towing bracket device*

Tyre pressure

Set the t

e pr

essur

e of the tr

ailer tyres in ac-

cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-

ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the

towing vehicle with the maximum allowable

pressure

›››

page 348.

WARNING

If the maximum permissible axle weight, the

maximum load technically permissible on

the coupling point, the maximum author-

ised v

ehicle weight or the gross combina-

tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer

are exceeded, accidents and serious inju-

ries may occur.

●

Never exceed the values indicated!

●

The actual weight on the front and rear

axles must never exceed the maximum per-

missible axle weight. The weight on the

front and rear axles must never exceed the

maximum permissible weight.

WARNING

A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-

ity and security of the towing v

ehicle and

trailer, which could lead to accidents and

serious injuries.

●

Always load the trail

er correctly.

●

Always secure the load properly using

belts or straps that are suitable and in

good condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights

The front part of the vehicle may be raised

when the tr

ailer is connected and the light

may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the

headlight range adjuster

›››

page 125

Specific features of driving with a trailer

●

If your trailer has an overrun brake

, brake

gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-

vent the jerking that can be caused by the

locking of trailer wheels.

●

Due to the gross combination weight of the

towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-

tance increases.

●

When going down a slope, go into a lower

gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-

tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-

vantage of the braking power provided by the

engine. Otherwise, the braking system could

overheat and even fail.

●

The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-

bination weight of the towing vehicle and

trailer, change the centre of gravity and the

properties of the vehicle.

●

If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer

is loaded, then the load distribution is incor-

rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and

with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailer

Depending on the slope of the hill and the

combination weight of the towing vehicle and

trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-

wards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

●

Press and hold the brake pedal.

●

Press the  button once to disconnect the

electronic parking brake

›››

page 292.

●

If the vehicle is equipped with a manual

gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way

down.

●

Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-

lector lever to position D/S

›››

page 254.

This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED

xenon headlights.

313

Driving

●

Pull out the  butt

on and hol

d it in that po-

sition t

o immobilise the t

wing vehicle and

trailer with the electronic parking brake.

●

Release the brake pedal.

●

Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of

a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch

pedal.

●

Do not release the  button until the en-

gine has sufficient power to start driving.

WARNING

If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may

lead to loss of control of the v

ehicle and

serious injury.

●

Driving with a trailer and transporting

heavy or large objects will change the ve-

hicle handling and braking distances.

●

Always drive cautiously and carefully.

Brake earlier than usual.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions. Slow down, especially

when driving down hills or slopes.

●

Accelerate with particular care and cau-

tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-

vres.

●

Take great care when overtaking. Reduce

speed immediately if you notice that the

trailer is swaying, however slightly.

●

Never attempt to “straighten” the towing

vehicle and trailer while accelerating.

●

Take into account the speed limit for v

ehi-

cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than

for vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle

and trailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer

combination is an additional function of the

electronic stability contr

ol (ESC).

If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation system

detects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac-

tion on the steering control to reduce the

weaving of the trailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-

tion requirements

●

The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-

ing bracket or has been retro-fitt

ed with a

compatible towing bracket.

●

The ESC and ASR are active. The control

lamp  or  is not lit up on the instrument

cluster.

●

The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-

cle through the trailer power socket.

●

The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h

(approx. 37 mph).

●

The maximum vertical load technically per-

missible is not being exceeded on the cou-

pling device.

●

The trailer has a rigid draw bar.

●

If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped

with a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNING

The enhanced safety provided by the elec-

tric stability control of the vehicl

e and trail-

er should not lead you to take any risks that

could compromise your safety.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions.

●

Accelerate with caution when the road is

slippery.

●

When adjusting any settings, stop accel-

erating.

WARNING

The electric stability control for the vehicle

and trailer may not correctly detect all

driving conditions.

●

When the ESC is s

witched off, the stabili-

sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-

so switched off.

●

The stability system does not always de-

tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise

these correctly.

●

When driving on surfaces with poor grip,

the trailer can even interfere with the sta-

bility system.

●

Trailers with a high centre of gravity can

tip over without having previously weaved.

314

Towing bracket device*

●

If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-

tor is plugged int

o the power socket (e.g.

installation of a bicycle rack with lights),

repeated automatic braking may occur in

extreme driving conditions.

Towing bracket device*

Description

Fig. 298

The towing device supports trailers /

w hook / k

Depending on the country or version, the re-

abl

e hook of the t

wing device is under

the cover of the load area of the luggage

compartment.

The tow hook is fitted and removed by hand

and is supplied with a key.

13-pin connector

Safety lug

Hook housing

Hook housing cap

Protective cap of the ball head

Removable tow hook

Locking lever

Lock cover

Release bolt

Lock

Locking balls

Key

Operation and conservation

Put the cover on the housing cavity so that

dirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check the

ball head and apply suitable grease if neces-

sary.

Use the protective cap to store the tow hook.

Clean the housing cavity surfaces and treat

them with an appr

opriat

e conserv

ation pr

od-

uct.

WARNING

●

Before each journey with the tow hook fit

ted, make sure that it is correctly adjusted

and attached in its housing.

●

If the tow hook is not properly fitted and

attached, do not use it.

●

Do not use the towing bracket device for

towing if it is damaged or has missing parts.

●

Do not modify or adapt the towing device

connection.

●

Never unhook the tow hook while the

trailer is hitched.

CAUTION

●

Handle the tow hook with care in or

der to

avoid damaging the bumper paintwork.

●

The top part of the hook housing is

greased

›››

Fig. 298

. When using the de-

vice, make sure that it has not been re-

ved.

Note

●

Contact a specialised workshop if you

lose your key.

●

owing the vehicle with the tow hook

›››

page 49.

315

Driving

Placing in the standby position

Fig. 299

Tow hook reserve position

Fig. 300 Reserve position: position verification

Before assembling it, place the tow hook in

the st

andby position with the f

oll

wing tw

steps.

●

Insert and turn the key in the direction of the

arrow

›››

Fig. 299

until the hole in the key

aces up

ds (arr

ow).

●

Grab the tow hook under the protective

cover.

●

Press the release bolt

›››

Fig. 299

in the

dir

ection of arr

, while pressing lever

in the direction of arrow

as far as it will go.

●

The lever will remain blocked in this posi-

tion.

erification of the r

eserv

e position

●

›

››

Fig. 300

is in the released posi-

tion (the k

ey hol

e is f

acing up

ards).

●

The release bolt

›››

Fig. 300

can be

ed.

●

›››

Fig. 300

is in the lower position.

When adjust

ed in this w

ay, the t

w hook is

eady to be installed.

CAUTION

The key cannot be removed or turned in the

standby position.

316

Towing bracket device*

Fitting the tow hook

Fig. 301

Putting the tow hook in place. Step 1.

Fig. 302

Putting the tow hook in place. Step 2.

Step 1.

●

Remove the hook housing cap

›

Fig. 298

downwards.

●

Put the tow hook in its standby position

›

page 316

●

Hol

d the tow hook from below and fit it into

the hook hosing in the direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 301

until it is heard to fit into place

›

Lever

›

Fig. 301

aut

omatically turns in

the dir

ection of arr

upwards, and the re-

ease bolt

moves outwards (its red and

een parts ar

e visibl

›

If l

does not turn or the release bolt

does not come out, the tow hook should be

emo

ed by t

urning the l

ever as far as possi-

ble downwards from the housing cavity, and

the tow hook’s support surfaces and the cavi-

ty should then be cleaned.

Step 2.

●

Turn the key to the right just half a turn, until

the hole in the key faces downwards

›››

Fig. 302

●

Remove the key

●

Place the cover

on the lock

›››

Fig. 302

›

››

●

Check that the tow hook is correctly fixed in

ace

›

page 318, Saf

ety check.

WARNING

●

Keep your hands away from the le

ver

when fitting the tow hook to avoid trapping

your fingers

›››

Fig. 301

●

Do not try to force the lever up to turn the

key. The detachable ball woul

d not be se-

cured properly!

317

Driving

CAUTION

●

After removing the key, pl

ace the cover

over the lever's lock. If the lock becomes

soiled it will be impossible to insert the key.

●

Keep the device's housing cavity clean.

Dirtiness can prevent the tow hook from

being safety secured!

●

If the device is removed, always place

the cap in the hook's housing.

Safety check

Fig. 303 Tow hook fixed correctly

Make sure that the tow hook is correctly at-

ached bef

e each use

ow hook fixed correctly:

●

The tow hook will not fall out of the housing

cavity after a strong “impact”.

●

Lever

is facing upwards

›

Fig. 303

●

The r

ed and green part of the unlocking

bolt

is completely visible

›

Fig. 303

●

The k

ey has been removed.

●

Cover

is over the lock

›

Fig. 303

WARNING

●

Keep your hands away from the le

ver

when releasing the tow hook to avoid trap-

ping your fingers

›››

Fig. 303

●

The towing device should only be used if

the tow hook has been properly lock

ed in

place!

Removing the tow hook

Fig. 304

Removing the tow hook

318

Towing bracket device*

Fig. 305 Removing the tow hook

●

Remove cover

from lock

›

Fig. 304

●

Insert k

in the lock

›

Fig. 304

●

urn the key to the left

just half turn, until

the hol

e in the k

ey is f

acing up

ards

›››

Fig. 304.

●

Hold the tow hook from below.

●

Press the release bolt

in the direction of

arr

, and at the same time press lever

as far as it will go in the direction of arrow

›››

Fig. 305.

w the t

w hook has been r

eased and

falls freely. If this does not occur, press with

the other hand from above.

The tow hook is now in the standby position

and is therefore ready to be reinserted into

the hook housing

›››

●

Fit cover

›

Fig. 298

ont

o its housing.

WARNING

●

Never remov

e the tow hook while the

trailer is hitched.

●

Never leave the tow hook loose in the lug-

gage compartment. It could cause damage

in the even of sharp braking, and even jeop-

ardise passenger safety!

CAUTION

●

If the lever is not pressed do

wn as far as it

will go, after removing the tow hook it will

continue upwards and will not lock into its

standby position. The tow hook must re-

main in this position before being fitted

again.

●

Store the device in the reserve position

with the key inserted and with the same

side facing upwards. Risk of damaging the

key!

●

When operating the lever, do not apply

too much pressure (for example, do not

stand on it)!

Note

●

Before extracting the t

ow hook, we rec-

ommend fitting the protective cover over

the ball head.

●

Remove dirt from the tow hook before

storing it with the vehicle tools.

Connecting the trailer

Fig. 306

Turning the 13-pin connector

●

Grip the connector in area

and remove it

in the dir

ection of the arr

›

Fig. 306.

●

Remove the protective cap from the ball

head

›››

Fig. 298

●

Attach the trailer to the ball head.

●

Open the cover of connector

and con-

nect the tr

ail

›

Fig. 306.

●

Hook the trailer retention cable into the

safety eyelet

›››

Fig. 306

. When hooked,

the r

aining cabl

e must

curv

e in all trailer

positions in front of the vehicle (sharp curves,

reverse, etc.).

Follow these steps in reverse to unhitch the

trailer.

WARNING

●

Never use the safety lug t

o tow!

319

Driving

●

After hooking up the trailer and connect-

ing the sock

et, check that all the trailer's

rear lights are working properly.

Note

●

If ther

e is any fault in the trailer

's lighting,

check the fuses on the instrument panel

›››

page 54.

●

The contact between the retainer cable

and the safety lug may give cause wear in

the lug. This wear does not stop it from op-

erating properly and is not a fault. It is ex-

cluded from the warranty.

●

When hitching and unhitching the trailer,

the vehicle's handbrake should be applied.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 307

Limits and attachment points for ret-

ofitting a t

wing br

ack

et.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets be

etr

ofitt

ed at a specialised w

orkshop

. For ex-

ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-

just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-

tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a

SEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance

specifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ball

head and the road

›››

Fig. 307

must never

be l

ess than that indicat

ed. This al

so applies

when the v

ehicl

e is fully loaded, including the

technically permissible maximum vertical

load on the coupling device.

Distance specifications

›››

Fig. 307:

Attachment points (lower part of the vehi-

cle)

65 mm (minimum)

350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

1040 mm

317 mm

319 mm (Leon) / 596 mm (Leon Sportour-

er ST)

WARNING

If the cables are improperly or incorrectly

connected, this may lead to malfunctions

in the entire v

ehicle electronic system, as

well as to accidents and serious injuries.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric sys-

tem to the electrical connections of the tail

lights or any other unsuitable power

320

Towing bracket device*

sources. Only use suitable connectors to

connect the trailer.

●

The to

wing bracket should be retrofitted

only at a specialised workshop.

WARNING

If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-

suit

able, the trail

er may separate from the

vehicle while driving. This could cause seri-

ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note

●

Only use towing brackets that hav

e been

approved by SEAT for the model in ques-

tion.

●

In some versions, the fitting of a conven-

tional towing hook solution is not recom-

mended. Please consult your Technical

Service.

321

Practical tips

Checking and r

efilling l

efuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 308

Fuel tank flap with tank cap attach-

ed.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the

ehicl

The fl

ap that co

vers the tank cap is unlocked

and locked automatically using the central

locking.

●

Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the

left side.

●

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

●

Place it in the space on the hinge of the

open flap

›››

Fig. 308.

●

Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as

the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel

supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the

nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion

chamber in the fuel tank.

●

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as

far as it will go.

●

Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-

en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank

flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at

›››

page 324.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-

en in

›››

page 372.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-

brids

Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-

rol until the control lamp  switches off, and

then the tank must be refilled. This is neces-

sary to ensure that the system works proper-

ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-

ing with petrol.

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-

rious burns and other injuries.

●

When refuelling, turn off the engine and

turn off the ignition for safety r

easons.

●

Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or

a canister. Nak

ed flames are forbidden in

the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.

●

Observe legislation governing the use,

storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-

ter in the vehicle.

●

For safety reasons we do not recommend

carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-

cle. In an accident the canister could be

damaged and could leak.

●

If, in exceptional circumstances, you

have to carry a spare fuel canister, please

observe the following points:

–

Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.

This could cause an explosion. Always

place the canister on the ground to fill

it.

–

Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-

ble into the spare fuel canister.

–

If the spare fuel canister is made of

metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-

tact with the canister during filling. This

helps prevent an electrostatic charge

building up.

–

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the

luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is

explosive. Risk of fatal accident!

322

Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION

●

If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it

shoul

d be removed immediately. It could

otherwise damage the paintwork.

●

Never run the tank completely dry. The

catalytic converter can be damaged.

●

When filling the fuel tank after having run

it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel

engine, the ignition must be switched on for

at least 30 seconds before starting the en-

gine. When you then start the engine it may

take longer than normal (up to one minute)

to start firing.

For the sake of the environment

Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause

the fuel to overflo

w if it becomes warm.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for the

manual release of the fuel tank flap

. If nec-

essary, request assistance from special-

ised personnel.

Note

Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective

device that prevents the inser

tion of the

wrong fuel hose

. It is only possible to re-

fuel with Diesel nozzles.

●

If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if

it is very small, it is possibl

e that it will not

be able to open the protective device. Be-

fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by

turning it, try a different pump or request

specialist help.

●

If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-

ister, the protective device will not open.

One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in

very slowly.

Refuelling natural gas

Fig. 309

Tank cap open: gas filler mouth

fill

er mouth r

ainer

Before r

efuelling, the engine and the ignition,

mobil

e t

ephone and heating must be

witched off separately

›››

Read the instructions on how to use the natu-

al gas pump car

efully.

efuelling

The nat

al gas filler mouth is behind the fuel

tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth

›››

Fig. 309.

●

Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth

●

Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas

fill

er mouth.

●

The fuel t

ank will be

full

when the pump

compr

essor automatically cuts the supply.

●

If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,

press the button on the pump to stop the flow.

If the ambient temperature is very high, the

natural gas pump’s overheating protection

disconnects it automatically.

Closing the fuel tank cap

●

Check that the mouth retainer

of the gas

fill

er is not tr

apped with the fill

. If this hap-

pens, r

eplace it in the filler mouth.

●

Insert the plug in the filler mouth.

●

Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it

click into place.

Depending on country

323

Practical tips

WARNING

Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily

flammable substance. Incorr

ect handling

of the natural gas can cause accidents se-

rious burns and other injuries.

●

Before refuelling with natural gas, en-

gage the filling mouth correctly. If you can

smell gas, stop refuelling immediately.

●

Read and take note

›››

in Natural gas

on page 327.

WARNING

The vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat-

ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG),

so LNG or LPG should not be used under

any circumst

ances. Liquid gas can cause

an explosion of the natural gas tanks and

cause severe injuries! .

WARNING

If the vehicle underbody touches the

ground or in the event of a rear collision,

ther

e could be damage to the natural gas

tanks. If damaged, natural gas tanks are

full of fuel and can explode, causing seri-

ous or fatal injuries.

●

Even if you don't notice the smell of gas,

take the vehicle to a specialised workshop

immediately and have the natural gas sys-

tem checked. Do not refuel natural gas

again until the natural gas system has been

inspected.

Note

●

The filling no

zzles of natural gas pumps

can diff

er in the way they are operated. Ask

a qualified employee at the petrol station

to do the refuelling if you do not know how.

●

Noises heard when refuelling are normal

and do not indicate damage in the system.

●

The vehicle natural gas system is pre-

pared both for refuelling with a small com-

pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-

sor (fast refuel) at natural gas service sta-

tions.

Fuel types

Identification of fuel

Fig. 310 Identification of fuels according to

Eur

opean Union (EU) Dir

ectiv

e 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols on

the pump and on your v

ehicl

e's t

ank fl

. The

identification serves to prevent confusion

when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-

nol). The number indicates the percent-

age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,

for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.

Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-

diesel). The number indicates the per-

centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

means, for example, a proportion of bio-

diesel of max. 7%.

Depending on country

324

Checking and refilling levels

Natural gas: “CNG” means Compr

essed

Gas.

Type of petrol

3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines

The correct grade of petrol is list

ed inside the

fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-

verter and must only be run on unleaded

petrol. The petrol must comply with the

standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels

with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled

(E10)

. The types of petrol are differentiated

by using the octane numbers (RON) or via

the anti-knock index (AKI).

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or

normal 91 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-

tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91

octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power

loss) may be used.

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at

least

You should use super 95 octane petrol (91

AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor

mal 91 oct

ane petr

ol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moder

e engine speeds and a light

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or

super 95 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super plus 98

octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super

95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power

loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

●

Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.

E30 - E100 butt

on must not be used. The

fuel system would be damaged. Exception:

vehicles with Totalflex engine

›››

page 326,

Ethanol fuel.

●

A single refuelling with leaded fuel or

other metal additives entails a permanent

deterioration of the effectiveness of the

catalytic converter.

●

Only use fuel additives that have been

approv

ed by SEAT. The products that con-

tain substances to increase the octane rat-

ing or decrease knocking may contain met-

al additives that damage the engine and

catalytic converter. This type of products

must not be used.

●

Do not use fuels shown in the pump as

containing metals. LRP (lead replacement

petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of

metal additives. Risk of engine damage!

●

High engine speed and full throttle can

damage the engine when using petrol with

an octane rating lower than the correct

grade for the engine.

Note

●

Fuel with an octane rating higher than the

one required by the engine can be used.

●

In countries in which ther

e is no sulphur-

free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-

phur content fuel.

Follow the regulations of the country you are

driving in.

325

Practical tips

Ethanol fuel

3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines

You can recognise vehicl

es with Totalflex en-

gines

by label on the fuel tank lid with with

the marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with

unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-

ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high

percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-

led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that

›››

page 325, Type of pet-

rol

Note

SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-

sively with petrol every 10,

000 km to de-

crease impurities that using E100 ethanol

fuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel

3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines

Please note the inf

ormation on the inside of

the fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according to

standard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-

tures, thus affecting the start or oper

ation of

the engine. Ask your service station attendant

if their diesel is suitable for winter use.

Water in the fuel filter

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is

equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-

arator, the instrument panel may display the

following warning:



Water in the fuel

filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to

a specialised workshop so that they can

drain the fuel filter.

CAUTION

●

Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,

heating oil, other fuel

s or thinning agents

as they can cause severely damage the

fuel system and the engine.

●

If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not

start the engine under any circumstances.

Risk of damaging the fuel system and the

engine! Obtain technical assistance.

Natural gas

3 Valid for: vehicles with natural gas engines

Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid

orm, addition to others.

Use of compressed natural gas (CNG)

Vehicles with a natural gas engine must only

be working with CNG (Compressed Natural

Gas CNG), or with a mixture of biomethane if

it complies with Regulation EN 16723-2.

Fuels such as liquefied natural gas (LNG), liq-

uefied petroleum gas (LPG) or hithane (mix-

ture of hydrogen and methane) should not be

used to fill the tank.

Natural gas quality and consumption

Natural gas is divided into the groups H and L

depending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power and

inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content

than type L. The higher the heating power of

the natural gas, the lower the consumption

will be.

The engine management automatically

adapts to the natural gas used according to

its quality. Therefore, different quality gases

can be mixed in the tank, without the need for

This motor is only available in some markets.

Depending upon country.

326

Checking and refilling levels

comprehensive draining before applying a

diff

ent qualit

y gas.

Updat

ed inf

ormation relating to natural gas

quality is displayed on the instrument panel

›››

page 74.

Regular checks of the natural gas system

The natural gas tanks may be damaged or

corroded by external factors. The walls of the

gas tanks are weakened by deformations,

damage or corrosion. The vehicle owner must

have a specialised workshop check (visual

check) the gas system at least once every

4 years. Natural gas tanks must be replaced

at a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Failure to act when you can smell gas in the

vehicle or when refuelling can cause seri-

ous injuries.

●

Stop the v

ehicle immediately.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the doors to appropriately venti-

late the vehicle.

●

Extinguish cigarettes immediately.

●

Move away from the vehicle or switch off

objects that may cause sparks or a fire.

●

If you continue to smell gas, do not con-

tinue driving!

●

Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault

repaired.

●

If necessary, warn the emergency serv-

ices.

WARNING

Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re-

sult in serious injury or e

ven death.

●

Have the natur

al gas deposits checked at

least every 4 years (visual check).

●

Natural gas tanks have a limited service

life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced

when required. You can obtain further infor-

mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci-

alised workshops.

AdBlue

Inf

ormation about AdBlue

Fig. 311 Related video

The consumption of AdBlue

depends on

your personal driving st

, the t

emper

ature

of the system and on the outdoor tempera-

ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue

freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13

°F). The system has heating elements that

guarantee its operation even at low tempera-

tures.

The capacity of the AdBlue

tank is approx.

11 litres.

When the range is less than 2400 km the

instrument panel screen displays a message

requesting an AdBlue

refill.

If this message is ignored, the yellow warning

lamp  will come on when the remaining

range is less than 1000 km. The indication

that in XXX km it will no longer be possible to

restart the engine will appear on the instru-

ment panel display.

If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when

remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will

no longer be possible to restart the engine.

The red warning lamp  will light up.

AdBlue

is a registered brand of the German

Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA)

and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel

Exhaust Fluid).

CAUTION

Filling the AdBlue

tank excessively can

cause damage t

o the tank.

327

Practical tips

Control and warning lamps



It lights up red

The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue level

is too low.

Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then

top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue

›››

page 328.



and



They light up red

The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the

AdBlue system.

Contact a specialised workshop

. Have the system

checked there.



It lights up yellow

The AdBlue reserve is low.

Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or mil

es) that

are indicated

›››

page 328. SEAT recommends con-

tacting a specialised workshop.



and



They light up yellow

There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable

AdBlue fluid has been used.

Contact a specialised workshop. Have the syst

checked there.

Several warning and control lamps should

light up f

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is

wit

ched on, signalling that the function is be-

ing verified. They will switch off after a few

seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Fill AdBlue

Fig. 312

AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refilling

ark the v

ehicl

e on a fl

at surf

ace and turn off

the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a

curb, the level indicator may not detect the

refill properly.

If a warning message about AdBlue

levels

appears on the dash panel display, fill at

least the minimum amount required (ap-

prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amount

will the system detect that AdBlue

has been

added and you will be able to start the en-

gine again. The maximum amount that can

be refilled is 11 litres.

Fill with a refill bottle

Only use AdBlue

that complies with ISO

22241-1. Only use original containers.

●

Open the tank cover

›››

Fig. 312.

●

Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-

ti-clockwise direction.

●

Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-

tions, indicated on the refill bottle.

●

Check the expiry date.

●

Remove the cap of the refill bottle.

●

Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler

neck vertically and screw the bottle on by

hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.

●

Press the refill bottle in the direction of the

filler neck and hold it in this position.

●

Wait until the contents of the refill bottle

have been poured into the AdBlue

tank. Do

not compress or break the bottle!

●

Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-

rection and gently pull it upwards

›››

●

The AdBlue

ank is full when no mor

e liquid

comes out of the bottl

●

Scr

ew on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-

tion until it is tightly closed.

●

Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving

●

After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-

nition.

328

Checking and refilling levels

●

eav

e the ignition on f

or at l

east 30 sec-

onds f

or the system to detect the fluid load.

●

Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds

before starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue

Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-

duction.

●

Open the tank cap.

●

Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise

›››

Fig. 312.

●

Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the

first time.

●

Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise

until you hear a click.

WARNING

AdBlue

should only be stored in the origi-

nal container

, which should be tightly

closed and kept in a safe place.

CAUTION

●

When refilling, the nozzle grip should be

aligned do

wnward. Otherwise the nozzle

will not connect automatically.

●

Do not try to add any more additive after

the nozzle has stopped for the first time.

The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue

could spill out.

●

Only use AdBlue

that complies with ISO

22241-1. Only use original containers.

●

Nev

er mix AdBlue

with water, fuel or ad-

ditives. Any type of damage caused by

such a mixture will not be covered by the

warranty.

●

Never pour AdBlue

into the fuel tank.

This could result in engine damage.

●

Do not carry the refill bottle inside the

vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-

ture changes or damage to the bottle), the

AdBlue

may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-

ment-friendly manner.

Note

You can buy refill bottles that are adequate

for AdBlue

use at SEAT dealerships .

Engine management and

emissions contr

ol syst

Intr

oduction

WARNING

●

Due to the high temperatur

es reached by

the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you

should not park your vehicle near a surface

that can catch fire easily. Fire hazar

●

Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle

around the area of the exhaust system: Fire

hazard!

Control lamps



It lights up

Fault in the emission control system.

Reduce speed and drive carefully to the near

est spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.



Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic

converter.

Reduce speed and driv

e carefully to the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.



It lights up

Particulate filter blocked

›››

page 330.



It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management.

Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a

specialised workshop

When the ignition is switched on, the  (Electronic

Pow

er Control) lights up and should go off once the

engine has started.

329

Practical tips



It lights up

Diesel engine preheating system.

The engine can be started straight away when the

amp switches off.



Flashes

Fault in the diesel engine management.

Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a

specialised workshop

Note

While the control lamps , ,  or  are

on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel

consumption may go up and the engine

might lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic

conv

●

Only use unl

eaded petr

ol with petrol en-

gines.

●

Never run the fuel tank dry.

●

When changing or adding engine oil, do not

exceed the necessary amount

›››

page 336,

Topping up the engine oil.

●

Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump

leads if necessary

›››

page 47.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running

or loss of power when the car is moving, have

the vehicle inspected by a specialised work-

shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp

 will light up when any of these symptoms

occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can

enter the exhaust system and escape into the

atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also

be damaged by overheating.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-

cause an irregular fuel supply can cause

ignition faults. This allo

ws unburnt fuel to

enter the exhaust system, which could

cause overheating and damage the cata-

lytic converter.

For the sake of the environment

Even when the emission control system is

working perfectly, there may be a smell of

sulphur from the gases on occasions. This

depends on the sulphur cont

ent of the fuel

used. This can quite often be avoided by

changing to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu-

late filt

ers

The particulate filter eliminates most of the

soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-

mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If

the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short

journeys are made continuously), it becomes

ocked with soot and the following indica-

tion is displayed to the driver:  Particu-

late filter: cleaned while the vehi-

cle is moving. See Manual. The partic-

ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).

Regeneration of the petrol particulate fil-

ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines)

Requirements for the regeneration journey:

the engine is at operating temperature.

●

Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h

›››

●

Completely remove your foot from the ac-

cel

or pedal f

or a f

ew seconds to let the

vehicle roll with the gear engaged.

●

Consider the legal speed limits as well as

the recommended gears.

●

Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let

roll) until the control lamp turns off.

This procedure involves an autonomous par-

ticulate filter cleaning process and may take

some time.

If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im-

mediately to a specialised workshop to repair

the fault.

330

Checking and refilling levels

Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI

0l engine) and diesel par

ticul

e filt

Requirements for the regeneration journey:

the engine is at operating temperature.

●

Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h

(31-75 mph). This increases the temperature

and burns the soot in the filter

›››

●

Consider the legal speed limits as well as

the r

ecommended gears.

●

End the r

egener

ation journey once the con-

ol w

arning lamp has gone out.

If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes

of running in regeneration mode, have a spe-

cialised workshop repair the fault

WARNING

Always adjust your speed to suit the weath-

er conditions, roads, braking distance and

traffic if the par

ticulate filter is in its regen-

eration phase. Route recommendations

should never make you disregard each

country's specific traffic regulations.

CAUTION

●

When the exhaust system detects that

the particul

ate filter is close to saturation,

the self-cleaning function of this system

recommends optimal driving for this func-

tion.

●

Due to the high temperatures caused by

the regeneration of the particulate filter, it

is possible that the radiator fan will acti-

vate after stopping the engine

, even it its

operating temperature has not been

reached.

●

Noise, smells and high idle speeds can

occur during regeneration.

●

Always use the correct engine oil and the

correct fuel to make sure the useful life of

the particulate filter is not affected. Also

avoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

orking in the engine compar

ment

Fig. 313 Related video

Always be aware of the danger of injury and

scal

ding as w

ell as the risk of accident or fir

when w

orking in the engine compartment

.g. when checking and refilling fluids).

Always observe the warnings listed below

and follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-

tentially hazardous area

›››

WARNING

When work is done in the engine compart-

ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even

fires can occur.

●

witch the engine off, remove the key

from the ignition and apply the electronic

parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual

gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has

an automatic gearbox, place the selector

lever in position P. Wait for the engine to

cool down.

●

Never open the bonnet if you see steam

or drips of coolant being released from the

engine compartment. Wait until no steam

or coolant can be seen before opening the

bonnet.

●

Keep children away from the engine

compartment.

●

Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-

tion on the engine compartment, as these

may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-

ant).

●

Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-

trical system, particularly at the points

where the jump leads are attached

›››

page 47. The battery could explode.

●

If working inside the engine compart-

ment, remember that, even when the igni-

tion is switched off, the radiator fan may

331

Practical tips

start up automatically, and therefore there

is a risk of injury.

●

Never cover the engine with additional in-

sulating materials such as a blank

et. Risk of

fire!

●

Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant

expansion tank when the engine is hot. The

cooling system is under pressure.

●

Protect face, hands and arms by cover-

ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect

against escaping coolant and steam.

●

Always make sure you have not left any

objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in

the engine compartment.

●

If you have to work underneath the vehi-

cle, you must use suitable stands addition-

ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of

accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for

securing the vehicle and there is a risk of

injury.

●

If any work has to be performed when the

engine is started or with the engine running,

there is an additional, potentially fatal,

safety risk from the rotating parts, such as

the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,

and from the high-voltage ignition system.

You should also observe the following:

–

Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.

–

Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro-

tating engine parts. Danger of death.

Before starting any work remove jewel-

lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear

tight-fitting clothes.

–

Never accel

erate with a gear engaged

without taking the necessary precau-

tions. The vehicle could move, even if

the handbrake is applied. Danger of

death.

●

Observe the following additional warn-

ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-

trical system is necessary:

–

Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network.

–

Do not smoke.

–

Never work near naked flames.

–

Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment

●

Inspect the ground underneath your vehi-

cle regul

arly so that any leaks are detec-

ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil

or other fluids in the area where it was

parked, have your vehicle inspected at the

workshop.

●

Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-

vironment. For this reason you should make

regular checks on the ground underneath

your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other

fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a

specialised workshop.

Note

In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake

fluid reservoirs are on the other side of the

engine compartment

›

››

Fig. 316.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 314

Release lever in the driver's footwell

ea.

Fig. 315

Cam under the bonnet

332

Checking and refilling levels

Opening the bonnet

The bonnet is r

eased fr

om inside the v

ehi-

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that

the windscreen wiper arms are in place

against the windscreen.

●

Open the door and pull the lever under the

dashboard

›››

Fig. 314

●

To lift the bonnet, press the release catch

under the bonnet up

›

Fig. 315

. The

arr

est

er hook under the bonnet is r

eased.

●

The bonnet can be opened. R

elease the

bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-

signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet

●

Slightly lift the bonnet.

●

Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its

support.

●

At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall

so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press

downwards. Open it again and let it fall as

mentioned above.

WARNING

Make sure that the bonnet is properly

closed. If it opens when driving, it can

cause an accident.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the

windscreen wiper arms, only open it when

the windscreen wipers are in place against

the windscr

een.

333

Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 316

Diagram for the location of the various el-

ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different

fluids in the v

ehicl

e must be check

ed. Ne

fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious

damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

›››

page 338

Engine oil level dipstick

›››

page 336

Engine oil filler cap

›››

page 336

Brake fluid reservoir

›››

page 339

Battery (under the cover)

›››

page 341

Windscreen washer reservoir

›››

page 340

Note

The layout of parts may vary depending on

the engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade

oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-

tial for the correct oper

ation of the engine

and its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that comply

with VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change be done

by a t

echnical service or specialised work-

shop.

If the engine oil level is too low

You can get information about the correct en-

gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-

ble, in the event of an emergency you can

change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L

of the next oil until the next oil change:

334

Checking and refilling levels

Petrol engines: st

andar

d VW 504 00,

VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or

API SN.

Diesel engines:

andar

d VW 507 00,

VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-

shop.

Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW

504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00

could increase consumption and the vehicle’s

emissions.



Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to

guarantee high SEAT engine performance.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash

formation, may be used in diesel engines

equipped with particulate filter. Using other

types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-

tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-

fore:

●

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

●

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the

engine oil level is too low

›››

page 336 and

you cannot obtain the oil specified for your

vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil

–

(once) conforming to the specifications

VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,

VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)

›››

page 334.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the

engine oil. The deterioration caused by these

additives is not covered by the warranty.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding

an engine oil that conforms to the corre-

sponding VW specifications and recom-

mend k

eeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

correct engine oil will always be available

for a top-up if needed.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type

Type of

Service

Specifica-

tion

With particulate

filter (DPF)

Set Service

and Flexible

Service Inter-

vals

VW 507 00

Without particu-

late filter (DPF)

Set Service

Interv

als

VW 505 01

VW 506 01

Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may

damage the engine

If the qualit

y of the fuel av

ail

abl

e in the country

does not fulfil the EN 590 (for diesel) standard.

Warning lamp



It lights up red

 Do not carry on driving!

Engine oil pressure too lo

Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp  starts to flash, and is accom-

panied by three

audible warnings, switch off the en-

gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more

oil

›››

page 336.

If the warning lamp  flashes although the oil level

is corr

ect, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at

idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

335

Practical tips



It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.

Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunit

y to

do so

›››

page 336.



It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.

Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-

til then it is advisable t

o check the oil level every time

you refuel.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 317

Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of

the oil.

Checking oil level

–

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

–

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the

oper

ating t

emper

e is reached and then

stop.

–

Wait for about two minutes.

–

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with

a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it

in as far as it will go.

–

Then pull it out once more and check the oil

level

›››

Fig. 317. Top up with engine oil if

necessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones

and

. It can never go above zone

●

Zone

: do not add oil.

●

Zone

: you can add oil but keep the level

in that z

one

●

one

: add oil until zone

Depending on ho

w you driv

e and the condi-

tions in which the v

ehicl

e is used, oil con-

sumption can be up t

o 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil

consumption is likely to be higher for the first

5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level

must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-

bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine com-

partment or on the engine must be carried

out cautiously.

●

When working in the engine compart-

ment, al

ways observe the safety warnings

›››

page 331.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area

, do not start

the engine. This could result in damage to

the engine and cat

alytic converter. Con-

tact a Technical Service.

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 318 In the engine compartment: Engine oil

fill

er cap

336

Checking and refilling levels

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe

the w

arnings

›

in Working in the engine

compar

tment on page 331

opping up engine oil

●

Unscr

w cap from engine oil filler opening

›››

Fig. 318.

●

Carefully add oil in small quantities (no

more than 0.5 l).

●

To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you

add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes

and recheck the oil level

›››

page 336.

●

If necessary, add some more oil.

●

When the oil level reaches at least zone

›››

Fig. 317

, unscrew the engine oil filler

cap car

efully

›

The position of the oil fill

er opening is sho

in the corr

esponding engine compartment il

lustr

ation

›››

page 334.

Engine oil specification

›››

page 335.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil

comes into contact with hot engine compo-

nents when topping up.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area

›››

Fig. 317

do not start the engine. This could r

esult in

damage to the engine and catalytic con-

verter. Cont

act a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The oil level must never be above zone

›

››

Fig. 317

. Otherwise oil can be drawn in

through the crankcase breather and l

eak

into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-

tem.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding

an engine oil that conforms to the corre-

sponding VW specifications and recom-

mend k

eeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

correct engine oil will always be available

for a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oil

changed by a T

echnical Service

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if you

have the specialist knowledge requir

ed!

●

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-

serve the warnings

›››

page 331.

●

Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil

may cause burn injuries.

●

Wear eye protection to av

oid injuries,

such as acid burns, caused by splashes of

oil.

●

When removing the oil drain plug with

your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to

help prevent oil from running down your

arm.

●

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into

contact with engine oil.

●

Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be

stored in a safe place out of the reach of

children.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.

This could result in engine damage. Any

damage caused by the use of such addi-

tives w

ould not be covered by the factory

warranty.

For the sake of the environment

●

We recommend that you change the en-

gine oil and the filter at a technical service

centr

●

Never pour oil down drains or into the

ground.

●

Use a suitable container when draining

the used oil. It must be large enough to hold

all the engine oil.

337

Practical tips

Cooling system

Cool

ant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from

the factory with a specially treated mixt

ure of

water and at least 40 % of the additive

G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture

gives the necessary frost protection down to

-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy

parts of the engine cooling system against

corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-

siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-

ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-

age of additive must always be at least 40 %,

even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-

tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection is

necessary, the proportion of additive may be

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-

tifreeze protection will diminish and this will

worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture

of distilled water and at least 40 % of the

additive G12evo for optimal protection

against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13

(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),

G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11

(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-

tection again corrosion and should be avoi-

ded.

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the

coolant system, the engine may fail lead-

ing t

o serious damage.

●

Ensure that the percentage of additive is

correct for the lowest expected ambient

temperature in the zone in which the vehi-

cle is to be used.

●

When the outside temperature is very

low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-

cle would be immobilised.

CAUTION

The original additives should never be

mixed with coolants which are not ap-

pro

ved by SEAT.

●

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not

purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-

cates that the G12evo additive has been

mixed with an inadequate coolant. The

coolant must be changed as soon as possi-

ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environment

Coolants and additives can contaminate

the environment. If any fluids are spilled,

they should be coll

ected and correctly dis-

posed of, with respect to the environment.

Refilling coolant

Fig. 319

In the engine compartment: marking

on cool

ant e

xpansion t

ank

Fig. 320

Engine compartment: coolant expan-

sion t

ank cap

The coolant tank is located in the engine

compartment

›

page 334

op up coolant when the level is below the 

(minimum) mark.

338

Checking and refilling levels

Checking coolant level

–

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

–

Switch the ignition off.

–

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-

pansion t

ank

. When the engine is col

d, the

cool

ant l

evel should be between the marks

›››

Fig. 319. When the engine is hot, it may

be slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant

–

Wait for the engine to cool down.

–

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with

a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left

›››

–

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-

ant in the e

xpansion t

ank

, otherwise you

coul

damage the engine. If there is no

coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-

tinue driving. You should obtain professional

assistance

›››

–

If there is still some coolant in the expansion

ank

, t

op up t

o the upper mark

–

Top up with coolant until the level becomes

stable.

–

Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-

cialised workshop to have the cooling system

examined.

WARNING

●

The cooling system is under pressure. Do

not unscr

ew the cap on the coolant expan-

sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of

burns!

●

Store the antifreeze in its original con-

tainer and keep it out of reach of children.

●

If working inside the engine compart-

ment, remember that, even when the igni-

tion is switched off, the radiator fan may

start up automatically, and therefore there

is a risk of injury.

CAUTION

If you run out of coolant in the expansion

tank, park the car in a safe place and do

not continue driving. Obt

ain technical as-

sistance.

Brake fluid

Check and r

efill the br

e fluid

Fig. 321

Engine compartment: brake fluid res-

erv

oir cap

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-

gine compartment

›

page 334

Checking the br

ake fluid level

The brake fluid level must be between the 

and  markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes down

noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

 mark, there may be a leak in the brake

system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning

light on the instrument panel display monitors

the brake fluid level

›››

page 89.

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid

reservoir is on the other side of the engine

compartment.

339

Practical tips

Changing brake fluid

e r

ecommend that you hav

e the br

e fluid

changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING

If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-

ble/old brake fluid is used, the br

ake sys-

tem may fail or braking power may be re-

duced.

●

Check the brake system and the brake

fluid level regularly!

●

When the brake fluid is used and brakes

are subjected to extreme braking forces,

bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-

tem. These bubbles can significantly re-

duce braking power, notably increasing

braking distance, and could result in the to-

tal failure of the brake system.

●

Be sure to always use the correct brake

fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly

meets the VW 501 14 standard.

●

You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake

fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official

Service. If none is available, use only high-

quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925

CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards

FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

●

The replacement brake fluid must be

new.

●

Brake fluid should be stored in the closed

original container in a safe place out of

reach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTION

Brake fluid should not come into contact

with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abr

asive.

For the sake of the environment

Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.

Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a

prof

essional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the l

el of the windo

asher tank and refilling it

Fig. 322 In the engine compartment: window

asher t

ank cap

The window washer tank is in the engine

compartment

›

page 334

Check the w

ater level in the windscreen

washer reservoir regularly and top up as re-

quired.

The container for the windscreen washer

contains the cleaning fluid for the wind-

screen, the rear window and the headlight

washer system*.

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 331.

●

The window washer tank is marked with the

 symbol on the cap.

●

Check there is enough windscreen water in

the reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-

screen and headlights. We recommend that

you always add a product to the windscreen

washer fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers

●

For the hottest seasons we recommend

summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-

tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:

1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-

ter).

●

All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.

Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,

up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2

parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of

mixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank can

be found in

›››

page 372.

340

Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION

If the water from the windscreen washer

does not contain enough anti-freeze

, it may

freeze on the windscreen and rear window,

reducing forward and rear visibility.

●

In winter, ensure the windscreen washer

contains enough anti-freeze.

●

In cold conditions, you should not use the

windscreen wiper system unless you have

warmed the windscreen with the ventila-

tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on

the windscreen and reduce visibility.

CAUTION

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other

similar additives with the windscreen wash-

er w

ater. A greasy layer may be formed on

the windscreen which will impair visibility.

●

Use clean water with a window cleaner

recommended by SEAT.

●

If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to

the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION

●

Do not mix cleaning products recommen-

ded by SEAT with other products. This

coul

d lead to flocculation and may block

the windscreen washer jets.

●

When topping up service fluids, make ab-

solutely certain that you fill the fluids into

the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-

ids could cause serious malfunctions and

engine damage!

●

Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-

duces visibility through the windscreen,

and leads t

o loss of visibility in headlights

in models with headlight washer.

Battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine compart-

ment and is almost maint

enance-fr

. It is

check

ed as part of the Inspection Service

Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean

and have the correct tightening torque, espe-

cially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialist

knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official

Service or a workshop specialising in batter-

ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never try

to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-

erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-

tery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications



Wear eye protection.



Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-

tective glov

es and eye protection. Rinse any

splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.



Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are

prohibited.



The battery should only be char

ged in a well-

ventilated zone

. Risk of explosion!



Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Disconnecting the battery

The battery should only be disconnected in

ceptional cases. When the battery is dis-

connected, some of the vehicle's functions

are lost. These functions will require resetting

after the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from the ve-

hicle on-board network, disconnect first the

negative cable and then the positive cable.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you

disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm

will be triggered.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods

The vehicle has a system for monitoring the

current consumption when the engine is left

unused for long periods of time

›››

page 344.

Some functions, such as the interior lights, or

the remote door opening, may be temporarily

disabled to prevent the battery from running

flat. These functions will come back on as

341

Practical tips

soon as the ignition is switched on and the

engine st

art

ed.

Wint

er conditions

During the wint

, the starting power may be

reduced, and if necessary, the battery should

be charged

›››

WARNING

Always be aware of the danger of injury

and chemical burns as well as the risk of

accident or fire when working on the bat-

ery and the electrical system:

●

Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,

skin and clothing from acid and particles

containing lead.

●

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear

protective gloves and eye protection. Do

not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid

through the vents.

●

Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on

the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-

tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If

acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a

doctor immediately.

●

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking

are prohibited. When handling cables and

electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks

and electrostatic charge. Never short the

battery terminals. High-energy sparks can

cause injury.

●

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-

leased when the battery is under charge.

The batteries should be charged in a well-

ventilated room only.

●

eep children away from acid and bat-

teries.

●

Before working on the electrical system,

you must switch off the engine, the ignition

and all electrical devices. The negative ca-

ble on the battery must be disconnected.

When a light bulb is changed, you need on-

ly switch off the light.

●

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-

locking the vehicle before you disconnect

the battery! The alarm will otherwise be

triggered.

●

When disconnecting the battery from the

vehicle on-board network, disconnect first

the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

●

Switch off all electrical devices before

reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first

the positive cable and then the negative

cable. Never reverse the polarity of the

connections. This could cause an electrical

fire.

●

Never charge a frozen battery, or one

which has thawed. This could result in ex-

plosions and chemical burns. Always re-

place a battery which has frozen. A flat

battery can also freeze at temperatures

close to 0°C (+32°F).

●

Ensure that the vent hose is always con-

nected to the battery.

●

Never use a defective batt

ery. This could

cause an explosion. Replace a damaged

battery immediately.

CAUTION

●

Do not e

xpose the battery to direct sun-

light o

ver a long period of time, as the in-

tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the

battery housing.

●

If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-

ditions for a long period, protect the bat-

tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be

damaged.

Warning lamp



It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition is

wit

ched on. It shoul

d go out when the engine

has st

art

ed running.

If the control lamp  lights up while driving,

the alternator is no longer charging the bat-

tery. You should immediately drive to the

nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment

that is not absolutely necessary because this

will drain the battery.

342

Checking and refilling levels

Checking the battery electrolyte

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-

ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-

tries and in ol

der batteries.

●

Open the bonnet and then lift the cover

that protects the front part of the battery

›››

in Working in the engine compart-

ment on page 331.

●

Check the colour display in the "magic eye"

on the top of the battery.

●

If there are air bubbl

es in the window, tap

the window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in the

corr

esponding engine compartment diagram

›››

page 334.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top

of the battery changes colour, depending on

the charge state and electrolyte level of the

battery.

There are two different colours:

●

Black: correct charge status.

●

Transparent/light yellow: the battery must

be replaced. Contact a specialised work-

shop.

Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-

hicle is not driven for long periods, the batt

ery

should be checked by a specialised work-

shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have

problems starting the vehicle, the battery

might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-

ommend you have the vehicle battery

checked by a Technical Service where it will

be re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a

specialised workshop only, as batteries using

special technology have been installed and

they must be charged in a controlled environ-

ment.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the

conditions of its location and has special

safety features. If the battery must be re-

placed, consult a technical service for infor-

mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the

size and maintenance, performance and

safety requirements of the new battery in

your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT

recommends you have the battery replaced

by a technical service.

Start-Stop systems (

›››

page 251) ar

e equip-

ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must

only be replaced with a battery of the same

specifications.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent

power management system to control the

distribution of electrical energy

›››

page 344.

The power management function ensures

that the battery is charged much more effi-

ciently than on vehicles without a power

management system. To maintain this func-

tion after replacing the battery, we recom-

mend that the replacement battery used is of

the same make and type as the original fitted

battery. To make proper use of the power

management function after the battery has

been changed, have the battery coded to the

power management mode at a specialised

workshop.

WARNING

●

Always use only maintenance free bat

teries that do not run flat alone and whose

properties, specifications and size corre-

spond to the standard battery. The specifi-

cations are indicated on the battery case.

●

Before starting any work on the batteries,

you must read and observe the warnings

›››

in General information on page 342.

For the sake of the environment

 Batteries contain toxic substances such

as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be

343

Practical tips

disposed of appropriately and must not be

disposed of with ordinary household waste

Energy management

Optimisation of the starting ca-

pacity

The power management controls the distri-

bution of electrical energy and thus helps to

ensure that ther

e is always enough power

available to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-

tem is left parked for a long time, the battery

will gradually lose its charge because certain

electrical devices, such as the electronic

gearbox lock continues to draw current even

when the ignition is off. In some cases there

may not be enough power available to start

the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent

power management system to control the

distribution of electrical energy. This signifi-

cantly improves reliability when starting the

engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the

battery.

The main functions incorporated in the power

management system are battery diagnosis,

residual current management and dynam-

ic power management.

Battery diagnosis

The battery diagnosis function constantly

registers the condition of the batt

ery. Sensors

detect the battery voltage, battery current

and battery temperature. This enables the

system to calculate the current power level

and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current management

The residual current management reduces

power consumption while the vehicle is

parked. It controls the supply of power to the

various electrical devices while the ignition is

switched off. The system takes the battery di-

agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,

switch off the individual electrical devices

one after the other to prevent the battery

from losing too much charge and to ensure

that the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power management

While the vehicle is moving, this function dis-

tributes the available power to the various

electrical devices and systems according to

their requirements. The power management

ensures that on-board systems do not con-

sume more electrical power than the alterna-

tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-

mum possible battery power level.

Note

●

Neither is the power management system

able t

o overcome the given physical limits.

Please remember that the power and use-

ful life of the battery are limited.

●

When there is a risk that the vehicle will

not start, the alternator power failure or

low battery charge level warning lamp will

be shown 

›››

page 89.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, cit

y tr

affic and l

w t

emperatures

all place a heavy load on the battery. In

these conditions a large amount of power is

consumed, but only a small amount is sup-

plied. The situation is also critical if electrical

devices are in use when the engine is not run-

ning. In this case power is consumed when

none is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that the

power management system is intervening to

control the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri-

ods

If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of

several days or weeks, the power manage-

ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-

vices one by one or reduce the amount of

344

Wheels

current they are using. This limits the amount

of po

er consumed and helps t

o ensur

e r

eli-

able starting even after a long period. Some

convenience functions, such as remote vehi-

cle opening, may not be available under cer-

tain circumstances. These functions will be

restored when you switch on the ignition and

start the engine.

With the engine switched off

For example, if you listen to the sound system

with the engine switched off the battery will

run down.

If the energy consumption means there is a

risk that the engine will not start, a text will

appear in vehicles with a driver information

system*.

This driver indicator tells you that you must

start the engine so that the battery can re-

charge.

When the engine is running

Although the alternator generates electrical

power, the battery can still become dis-

charged while the vehicle is being driven. This

can occur when a lot of power is being con-

sumed but only a small amount supplied, es-

pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini-

tially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, the

system will then temporarily shut off the elec-

trical devices that are using a lot of power, or

reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-

ing systems in particular use a large amount

of electrical power. If you notice, for instance,

that the seat heating* or the rear window

heater is not working, they may have been

temporarily switched off or regulated to a

lower heat output. These systems will be

available again as soon as sufficient electri-

cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at a

slightly faster idling speed when necessary.

This is quite normal, and no cause for con-

cern. The increased idling speed allows the

alternator to meet the greater power require-

ment and charge the battery at the same

time.

Wheels

Wheel

s and t

Gener

al not

–

When driving with new tyres, be especially

car

eful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

–

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar

obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as

possible at a right angle to the obstacle.

–

Check from time to time if the tyres are

damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or

dents). Remo

ve any foreign objects em-

bedded in the treads.

–

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-

placed immediately.

–

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

–

Replace any missing valve caps as soon as

possible.

–

Mark the wheels before taking them off so

that they rotate in the same direction when

put back.

–

When removed, the wheels or tyres should

be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark

place.

345

Practical tips

Low profile tyres

w pr

ofil

e t

yres have a wider tread, a larger

wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.

Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres, for instance due to

strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and

kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important

›››

page 348.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive

with special care when driving on roads in

poor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-

pact or have been damaged, have a special-

ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-

essary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily

visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the

car pulling to one side, this may indicate

that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce

speed immediately if there is any reason to

suspect that damage may have occurred. In-

spect the tyres for damage. If no external

damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully

to the nearest specialised workshop and

have the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre

●

Do not remove foreign bodies if they have

penetrated through the tyre wall!

●

If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility

system, where necessary seal the damaged

tyre as shown in section

›››

page 38. Use a

specialised workshop for repair or replace-

ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread

wraps around the foreign body and provision-

ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-

rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-

ways note the direction of rotation indicated

when mounting the wheel. This makes sure

that optimal use is made of tyre properties in

terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise

and wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessories

If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or

wheel trims, we recommend that you consult

with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice

regarding current techniques.

Speed symbols

The speed rating indicates the maximum

speed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

max. 170 km/h (106 mph)

max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

max. 200 km/h (124 mph)

max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 270 km/h (168 mph)

max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for

tyres with a maximum authorised speed

above 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING

●

New tyres do not have maximum grip dur

ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly

carefully to avoid possible accidents.

●

Never drive with damaged tyres. This

may cause an accident.

●

If you notice unusual vibrations or if the

vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop

the vehicle immediately and check the

tyres.

●

Never use old tyres or those with an un-

known history of use.

346

Wheels

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced

by a specialised workshop. There they have

the r

equired knowledge, the special tools and

the corresponding spare parts.

●

Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you

have installed new tyres, drive the first 500

km carefully and at a moderate speed.

●

All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of

the same type, size (rolling circumference)

and, if possible, tread pattern.

●

When changing tyres, do not change just

one; change at least two on the same axle.

●

If you w

ant to equip your vehicle with a

combination tyres and rims that are different

to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-

cialised workshop before purchasing them

›››

The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for

your v

ehicl

e ar

e list

ed in the v

ehicle docu-

mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity

or COC document

). The vehicle documen-

tation varies depending on the country of res-

idence.

If the type of spare wheel is different form the

normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter

tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare

wheel should only be used temporarily in the

event of a puncture, and the vehicle should

be driven with care. Refit the normal road

wheel as soon as possible.

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels

must be fitted with tyres of the same brand,

type and tread so that the traction system is

not damaged by a difference in the number

of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event

of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the

same perimeter as normal tyres should be

used.

Manufacturing date

The manufacturing date is also indicated on

the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the

wheel):

DOT ... 2218 ...

it means, for example, that the tyre was man-

ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING

●

Use only combinations of tyres and rims,

as well as suitabl

e wheel nuts, approved by

SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-

aged, causing an accident.

●

For technical reasons it is not possible to

use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases

not even wheels from the same vehicle

model should be used.

●

Always ensure that the tyr

es you have

chosen have adequate clearance. When

selecting replacement tyres, do not rely

entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on

the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-

fer significantly depending on the manu-

facturer. Lack of clearance can damage

the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-

danger road safety. Risk of accident!

●

Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in

an emergency, and drive with due care.

●

The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-

ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-

hibited use can cause accidents or can

damage your vehicle.

●

If decorative hubcaps are subsequently

fitted, make sure that they allow enough air

in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-

dent!

For the sake of the environment

Old tyres must be disposed of according to

the laws in the country concerned.

Note

●

A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-

ted t

o find out whether wheels or tyres of

different sizes to those originally fitted by

SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about

COC = certificate of conformity.

Practical tips

the combinations allowed between the

front axle (axle 1) and the rear axl

e (axle 2).

●

Never mount used tyres if you are not

sure of their “previous history”.

Tyre life

Fig. 323

Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-

ing habits will incr

ease the useful lif

e of your

es.

●

Check t

yre pressure at least once a month,

and also prior to any long trip.

●

The tyre pressure should only be checked

when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the

pressure of warm tyres.

●

Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-

ried by the vehicle

›››

Fig. 323.

●

In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,

save the modified tyre pressure

›››

page 352.

●

Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.

●

Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from

time to time.

Tyre pressure

The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a

sticker on the rear of the front left door frame

›››

Fig. 323.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-

duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-

ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-

rect inflation pressures are very important,

especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can

be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-

ing comfort (tyre pressure 

›››

Fig. 323).

When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel

consumption may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-

ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the

vehicle is going to carry the maximum load,

the tyre pressure should be increased to the

maximum value indicated on the sticker

›››

Fig. 323.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checking

the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-

flated to the highest pressure required for the

road wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary spare

wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to a

pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre

pressure label

›››

Fig. 323.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard

braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre

wear.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.

However, certain circumstances may lead to

imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-

brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,

as they otherwise cause excessive wear on

steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must

also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted

or if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-

cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the

vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you

should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-

ficial Service.

348

Wheels

WARNING

Unsuitable handling of the wheels and

tyres may lead to sudden t

yre pressure los-

ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-

out.

●

The driver is responsible for ensuring that

all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-

ted to the right pressure. The recommen-

ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label

›››

Fig. 323.

●

Check tyre pressures regularly and en-

sure they are maintained at the pressures

indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low

could cause overheating, resulting in tread

detachment or even burst tyres.

●

When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure

should be that indicated on the label

›››

Fig. 323.

●

Regularly check the cold inflation pres-

sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the

tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they

are cold.

●

Regularly check your tyres for damage

and wear.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speed or loads specified for the type of

tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-

sumption.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 324

Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 325 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be

ound on the base of the original t

e tr

eads,

dered at regular intervals and running

across the tread

›››

Fig. 324. The letters "TWI"

or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark

the position of the wear indicators.

The minimum permitted profile depth

have

been reached when the tyres have worn

down to the wear indicators. Replace the

tyres with new ones

›››

Changing wheel

s ar

ound

o ensur

e that the w

ear is equal on all tyres

the wheels should be changed round from

time to time according to the system

›››

Fig. 325. The useful life of all the tyres will

then be about the same time.

Follow the regulations of the country you are

driving in.

349

Practical tips

WARNING

The tyres must be replaced at the latest

when the tread is worn down to the tr

ead

wear indicators. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident.

●

Particularly in difficult driving conditions

such as wet or icy roads. It is important that

the tyre tread be as deep as possible and

be approximately the same on the tyres of

both the front and the rear axles.

●

The scant driving safety due to insuffi-

cient tread depth is particularly evident in

vehicle handling, when there is a risk of

“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water

and when driving through corners, and

braking is also adversely affected.

●

The speed has to be adapted according-

ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control

over the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts ar

e mat

ched t

o the rims.

When inst

alling diff

erent wheels (for instance

alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is

important to use the correct wheel nuts with

the right length and correctly shaped bolt

heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-

curely and that the brake system functions

correctly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-

theft wheel nuts*

›››

page 42.

WARNING

Wheel nuts should never be greased or

oiled.

●

Use only wheel nuts which belong to the

wheel.

●

If the prescribed t

orque of the wheel nuts

is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-

hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts

and threads can be damaged.

CAUTION

See

›››

page 45 t

o find out the recommen-

ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for

steel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

–

Winter tyres must be fitted on all f

our

wheel

–

Only use wint

er t

es that are approved for

your vehicle.

–

Please note that the maximum permissible

speed for winter tyres may be lower than

for summer tyres.

–

Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-

fective when the tread is worn down.

–

After fitting the wheels you must always

check the tyre pressures. When doing so,

take into account the correct tyre pressures

listed on the rear of the front left door frame

›››

page 348.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-

siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-

sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-

pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice

and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles

equipped with wide section tyres or with

high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on

the sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-

proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these

tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents

(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC

The vehicle documentation varies depending

on the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-

ties when the tread is worn down to a depth

of 4 mm.

COC = certificate of conformity.

350

Wheels

The performance of winter tyres is also se-

ely impair

ed by

ageing

, even if the tread is

still much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit is

stamped on all winter tyres

›››

page 346.

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds

must have an appropriate sticker attached

so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-

ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-

ice and specialised workshop. Please note

the regulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead

of winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-rating

Please note that the generally applicable

240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres

with the letter V is subject to technical re-

strictions; the maximum permissible speed

for your vehicle may be significantly lower.

The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-

pends directly on the maximum axle weights

for your car and on the listed weight rating of

the tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to

check the maximum speed which is permissi-

ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on

the basis of this information.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum speed permitted

for the winter tyres fitt

ed on your car can

cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-

trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment

When winter is over, change back to sum-

mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In

emperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-

ance will be improved if summer tyres are

used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises

while driving will all be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains must only be fitted t

o the fr

ont

wheel

, e

ven on vehicles with four-wheel

drive.

●

Check that they are correctly seated after

driving for a few yards; correct the position if

necessary, in accordance with the manufac-

turer's fitting instructions.

●

Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).

●

If there is a danger of being trapped de-

spite having mounted the chains, it is best to

disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC

›››

page 298, Connecting and disconnect-

ing the ESC and ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as

well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only

be used with the following wheel rim/tyre

combination.

195/65 R15

Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

205/55 R16

225/45 R17

Chains with links of maximum 9 mm

225/40 R18

225/35 R19 Chains with links of maximum 7 mm

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims and the rim

ring bef

e fitting sno

w chains.

WARNING

The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted

chains could lead to serious accidents and

damage.

●

ways the appropriate snow chains.

●

Observe the fitting instructions provided

by the snow chain manufacturer.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION

●

Remove the snow chains t

o drive on

roads without snow. Otherwise they will

351

Practical tips

impair vehicle handling, damage the tyres

and wear out very quickly.

●

Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-

ed if the chains come int

o direct contact

with them. SEAT recommends the use of

covered snow chains.

Tyre pressure loss indicator

Control lamp



It lights up

The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much

lower than the value set by the driv

er, or the tyre has

structural damage.

In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text

message is displayed on the instrument panel

screen.

 Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon

as possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace

any damaged tyres.



Flashes

System fault

The control lamp flashes for appr

oximately 1 minute

and then lights up permanently.

If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off

and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure loss in-

dicator

›››

page 353. If the fault continues, go to a

specialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is s

wit

ch-

ed on while the function is verified. They will

switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Tyre monitor system

Fig. 326

Instrument panel: warning of loss of

e pr

essur

Fig. 327 Glove compartment: tyre pressure

loss control switch.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel

olutions and, with this inf

ormation, the

ead of each wheel using the ABS sensors.

If the rolling circumference of one or more

wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring indi-

cator will indicate this on the instrument pan-

el through a warning lamp and a warning to

the driver

›››

Fig. 326. When only one specific

tyre is affected, its position within the vehicle

will be indicated.

 Loss of pressure: Check left

tyre pressure!

Wheel tread change

The wheel diameter changes when:

●

Tyre pressure is changed manually.

●

Tyre pressure is insufficient.

●

The tyre structure is damaged.

352

Wheels

●

The v

ehicl

e is unbal

anced because of a

oad.

●

The wheel

s on an axle are subject to a

heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).

●

The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.

●

The temporary spare wheel is fitted.

●

The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of the

tyre  monitoring indicator or it may not indi-

cate anything under certain circumstances

(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-

paved roads, or when driving with snow

chains).

Calibrating the tyre monitoring indicator

After changing the tyre pressure or replacing

one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-

cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for

example, when the front and rear wheels are

swapped.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Store the new inflation pressure in the Easy

Connect system with the button    >

Vehicle > SETTINGS > Tyres

›››

page 92 .

●

Vehicles without the Easy Connect system:

press and hold button  

›››

Fig. 327 until

a sound is heard.

When driving, the system self-calibrates the

tyre pressure provided by the driver and the

wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied

speeds the programmed values are collected

and monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, the

tyre pressure must be increased to the total

recommended tyre pressure before calibra-

tion

›››

Fig. 323.

WARNING

When the tyres are inflated at different

pressures or at a pressure that is t

oo low

then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a

loss of control of the vehicle and a serious

or fatal accident.

●

If the lamp  lights up, reduce speed im-

mediately and avoid any sudden turning or

braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,

and check the tyre pressure and status.

●

The tyre monitoring system can only op-

erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-

ted to the correct pressure when cold.

●

If a tyre has not been punctured and it

does not have to be changed immediately,

drive to the nearest specialised workshop

at a moderate speed and have the tyre

checked and inflated to the correct pres-

sure.

Note

●

Driving for the first time with new tyres at

a high speed can cause them t

o slightly ex-

pand, which could then produce an air

pressure warning.

●

If excessively lo

w tyre pressure is detec-

ted with the ignition on, an audible warning

will sound. In the event that there is a fault

in the system, an audible warning will

sound.

●

Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of

time or driving in a sporty style can tempo-

rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control

lamp shows a fault, but disappears when

road conditions or the driving style change.

●

Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring

system. Regularly check your tyres to en-

sure that the tyre pressure is correct and

that the tyres are not damaged due to

puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.

Remove objects from the tyres only when

they have not pierced the tyres.

●

The tyre monitoring indicator does not

function when there is a fault in the ESC or

ABS

›››

page 296.

353

Practical tips

Spare wheel

ocation and use of the t

empor

ary

spar

e wheel

Fig. 328

In the luggage compartment: load

oor r

aised.

Fig. 329

In the luggage compartment: remove

the sub

oof

The temporary spare wheel is stored under

the fl

oor panel in the luggage compartment

and is att

ached by a thumbnut.

The t

empor

ary spar

e wheel has been de-

signed to be used for short periods of time.

Have the tyres checked and replaced as

soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or

at a specialised workshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for a

spare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel

●

Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove

the temporary spare wheel

›››

page 143

›››

page 142.

●

Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise

›››

Fig. 328.

●

Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles

with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub-

woofer)*

To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-

move the subwoofer.

●

Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-

gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-

gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it

out.

●

Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-

ment floor: lift and secure the floor storage

compartment as explained in

›››

page 143

›››

page 142.

●

Disconnect the subwoofer

›››

Fig. 329

speaker cable.

●

Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-

wise dir

ection

›

Fig. 329

●

Remove the sub

oof

speak

er and the

spare wheel.

●

When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the

subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with

care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”

arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.

●

Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-

tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the

subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in

place.

354

Wheels

Chains

or t

echnical r

easons, sno

w chains must not

be used on the t

emporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front

wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-

porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear

wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel

that you have removed and replace the

punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING

●

After fitting the temporary spare wheel,

check the t

yre pressures as soon as possi-

ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-

dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back

of the left front door frame

›››

Fig. 323.

●

Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)

when the temporary spare wheel is fitted

on the vehicle: risk of accident!

●

Never travel more than 200 km using a

temporary spare wheel.

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking

and fast cornering: risk of accident!

●

Never use more than one temporary

spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-

dent.

●

No other type of tyre (normal summer or

winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact

temporary spare wheel rim.

●

If you are driving using the spare wheel,

the ACC system could automatically

switch off during the journey. Switch off the

system when starting off.

355

Maintenance

SEAT Maint

enance Pr

amme

Service int

erv

als

Service work and the Digital Main-

tenance Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-

enance Pl

an”)

The SEAT deal

ership or a specialised w

ork

shop records Service receipts in a central

system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-

mentation of the service history, it is possible

to reproduce the services performed any

time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service

receipt after every service carried out con-

taining all the services carried out on the sys-

tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is

replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-

able in some markets. In this case, your

SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-

rent documentation of the work.

Service works

In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT

authorised service or specialised workshop

documents the following information:

●

When each one of the services was carried

out.

●

Whether a specific repair has been sugges-

ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near

future.

●

If you have expressed a special request for

the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will

write the work order.

●

The components or fluids that were

changed.

●

The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until

the next inspection. This information is docu-

mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may

vary from one vehicle to another. A special-

ised workshop will be able to provide specific

information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service intervals ar

e not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic cause an accident and severe in-

juries.

●

Make sure that any repairs are carried

out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-

alised w

orkshop.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

o the vehicle due to insufficient w

ork or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Note

Regular services on the vehicle not only

maintain its value, but also its corr

ect oper-

ation and road safety. For this reason, con-

duct the services in accordance with SEAT

guidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service In-

erv

Services are classified as oil change service

and inspection. The service int

erv

al displ

on the instrument panel displ

ay serv

es as a

reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and

the conditions of use of the car, either the

Fixed service or the Flexible service will be

applied for an oil change service..

356

SEAT Maintenance Programme

How to know which type of service needs

o his v

ehicl

●

Check the t

abl

es below:

Oil change service

PR No.

Type of

service

Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after

1 year

QI2

Every 7500 km or after

1 year

QI3

Every 10000 km or aft

1 year

QI4

Every 15000 km or aft

1 year

QI6 Flexible

Accor

ding to the service in-

erv

al displ

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Whatever happens first.

Inspection Service

According to the service interval display

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the inf

ormation about the speci-

fications of the engine oil accor

ding t

o the

VW st

andar

›››

page 335.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible

Service

Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil

change service only has to be performed

when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take into

account the individual conditions of use and

personal driving style. A major component of

the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-

stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-

fications of the engine oil according to the

VW standard

›››

page 335.

If you do not want to the flexible service

you can select the fixed service However,

a fixed service may affect service costs

The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval display

At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-

ted by the service interval display on the in-

strument panel

›››

page 85 or in the Vehicle

settings menu of the infotainment system

›››

page 92.

The service interval display gives information

for service dates that involve an engine oil

change or an inspection. When the time for

the corresponding service comes, additional

work required, such as the change of brake

fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usually

based on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-

erse conditions of use, some of the work

must be carried out before the next service

period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

●

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.

●

Frequent short trips.

●

Letting the engine idle for a long period of

time, as in the case of taxis.

●

Using the vehicle in ar

eas with thick dust.

●

Frequent driving with a trailer (depending

on equipment).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a

lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following

parts (depending on equipment):

●

Dust and pollen filter

●

Air Care allergen filter

●

Air filter

●

Toothed chain

●

Particulate filter

●

Engine oil

357

Maintenance

The Service Advisor of your specialised

orkshop will gl

adly inf

orm you

about the

need of perf

orming service work between

normal service intervals, always considering

the conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service intervals ar

e not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic and cause accidents and severe

injuries.

●

Have the services conducted at author-

ised SEAT services or specialised work-

shops.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

to the vehicle due to insufficient w

ork or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maint

enance

orks

needed t

o ensur

e the safety and the

smooth running of the vehicle (depending on

the conditions of use and the features of

the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or

operating fluids). Maintenance services are

divided into inspection and review services.

Consult the details of the jobs required for

your vehicle at:

●

Your SEAT authorised service

●

Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-

opment of components) the sets of services

may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or

specialised workshop is always receiving up-

dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-

ceiv

ed f

or their v

ehicl

es and appr

oved by

SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.

These parts correspond exactly to the manu-

facturer's requirements in terms of design,

accuracy of the measurements and materi-

als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been

conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this

reason, we always recommend the use of

Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be

held liable for the safety and suitability of

parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-

act

's r

equirements, are an additional

service to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine,

gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical

components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the

same as the factory parts, which are also ap-

proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original

Accessories and SEAT approved accessories

for your v

ehicle. The reliability, safety and

suitability of these accessories have been in-

spected specifically for this type of vehicle.

SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and

suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT

ehicl

e you will be abl

e t

o enjoy the benefits

and co

verage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,

your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-

ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-

ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-

od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as

you carry out the recommended Inspection

358

Vehicle maintenance

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-

ised Service

If your SEAT v

ehicl

e is immobilised due t

o a

ault or an accident, our assistance services

will help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT Mobility

Service differs depending on the country in

which the vehicle was purchased. For further

information ask your SEAT dealership or the

SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect

condition of ne

w v

ehicl

es. Check the pur

chase agr

eement or complementary addi-

tional documentation provided by your Tech-

nical Service to see the conditions and the

terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-

mation in this regard in your SEAT Official

Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maint

enance and cl

eaning

Basic observ

ations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain

the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may

become a pr

erequisite to demand the war-

ranty in the event of corrosion damage and

deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-

work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary

care products. Please follow the instructions

for application on the packaging.

WARNING

●

Cleaning products and other materials

used f

or car care can be damaging to your

health if misused.

●

Always keep care products in a safe

place, out of the reach of children. Danger

of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment

●

When purchasing car care products,

chose products that ar

e compatible with

the environment.

●

The waste from car-care products should

not be disposed of with ordinary household

waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.

remains of insects, bird excr

ements, tree resin

or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the

more damage it can cause to the surface.

High temperatures, for instance strong sun-

light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using

plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird

droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and

a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-

ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipment

When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-

sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-

structions for the equipment. This applies

particularly to the operating pressure and the

distance between the spraying water. Do not

aim the jet directly to the side window gas-

kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-

roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-

ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or

camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least

40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-

pressure cleaner.

359

Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out

in a dir

ect str

eam or one that has a r

ating

jet f

or forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed

60°C.

Automatic car washes

Spray the vehicle before starting the car

wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-

amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen

wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-

structions of the car wash tunnel operator,

especially if your vehicle has detachable

parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand

Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a

soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-

ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by

hand

To prevent damage to the vehicle when

washing it, first remove the thicker dust and

dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and

fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner

for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To

avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do

not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with

a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-

bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water

and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of

water with a leather cloth.

WARNING

●

Only wash the vehicle with the ignition

swit

ched off or according to the specifica-

tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk

of accident!

●

When cleaning the underbody or the in-

side of the wheel arches, protect yourself

from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of

cut!

●

After cleaning the brakes could act more

slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice

on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-

dent! In this case the brakes should be

dried by pressing the brake pedal several

times.

CAUTION

●

Before washing the vehicl

e in an auto-

matic car wash, please make sure to re-

tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them

from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-

ployed electrically!

●

Do not wash the vehicl

e in direct sunlight.

Risk of damaging the paint job!

●

Do not use sponges, abrasive household

sponges or similar to clean insect remains.

Risk of damaging the surface!

●

Vehicle parts with matte paint:

–

Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!

–

Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-

age the appearance of matte paint.

–

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts

with matte paint, as removing them

may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment

The car should only be washed in special

wash bays. These places are prepar

ed to

prevent oily water from getting into the

public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-

tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual

components of the v

ehicl

e can be check

ed in

the f

oll

owing tables. The contents should be

understood merely as a recommendation. Go

to your specialised workshop if you have

360

Vehicle maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.

e he gener

al consider

ations int

o account

›››

in Take special care with... on

page 364.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Sensors / Camer

a l

enses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol-

vent-fr

ee cleaning product

Camera lenses: soft cloth with

an alcohol-free cleaning prod-

uct

Snow/ice

Hand brush/Anti frost spray

with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasion

dust

Acid-free special cleaning

product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-

uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, if a

steel cleaning product is re-

quir

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

aint

Problem Solution

Paint flaws

Check the paint's colour code

in an authorised service and re-

store with a touch-up pencil

Spill

ed fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust

tank

Apply rust remover and then

apply har

d wax. Go you your

specialised workshop if you

have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion

Have your specialised work-

shop take care of this

The wat

er does

not create drop-

lets on the cl

ean

paint

Maintain with hard wax (at

least 2 times a year)

No shine de-

spite sober main-

tenance/paint

Treat with suit

able wax and ap-

ply paint preservative after

wards if the wax used does not

contain preservative ingredi-

ents

Tanks, e.g. insect

remains, bird

droppings, tree

sap

, road salt

Immediately soften with water

and remove with a microfibre

cloth

Fat-based dirt,

e.g. cosmetic

products or

sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-

tral soap solution

and a soft

cloth

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Carbon fibr

e par

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-

ted parts

›››

page 359

361

Maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of water

Interior cl

eaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and

then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

astic par

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution

, if pos-

sible solvent-free plastic clean-

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Displ

ays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal

display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with

neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of water

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, al-

lowed t

o dry before retracting

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

abrics, ar

tificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirt

stuck to surfaces

Vacuum cl

eaner

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee, tea,

ood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral

soap solution

Problem Solution

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, make-

up, et

Apply a neutral soap solution

Absorb the dissolved grease

and paint particles drying with

an absorbent cloth, in case you

must treat it with water after-

wards

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

Special stain remo

ve: dry with

an absorbent cloth, if applica-

ble, apply neutral soap solution

afterwards

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Nat

al leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap

solution

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee, tea,

blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

Dry stains: stain remover suita-

ble for leather

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, make-

up, et

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

and suitable stain remover for

leather

Dry stains: grease solvent

spray

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

Stain remo

ver suitable for

leather

362

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-

larly to protect fr

om sunlight.

Use a colour preservative if re-

quired

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of water

Carbon fibre par

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights

●

Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with

a dry cl

oth or sponge

●

Do not use cl

eaning pr

oducts that cont

ain

alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels

●

Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive

products.

●

If the protective coating on the paint of the

rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,

scratches, etc., the damage should be re-

paired immediately.

Camera lenses

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice

or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of

cracking the lens!

●

To clean the camera lens, never use abra-

sive cleaning products or products with alco-

hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows

●

Remove snow and ice from windows and

exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To

avoid scratches, the scraper should only be

pushed in one direction and not moved to

and fro.

●

Never remove snow or ice from windows

and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.

Risk of cracks on the windows!

●

To prevent damage to the heating of the

rear window, do not put stickers over the

heating elements.

Covers/trims

●

Do not use cleaning products or chrome

based cleaning agents.

Paint

●

The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust

before applying wax or care products. Risk of

scratches!

●

Do not apply wax or care products if the

vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of

damaging the paint job!

●

The ambient rust deposits must not be re-

moved through friction. Risk of damaging the

paint job!

●

Remove cosmetic products and sunlight

immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel

●

The screens, the instrument panel and the

trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of

scratches!

●

Make sure that the instrument panel is

switched off and cooled down before clean-

ing.

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks between the

instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-

age!

Control panels

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-

trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts

●

Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.

●

Seat belts and their components must nev-

er be cleaned with chemical products, nor

should they be allowed to come into contact

with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-

jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!

●

If you find any damage to the belt webbing,

belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,

ask your specialised workshop to replace the

belt in question.

363

Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-

●

Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara

eather with l

eather cl

eaning pr

oducts, sol

vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers

or similar products.

●

If the stain is very hard to remove, take the

vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it

removed there. This will prevent damage.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage

the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro

fasteners are closed.

Natural leather

●

Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,

spot removers or similar products on leather.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for

long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose

some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to

cover the leather.

WARNING

Do not use water-repellent coatings on the

windscreen. In bad visibility conditions

such as humid weather, darkness or when

the sun is in its l

owest point, visibility may

be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-

ings can also cause the windscreen wiper

blades to make noise.

Note

●

Remains of insects can be removed much

mor

e easily with previously treated paint.

●

Regular car care treatments can prevent

deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary

or a l

ong period of time

, cont

act a qualified

orkshop. They will gladly inform you about

the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-

sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding

the vehicle's battery

›››

page 341.

Accessories and modifi-

cations t

o the v

ehicl

Accessories, spar

e par

ts and

repair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer

for advice before purchasing accessories

and r

eplacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-

ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-

son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-

cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-

ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official

Service has the latest information from the

manufacturer and can recommend accesso-

ries and replacement parts which are suita-

ble for your requirements. They can also an-

swer any questions you might have regarding

official regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-

sories and Genuine SEAT parts

. SEAT has

tested these parts and accessories for suita-

bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official

Services have the necessary experience and

facilities to ensure that the parts are installed

correctly and professionally.

364

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Any r

etro-fitted equipment which has a di-

ect eff

ect on the v

ehicl

e and/or the way it is

driven, such as a cruise control system or

electronically-controlled suspension, must

be approved for use in your vehicle and bear

the e mark (the European Union's authorisa-

tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-

ted which do not serve to control the vehicle

itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop

or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the 

sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in

the European Union).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone hold-

ers or cup holders, should never be fitt

on the covers, or within the working range

of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger

of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-

dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic

components, softw

, wiring or dat

a tr

ansfer

in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership

cannot be held liable for any damage

caused by modifications and/or work per-

formed incorrectly.

We therefore recommend that all work should

be performed by a SEAT Official Service us-

ing genuine SEAT parts

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or

other work on your vehicle can lead t

o mal-

functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip-

ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)

Any r

etr

ofit inst

all

ations of r

adio transmitters

in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT

generally authorises in-vehicle installations

of approved types of radio transmitters provi-

ded that:

●

The antenna is installed correctly.

●

The aerial is installed on the exterior of the

vehicle (and shielded cables are used to-

gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).

●

The effective transmitting power does not

exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-

shop will be able to inform you about options

for installing and operating radio transmitters

with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters

Commercial mobile telephones or radio

equipment might interfere with the electron-

ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.

This may be due to:

●

No external aerial.

●

External aerial incorrectly installed.

●

Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable

mobile telephones or radio equipment inside

the vehicle without a properly installed exter-

nal aerial

›››

ease not

e al

so that the maximum r

ange of

the equipment can only be achie

ved with an

external aerial.

Business equipment

Retrofit installation of business or private

equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-

ded the equipment cannot interfere with the

driver's immediate control of the vehicle and

that any such equipment carries the  mark.

Any retrofit equipment that could influence

the driver's control of the vehicle must have a

type approval for your vehicle and must carry

the e mark.

WARNING

Mobile telephones or radio equipment

which is operated inside the vehicle without

365

Maintenance

a properly installed external aerial can

create excessiv

e magnetic fields that

could cause a health hazard.

Note

●

The post

erior fitting of electric and elec-

tronic equipment in this v

ehicle affects its

licence and could lead to the withdrawal of

the vehicle registration document under

certain circumstances.

●

Please use the mobile telephone/radio

operating instructions.

366

Information for the user

Inf

ormation f

or the user

Inf

ormation st

ed by the

control units

Storage of accident data (Event

Data Recorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder

(EDR).

The EDR’

s function is t

o r

ecor

d dat

a in the

event of a mild or serious accident. These da-

ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-

ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range

(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-

ing data and data from the restraint systems,

such as:

●

How different vehicle systems worked.

●

Whether the driver and the occupants were

wearing their seat belts.

●

How hard the acceleration or brake pedal

was pressed.

●

Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also

recorded. This includes data such as whether

the systems were inactive or active and if

such action had an impact on the vehicle’s

dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the

aforementioned situations, accelerating or

decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-

cludes data from systems such as:

●

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

●

Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist).

●

Park Pilot system

●

Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specific

accident situations. No data are recorded in

normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the

vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-

ces are personal data such as name, age, or

gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties

(such as criminal proceedings authorities)

may relate the contents of the EDR data to

other data sources and create a personal

reference in the context of an accident inves-

tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary

to access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-

face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless

the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee

or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-

ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-

tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related

products, SEAT may use the EDR data for

field research and in order to improve vehicle

system quality. Any data used for the purpo-

ses of research will be treated anonymously

(in other words, no reference will be made to

the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in

the design, choice of mat

erial

s and manuf

ac-

e of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-

cycling

●

Joints and connections designed for easy

dismantling.

●

Modular construction to facilitate disman-

tling.

●

Increased use of single-grade materials.

367

Information for the user

●

astic parts and el

ast

omers ar

e mark

ed in

accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and

ISO 1629.

Choice of materials

●

Use of recycled materials.

●

Use of compatible plastics in the same part

if its components are not easily separated.

●

Use of recycled materials and/or materials

originating from renewable sources.

●

Reduction of volatile components, including

odour, in plastic materials.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions

dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive

2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,

hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

●

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the

protective wax for cavities.

●

Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-

cle transport.

●

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-

tems.

●

Recycling and energy recovery from resi-

dues (RDF).

●

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

●

Use of systems for the recovery of residual

heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,

etc.).

●

The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electron-

ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that

are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must

be mark

ed with the following symbol:



This symbol indicates that EED must not be

discarded as home waste but through selec-

tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-

rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara-

tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-

ces. The manuf

act

ers of these de

vices de-

are that they comply with Directive

2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration

is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo



Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you to

associate the name of the device in the dec-

laration of compliance with the f

eatures of

the vehicle and the terminology used in the

on-board documentation.

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the device

according t

o the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Radiofrequency re-

mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS14

77,

FS94

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxili-

ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT -

50000914

elestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

368

Information for the user

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the device

according t

o the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-

tem

MQB-B B

Radar sensors for as-

sistance syst

ems

ARS4-B

MRRev

o14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-

ernal antenna of the

car

UMTS/GSM-MMC

TS/GSM-MMC-AG2

LTE-MBC-EU

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the device

according t

o the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated in

dashboard module

instrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Ant

enna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Big

family

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 R

oof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG

720166002

8S7.035.503.B

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the device

according t

o the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225

6F9.035.225

3V5.035.577.A

7N0.

035.552.J

7N0.035.552.K

7N0.035.552.Q

5F4.035.225

5F4.035.225.A

5F4.035.225.B

5F9.035.225

5F9.035.225.A

5F9.035.225.B

575,035,225

575.035.225.A

575.035.225.B

5FJ.035.225

5FJ.035.225.A

5FJ.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all

ant components must include the ad-

ess of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-

nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot

include a sticker are listed below, as long as it

is legally required:

369

Information for the user

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicle

Addresses of the

manuf

acturers

Radiofrequency remote

control key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co

Rixbecker Straße 75

59552 Lippstadt,

GERMANY

Radio fr

equency re-

mote control (auxiliary

heater)

Digades gmbH

Äußere W

eberstraße 20

02763 Zittau, GERMANY

ebasto Thermo &

Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Str. 9

82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicle

Addresses of the

manuf

acturers

Radar sensors for as-

sistance systems

ADC Automotive Dist

ance

Control Systems GmbH

Peter

-Dornier-Straße 10

88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbH

Postfach 16 61

71226 Leonber

GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

Auxiliary heating

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

370

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Bluethooth

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models

2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambra

and T

arraco

GSM 1800: 1710-

1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

Tarraco

LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for assistance systems

76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

371

Technical data

Indications about the

echnical dat

Impor

ant inf

ormation

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical data

may diff

er depending on optional equipment

or v

ersion of the model, as w

ell as in the case

of special v

ehicl

es and equipment for certain

countries.

The information in the official vehicle docu-

mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-

fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly

used to denote engine power

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Cetane number, indication of the die-

sel combustion power.

RON

Resear

ch octane number, indication of

the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle ID number

The vehicle ID number can be found in the

foll

owing places:

●

In the infotainment system using button

   > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Serv-

ice > Vehicle ID number.

●

One the vehicle's data label.

●

In front, under the windscreen.

●

To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plate

The type pl

ate is located on the vehicle’s right

hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export

countries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived

om measur

ements perf

ormed or supervised

by certified EU l

abor

atories, according to the

legislation in force at the time (for more infor-

mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-

ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and

apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and

emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-

cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO

emissions de-

pend on the equipment/features of each indi-

vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,

road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-

mental conditions, load or number of passen-

gers.

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and die-

sel engines

Vehicles with front-wheel drive:

50 l

, 7 l reserve

Vehicl

es with four-wheel drive:

55 l, 8.5 l reserve

Natur

al gas en-

gine

approx. 17.3 kg

Additional petrol tank: 9 l, of

which appro

x 7.6 l is a reserve

The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac-

eristics of the nat

al gas pumps. The capacit

y indi-

cat

ed is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200

bar.

372

Indications about the technical data

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-

ainer

Versions without

headlight washer

system

approx. 3 litr

Versions with

headlight washer

system

approx. 5 litr

Weights

Load on the roof

The maximum authorised r

oof l

oad f

or your

ehicl

e is 75 kg.

Empty weight, total weight, axle loads

The empty weight of the vehicle with driver

(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)

1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can

increase the empty weight, which means that

the possible useful load decreases propor-

tionally.

Trailer weight

The maximum permitted drawbar load on the

ball head of the towing device is 80 kg.

WARNING

The values indicated for the maximum per-

mitted weights must not be exceeded.

Ther

e is a risk of accident and damage!

373

Technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines

1.0 EcoTSI Start-Stop 1.5 Start-Stop ACT

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/5,000-5,500 96 (131)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2,000-3,500 200/1,400-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement

(cm

)

3/999 4/1,498

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual manual manual

Top speed (km/h) 195 (V) 196 (V) 203 (V) 207 (V)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

onds)

9.8 10.1 9.4 9.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,720 1,780 1,780 1,840

374

Indications about the technical data

Petrol engines

1.5 Start-Stop ACT

2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Sportourer ST

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 213 (290)/5,400-6,500 221 (300)/5,300-6,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 380/1,950-5,300 400/2,000-5,200

No. of cylinders/displacement

(cm

)

4/1,498 4/1,984 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ Super 98 / Super 95 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG manual DSG DSG DSG DSG / 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 215 (V) 213 (VI) 215 (IV) 215 (V) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

onds)

8.2 8.3 8.2 8.3 6.0 6.3 4.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,780 1,790 1,840 1,860 1,920 2,020 2,090

375

Technical data

Natural gas / petrol engine

1.5 TGI Start-Stop

Leon Leon Sportourer ST

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 96 (131)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1,400-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,498

Fuel

CNG

Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual automatic manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 206 (VI) 206 (VI) 206 (VI) 206 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.1 9.9 10.1 10

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,810 1,840 1,850 1,880

Diesel engines

1.6 TDI Start-Stop 2.0 TDI Start-Stop

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/3,250-4,000 110 (150)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,250 340/1,750-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 4/1,598 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual manual manual DSG manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 197 (V) 194 (V) 215 (VI) 211 (VII) 215 (VI) 212 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

onds)

9.8 10.6 8.5 8.4 8.8 8.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,870 1,920 1,850 1,890 1,940 1,980

376

Indications about the technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 330

Dimensions.

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon X-Perience

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 861/785 861/1,052 861/1,060

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,636 2,636 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,282 4,549 4,551

E/F Front/rear

track width (mm)

1,533/1,504

1,549/1,520

1,541/1,504

1,547/1,510

G Width (mm) 1,816 1,816 1,816

H Height at k

erb weight (mm) 1,459 1,454

1,481

Turning radius (m) 10.9

This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Dimension to the roof bars.

377

Index

Numbers and Symbol

4Driv

e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ABS

see

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 364

Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

function to prevent overtaking on the right . 281

indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

AdBlue

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Adjust

front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Air conditioning

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 184

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Anti-trap function

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

App

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183

Aspects to think about before starting the ve-

hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 272

parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 78

traffic jam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Audible warning

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

379

Index

Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Aut

omatic car w

ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360

disconnecting the Aut

o Hol

d function . . . . . 294

Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 119

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

emergency release of the selector lever. . . 262

ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 257

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 257

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

AUX-IN multimedia socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Backrest of the front passenger seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Backrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 153

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Blown bulbs

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Bluetooth®

connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331, 334

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Camera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Capacities

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Care

see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

tail light in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Changing the main beam headlight bulbs

daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Childproof locks

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Child seats

group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36

Cleaning the vehicle

high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 359

special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

380

Index

Clocks

set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

osing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

332

panor

amic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Communication between the Infotainment

System and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 298

audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 298

fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 330

press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 277

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 322

replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Controls and displays

overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

see: RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Deactivation of cylinders

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 72

Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Delayed shutdown (Infotainment system) . . . 169

Diesel

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Display of road signs on the instrument panel

activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Disposal

seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Distance control

see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

381

Index

Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Driv

er inf

ormation syst

ap timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 269

with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313, 315, 319

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 212

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Electrical accessories

see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 250

Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Emergencies

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

see Emergency Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Emergency braking assist system

indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Emergency opening

driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Emergency operation

front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Emissions control system

AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Engine

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

start (driver instructions with the mechani-

cal contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Engine and ignition

automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 247

emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 248

switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331, 334

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

382

Index

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

windo

w w

asher t

ank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

340

Engine cool

ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Engine failure

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Engine oil

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 337

checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 335

Engine oil pressure

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Enlarge

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Environmental tip

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 364

ESC

electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 296

multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Filling capacities

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 123

Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Frequency band

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Front Assist

see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 272

Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Front fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Fuel

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Fuel consumption

inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 329

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Fuel tank cap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Fuel tank flap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

383

Index

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

col

our coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

fuse bo

x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54, 55, 56

eparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

GALA (speed-dependent volume) . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Gear change

engage the gears (manual change) . . . . . . 254

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

see also Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . 292

Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 17

Head-protection airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 135

Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

CD or DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

change the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

DVD settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

FM, AM, DAB settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Media settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

navigation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 166

phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

rotary/push buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

scroll button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

scroll (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

search on lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 193

share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

sound distribution (Balance and Fader) . . . . 174

station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

voice control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

volume and sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

384

Index

Infotainment system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

334, 356

Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

334

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68, 69

contr

ol and w

arning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 74

menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 88

use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72

Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Interferences caused by mobile phones . . . . . 169

Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Keyless Access

Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 104

Keyless Access lock and ignition system:

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Keyless Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Keyless Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Keys

assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

instructions for the driver (mechanical con-

tact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 110

vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Lap timer

lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 259

Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . 123

headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

385

Index

switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

urn signal l

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

Loading the luggage compartment

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 138

positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 146

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Lock and unlock

in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 138

emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148

retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 142

variable luggage compartment floor . 142, 143

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 143

Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 142

Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Malfunctions

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Media

changing track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

playback modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

playback order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

requirements for data media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

select track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

switching the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

unreadable CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

MEDIA

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Mirrors

adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Multifunction steering wheel

with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323, 326

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

import vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

offroad navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

selecting the destination on the map . . . . . . 217

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

special destinations (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

traffic bulletins (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

updating the installing navigation data . . . . 216

Net bag

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Net for luggage

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

386

Index

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148

Noise

adaptiv

e cruise contr

ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

276

es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 350

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Offroad Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 323

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 323

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Operating fault

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Operation in winter

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Painting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Panoramic sliding sunroof

see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Parking aid

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 305

parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 305

surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Parking aid system

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304

Parking brake

automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Parking distance warning system

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304

Parking (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304

Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 14

Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Power sockets

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Power steering

see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Preheating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Properties of oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 278

387

Index

Radio

equency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

189

indications and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

189

main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

189

eset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

save station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

RADIO

additional DAB services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

additional DAB stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

DAB memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

DAB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

DAB radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

DAB slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

DAB station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

DAB transmission standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

indication of station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 193

set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

station tracking by RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

tracking of DAB stations on FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Radio-operated remote control

see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

automatic station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

RDS Regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 113

Rear mounting

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Rear seat

fold down with the remote unlocking lever . 137

folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . 136

Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Recognition of road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

gas tank indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70, 82

Road signs

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Rotary/push knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety instructions

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

388

Index

using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sav

e fuel

inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260

Scr

een . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 21

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

data transmission and control functions . . . 186

Seats

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Service

Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Service Menu

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 257

Side airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Special characteristics

AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51

tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

volume reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

SSD

see Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 251

the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Station

set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 72

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

389

Index

compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

doors, bonnet and r

ear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . .

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 255

service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 76

Steering

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Steering wheel

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 257

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Storage compartment accessories

see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Storing objects

bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 150

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 146

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 132

anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Tail light bulbs in the bodywork

remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Tail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Tail lights on the rear lid

remove the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 63

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Telephone

Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

favourites (quick access to the phone

book) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 234

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

short messages (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Temperature indicator

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Time

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 80

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 255, 257

To change the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

To park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36

Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36

Torque

wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Towable loads

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

390

Index

Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311

w hook

fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ace in the reserve position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

safety check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

operation and conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Towing device

fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51

rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51

tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

situations where it has to be disconnected . 288

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 315

adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 319

exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311

loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 305

power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311

technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311

trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . 308, 312

Trailer mode

see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . 146

Trips abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Tyre monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Tyre pressure loss indicator

tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Tyres

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Unlock and lock

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

connecting external data media . . . . . . . . . . 207

error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Variable luggage compartment floor . . . 142, 143

Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

391

Index

raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

unl

ocking and l

ocking with K

eyl

ess Access .

104

vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Vehicle battery

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 341

electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Vehicle care

wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Voice control

available languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Warning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 359

high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 359

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 350

anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43

caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Wheels

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 44

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Window washer

window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Winter conditions

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Wiper and rear window wiper blades

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Wiper blades

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

connect external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

392

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,

that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no

right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or

omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

Vehicle identiﬁcation data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification

number:

Date of vehicle registration

or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Conﬁrmation of receipt of documentation

and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered

with the vehicle:

YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was

checked

Location:

Date:

Signature of owner:

Owner’s manual

SEAT Leon

5F0012720BN

Inglés

5F0012720BN (11.19)

SEAT Leon Inglés (11.19)

Seat Leon Sportstourer 2019

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Seat LEON SPORTSTOURER 2019 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Klarstein 52046250 Lil'Loo removable children's toilet seat

Maxi-Cosi VB024OXPE Oxford Modular Stroller with 180° Rotating Infant Seat for Versatile Travel

Maxi-Cosi VB023OXMI Oxford Modular Stroller with Mico Pro Infant Car Seat in Black

Maxi-Cosi VB022OXAM Oxford Modular Stroller with Ambra Ultra-Lightweight Infant Car Seat for Easy Travel and Convenience

Maxi-Cosi Andi 360° Rotating All-in-One Convertible Car Seat with Vehicle Seat Protector Features Safety and Comfort

Vevor XF8W217 Shop Stool Adjustable Garage Seat 300 lbs Load with Backrest & Wheels